JP2022096349A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having light emitting means that can efficiently discharge the heat generated by a projector and can enhance the appearance.SOLUTION: In a projector that projects light for displaying an image on a screen, a first opening opened toward the external space of a cover member and a second opening opened toward a first space are formed in the cover member. The first space and a second space that communicates from the first opening in the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening. The projector is arranged in the first space, and the second space can store liquid by closing the lower part. The cover member is formed with an opening for wiring for inserting the wiring connecting to the projector. The second space and the external space of the cover member are communicated with each other through the opening for wiring. The opening for wiring allows a mechanism for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to be discharged to the outside of the cover member to be inserted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a light emitting decorative portion is made to emit strong light by using a light collecting member provided with a light reflecting portion to enhance the decorative effect (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-018631

The present inventor may be able to improve the aesthetics of the gaming machine by devising the configuration of the light guide member in the process of diligently studying the gaming machine provided with such a light emitting means. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the aesthetic appearance of a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
With the screen
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen,
A cover member arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
The cover member is formed with a first opening opened toward the external space of the cover member and a second opening opened toward the first space formed inside the cover member. Cover,
The first space and the second space communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The second space can store liquid by closing the lower part.
The cover member is further formed with a wiring opening for inserting a wiring for connecting a device arranged outside the cover member and the projector.
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening.
The wiring opening can be inserted with a mechanism for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance of a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, stop operation mode, display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the limit processing of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the mode flag storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the game start in advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state control process at the end of a game which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the end of a game in an advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the medalless gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control board of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are in the open state. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector apparatus and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of a projector device. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. 48. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 54 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 54 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 viewed from diagonally rearward. It is a perspective view of the case which accommodates the internal component of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower pedestal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is a top view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover along the arrow LL shown in FIG. 60 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover in an exploded manner. It is the figure which looked at the projector cover with the upper wall part removed from diagonally above. It is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63. It is a perspective view of a blind. It is a top view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall part of a projector cover removed. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 along the arrow NN. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 65 and a case is arranged. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 7 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70. It is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of an opening. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of an opening from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a projector cover and a fan near an opening seen from the front and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which attached the blind and the duct cover from the left. It is a perspective view which looked at the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 76. It is an exploded perspective view of a blind and a duct cover. It is a figure for demonstrating the method of attaching the upper door mechanism to a cabinet. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement position of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. It is a figure which shows the air flow path which can be formed inside the projector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the decorative unit and the frame member of a pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from a projector, and the screen on a cabinet side. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a front view of a gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. (B) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. (C) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a vertical sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower holding member, the upper holding member, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower holding member and the upper holding member from the front while the translucent plate and the screen sheet are seen from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper holding member and the upper frame from the lower side. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper frame, the 1st structure, the 2nd structure, the 3rd structure, the 4th structure, and a screen sheet from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the cross section of a light transmissive plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a right side view of the cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the lower side. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which light is projected from a projector device from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the rear. It is a vertical sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closure lid, and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of the gaming machine in the state where the closure lid is removed from the back wall. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. It is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a partial enlarged view around the operation window in the gaming machine in the state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the central screen unit and the front top unit from the upper door mechanism, and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the central screen unit and the front top unit from the upper door mechanism, and looked at from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the center screen from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the uneven portion on the right side in the central screen. It is a partially enlarged perspective view near the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the side decorative portion is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136. It is a perspective view which looked at the right side decoration part from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the right side decoration part from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the right side decoration part. It is sectional drawing of the center screen and the right side decoration part. It is a front view of the upper door mechanism. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. It is a perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is an exploded perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a side LED and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a light guide and a side light lens. It is a perspective view which looked at the side light lens from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the side light lens. It is sectional drawing of the side light lens. It is a perspective view of a rear light-transmitting plate, a light guide, and a side light lens. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part and a side light lens. It is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plate. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the side light shielding plate was removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side LED board cover is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is a partial enlarged perspective view around the left side part in a shielding wall member. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the shield wall member and the harness protector for a speaker are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. (A) is a schematic view of how light is projected from a projector in this embodiment as viewed from above. (B) is a schematic view of how light is projected from a projector in another embodiment as viewed from above. It is a front view of a shielding wall member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a shielding wall member and a light guide. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front / rear frame and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in FIG. 168. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper front and rear frame from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the top frame base from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the harness protector for a speaker is removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the top frame base from the front. It is a bottom view of the top frame base. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from a little lower side. It is sectional drawing of the center screen and the top frame base. It is a schematic diagram of the flat surface part in a central screen, and the lower surface wall in a top frame base. It is a perspective view which looked at the center screen from the front and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the center screen from the rear and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the central screen from the rear and the top. It is a perspective view which looked at the top frame base from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185. It is sectional drawing of the center screen and the top frame base. It is sectional drawing of the center screen and the top frame base. It is sectional drawing of the center screen and the top frame base. It is sectional drawing of the central screen and the rear translucent plate. (A) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in this embodiment is incident on the rear translucent plate as seen from above. (B) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in another embodiment is incident on the rear translucent plate from above. It is sectional drawing of the central screen and the rear translucent plate. It is a perspective view which looked at the rear light-transmitting plate from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the central screen and the rear translucent plate from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the under frame is removed from the upper door mechanism. It is sectional drawing of the upper door mechanism. It is a front view which shows the state which the top side panel was removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the top side panel and the speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a front view which shows the state which the top center panel and the top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow-eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 203. It is sectional drawing of the top frame base, the top center LED substrate, and the center LED substrate base. It is a perspective view which looked at the top reflector from the front. It is a rear view of the top reflector. It is a front view of the top reflector and the top center LED board. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector, a top center LED board, and a top frame base. It is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector as seen from the front and the right side. It is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. It is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector as seen from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the left arrow eye reflector. It is a perspective view of the center LED, the top reflector, and the left arrow eye reflector. It is a perspective view of the center LED, the top reflector, and the left arrow eye reflector. It is sectional drawing of the center LED, the top reflector, and the left arrow eye reflector. It is a perspective view of a top frame base and a top lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top lens is removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. It is a perspective view which looked at the top lens from the rear and the top. It is a perspective view of the top center LED substrate, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. It is sectional drawing of the top center LED substrate, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. It is sectional drawing of the top center LED substrate, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a left arrow eye reflector and a top lens. It is sectional drawing of the left arrow eye reflector and the top lens. It is a perspective view which looked at the top center panel from the front. It is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel. It is a perspective view which looked at the top center panel from the rear and the top. It is a rear view of a top center panel and a top lens. It is sectional drawing of the top center panel and the top lens. It is a front view of a top center panel and a top lens. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the top frame base and the top center panel viewed from slightly above in an exploded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base seen from a little above. It is a perspective view which looked at the top center panel from the rear and a little from the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel viewed from the rear and slightly above. It is sectional drawing of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel. It is a perspective view which looked at the top lens from the bottom. It is sectional drawing of the top lens. It is a schematic diagram of a top center LED substrate, a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel. It is sectional drawing of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel. It is a figure which shows the example of the lock effect. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1". It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2". It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3". It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4". It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5". It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6". It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the main display device in a pseudo game. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a pseudo game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a normal pseudo game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel effect processing after a pseudo game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the pseudo game after reel effect performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the random delay processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporal change of a reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporal change of a reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporal change of a reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting a pseudo game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a normal pseudo game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the stop button operation acceptance processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the swing control processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending the pseudo game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo game challenge operation reception process performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the main display device. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus winning processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect determination process at the end of a game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect execution processing at the end of a game performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion effect execution processing performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type A performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type C performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the main display device at the end of an AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state. (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the main display device. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the character customization screen for customizing a character. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history screen. It is a figure which shows the game system. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop lock. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop lock. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock at the time of a middle stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock at the time of a middle stop.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, a part of the internal structure may be described in the following description of the external structure, and a part of the external structure may be described in the description of the internal structure.

[1-1. Exterior structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. Further, the housing 2 is arranged in a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It also has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, an upper surface wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 are not shown. Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G4a penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. Then, a wooden plate member G4b is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game store, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, a metal material or a resin material is used. It can be configured with, or it can be integrally formed with the upper surface wall G4. Further, as long as a certain strength is secured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each constituent member may be made of wood or a resin material.

Further, in the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side of the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G101 that opens forward on the lower side of the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate for partitioning the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. There is. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device or the like is appropriately accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, the "main body frame" and "main body" are used. It can also be referred to as a "support", a "support frame", a "fixed frame", or the like.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door (front door) provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable by, for example, an opening / closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. One of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening / closing mechanism, and the other can be attached / detached only when one of the door mechanisms is opened. You can also do it.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at the center thereof and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210 described later provided on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the effect via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion thereof, and a reel unit RU on the back side of the main display window 4 and mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent reel band mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body, and a plurality of reel bands (for example, 20) are included in the reel band. The symbols (pieces) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. Further, inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, a light source (reel lamp included in the lamps / LEDs described later) is provided at least at a position where the design can be visually recognized from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When the 3C and 3R are rotating, the visibility of the design is ensured by illuminating them from the inside with a constant brightness.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and an effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub-display device 220, which will be described later. The sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel to function not only as a function for displaying the effect but also as one of the buttons for the effect. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in a substantially horizontal flat pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, a MAX bet button 6a, a 1-bet button 6b, and a settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and a substantially central portion. It has an effect button 10a provided and a medal insertion slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are player's game operations (bet operation, "insertion operation" and "hanging operation") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachi-slot machine 1. It is also an operation unit that accepts). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) and the number of medals credited is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. To. On the other hand, if there are no more credited medals than the difference, the medals will not be bet. When the 1-bet button 6b is operated, the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, and if there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. If the checkout button 9 is operated without any credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the range of creditable medals (for example, 50). It may be possible to accept a player's game operation (C / P mode selection operation) for selecting either a mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medal is not credited. That is, the settlement button 9 can be made to function as a so-called C / P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The accepted medal is detected by the selector 31 described later, and it is determined whether or not the medal is appropriate. If one received medal is not appropriate, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11 described later. Further, if one received medal is appropriate and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of medals being credited has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payment exit 11 described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal portion. The information display device 14 is configured to include a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided below the above-mentioned pedestal portion, with a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided in the substantially central portion, and on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation unit that is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range and receives a player's game operation (start operation) for starting the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a player's game operation (stop operation) for stopping each rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the game store side (for example, a store clerk of the game store, the same applies hereinafter) has a door key (not shown) in the keyhole. ) Is inserted and turned to the right to unlock and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when the administrator of the game store turns the door key counterclockwise with the door key inserted in the keyhole, the same reset operation as the reset switch 53 described later may be detectable. Further, in the present embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be locked. It is also possible to provide a mechanism separately so that the opening and closing can be controlled independently.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the central portion of the lower portion thereof, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout outlet 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , Has sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout outlet 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name and a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (for lamps and LEDs described later). Consists of a lumbar lamp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges the medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described later and those returned from the selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are on the back side of each, and are output from speakers 35a and 35b (speakers 35a are omitted in FIG. 2) mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G, and sound effects such as sound effects and BGM. Is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided corresponding to the partitioning of the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space, but the opening in the cabinet G is appropriately provided. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Further, it can be configured as a door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door, etc.) which are doubly configured in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "door", and since they function as a member that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, the "opening / closing member" and the "door". It can also be referred to as a "member" or a "door member".

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the start operation is performed by the player), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate by the drive control of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later. As a result, the design displayed on the main display window 4 is variablely displayed. Further, in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the stop operation is performed by the player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later are driven and controlled. By doing so, each rotation is stopped. As a result, the symbol displayed on the main display window 4 is stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 have a variable display unit (means) capable of variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, or variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols. ) Configure a plurality of possible variable display units (means). The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "design display unit (means)", a "variable display unit (means)", or the like. Further, the design can also be referred to as a "picture", a "pattern", or the like, and can also be referred to as "identification information" or the like in that sense as long as the information is visually identifiable by the player.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged continuously for each are displayed in the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas in each column (3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the main display window 4). The design is displayed in the mode of). The main display window 4 may be referred to as a "design display area", a "window portion", or the like.

Further, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all the columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In that sense, the effective line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", or the like. Further, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the areas of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display a symbol in a mode of 3 rows × 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in reality, one or more of these lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the middle region of the reel 3R is a "center line", the upper region of the reel 3L, the upper region of the reel 3C, and the upper region of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the lower region of the reel 3C, and the line connecting the lower region of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line connecting the upper area is called "cross-up line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called "cross-down line", and these are called "cross down line". Since it is a line connecting each region with a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as an effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line connecting each region of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the valid line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the number of medals required for this game (the number of cards that can be started) prior to the start operation of the player, but this is valid. The number of valid lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as valid lines, in the former case, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even so, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" should be enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and the "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), enable "center line", "top line", and "bottom line".

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column, whereby three rows × 3 Although it was supposed to display the symbol in the mode of the column, the mode of displaying the symbol in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column is 1, 2, or 4 or more, which is different from the above aspect. You can also display the design with. In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is supposed to display the symbol in a variable manner by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 described later may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (for example, an organic EL, a 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. .. Further, for example, a configuration using another physical device (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. In addition, the arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display unit functions as a main side display unit directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, but at the same time, the sub control circuit 200 described later is used. A variable display unit as a sub-side display unit related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game, may be provided. The sub-side display unit may be configured by using, for example, a main display device 210 or a sub-display device 220. That is, a variable display unit that changes and displays the symbol according to the player's start operation (or other start condition is satisfied) and stops and displays the symbol according to the player's stop operation (or other stop condition is satisfied). As a result, not only the main side display unit but also the sub side display unit may be provided. In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether or not the variable display unit is directly related to the game, characters such as "rotary cylinder" or "main reel" are placed in the vicinity of the main display unit. It suffices to attach an identification display in which is displayed so that it is possible to identify that the variable display unit is the main display unit. It should be noted that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal slot 5 for receiving medals to be inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Since the medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31 described later have a function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b, such an insertion operation is performed. , For example, it can be paraphrased as a betting operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 5 is a bet operation detecting unit (means) capable of detecting the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

In the present embodiment, it is described as an example that a medal as a game medium is used as a game value used for a game or given according to a game result, but the game value used in this way is Not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be used. Further, the game value may be simply referred to as "value", "game value", or the like.

[1-1-5. Operation unit]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each of the operation units shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential. ..

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1-bet button 6b that accept a player's betting operation for using the (credited) medal deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, such a bet operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the bet operation of the player. The bet button may be used as long as it can detect the betting operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button on which two medals are bet may be separately provided.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a start lever 7 that receives a player's start operation for starting the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by the start switch 7S described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S form a start operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the start operation of the player. The start lever only needs to be able to detect the start operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and includes each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R for receiving a player's stop operation for stopping each rotation. Further, such a stop operation is detected by the stop switch 8S described later. Therefore, each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitutes a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the stop operation of the player. The stop button may be used as long as it can detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a settlement button 9 that accepts a player's settlement operation (return operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by the settlement switch 9S described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player. The settlement button may be used as long as it can detect the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-5. Button for directing]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the two staging buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but they can be configured without any of them, or only one of them can be provided. can. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect button are to change the effect mode when executing a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect described later), to perform a selection / decision operation in a user menu described later, and the like. Therefore, it can be configured to provide an effect button according to the application. For example, in the former use, the effect buttons 10a and 10b are used, and in the latter use, the above-mentioned touch panel can be used. In addition, in order to use it for the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like capable of accepting selection / determination operations as another effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payment exit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal payout outlet 11 for discharging medals to be paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1. When a prize is generated and the medal is paid out, the medal payout exit 11 gives the player the medal paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. Therefore, the medal is given to the player. It can be said that it is a part of the means. In addition, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) capable of storing the given game value. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-8. Lumbar panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The lumbar panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachi-slot machine 1 is, but for example, depending on the lighting mode of the lumbar lamp, or the lumbar panel 13 itself. Can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring the image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display unit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an information display device 14 that displays information about the game according to its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) capable of displaying information related to the game.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that the medal has been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of medals credited according to the lighting mode. The payout number lamp displays the number of medals paid out (number of payouts) according to the game result depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, AT state), so that the information of the stop operation is notified. Is displayed. The "mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the push order (in this embodiment, this may be described as "hit order") "1st (first stop operation). When notifying the reel 3L) ”, the numerical value“ 1 ”is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order“ 2nd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3C) ”is notified. Displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3R)". That is. The notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp may be used to display information on the stop operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, under the situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later (for example, the main effect display unit 21). Not only that, the information of the stop operation is also notified in the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. The mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notifying means may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notifying means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display unit 21 may directly notify the instruction information for causing the reel 3L to perform the first stop operation.

In addition, the section lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is in the advantageous section described later. For example, when the section lamp shifts from the non-advantageous section described later to the advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game of the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. At that time, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game of the non-advantageous section is started. The lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when shifting from the effect section (normally advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section to the increase section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section for the first time, any game until the game of the increase section is started. It may be turned on at the timing. That is, the section ramp may indicate that the section is in the advantageous section regardless of whether it is the production section or the increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may inform the period until the end of.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof depending on the lighting mode. For example, by turning on the light when the limit process is executed, it is notified to the player that the state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, blinking when the execution of the limit processing is near indicates that the advantageous state is likely to be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit processing. In addition to these, by providing an opportunity to turn on, blink, or turn off, other information regarding limit processing can be appropriately reported.

[1-1-10. Direction display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 for displaying the effect image. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing the effect display. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays an effect via the effect display window UD1. Further, the main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful staging display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible to perform an effect from a visual point of view to the player, and it can be configured as a liquid crystal display device, an image display device such as an organic EL, a display device such as a 7-segment LED, a sub reel, or the like. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a game that is mainly entertained by a so-called roll, the main effect display unit 21 may not be provided (sub effect display unit). 22 is the same).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Similar to the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, since the main effect display unit 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as push order notification, hit notification, continuous effect, etc., and is a sub effect display unit. Since 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying an effect that is not so closely related to the current game such as a game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, two effect display units, a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22, are provided, but they can be configured without any of these. It can also be configured to provide only one of them. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes not only its light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also its brightness and light emitting color when configured as a full-color LED, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example. ) Is provided with one or more lamps (light emitting means) capable of producing the effect. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end faces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. Lamps and the like can be mentioned. Since the latter includes a function of notifying the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, the light emitting mode is not changed according to the content of the effect when such a function is exerted. , It can be controlled to emit light according to a unique light emitting mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects and sounds such as BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute an audio output means capable of producing an effect by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing the effect from an auditory point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other staging equipment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means). For example, it is also possible to provide an effect device such as a movable effect device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration effect device that produces an effect by vibration, or an air effect device that produces an effect by injecting air, and execute the effect. That is, a staging device capable of appealing to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and smell) (making the player recognizable that the staging is being performed). If so, any of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "execution of the effect" means that the effect is produced by using one or more of the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means), unless otherwise specified. Indicates that you may execute.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S described later and a distribution device.

The medal sensor 31S detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal can be accepted, the distribution device moves the medal to the hopper device 32 side, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so as to be guided. In this case, the number of bets or the number of credits is added by 1. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal cannot be accepted, the distribution device passes the medal through the cancel shoot to the medal payout exit 11. It is driven and controlled so that it can be returned from. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether or not the inserted game medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distribution means for storing the inserted game medium inside when it is appropriate, and discharging it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 is provided at, for example, a bucket portion for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and medals stored at the bottom of the bucket portion while stirring the medals. It has a disc unit that guides the medals to the discharge unit one by one, a discharge unit that discharges the medals guided by the disc unit one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge unit.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. The medals exceeding a certain number are guided to the medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through the guide passage provided on the upper surface side. If the medals stored in the bucket are empty, a hopper empty error will occur. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after replenishing the medals.

A plurality of medal-shaped hollow portions are formed radially from the center of the disc portion, and the central axis is rotationally driven according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the hollow portions to the discharge portion one by one. The rotation of the disk portion agitates the medals stored in the bucket portion. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals ejected from the ejection unit and counts the number of medals. For example, when paying out one medal, the disc unit starts to rotate, and then the rotation of the disc unit stops according to the count sensor counting the payout of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout unit (means) capable of paying out the game medium. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-3. Medal auxiliary storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket portion of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage provided in the vicinity of the storage portion to detect the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that a certain number or more of the medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage unit (means) capable of storing the surplus game medium. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power supply switch 34b, and supplies electric power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power supply switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, as in the case of household electric products. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required electric power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 described later are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described later). The switch can also be configured to be provided in the power supply device 34.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. It should be noted that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include a substrate different from these, or may be configured not to include a substrate that is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted on the back side of the reel unit RU in the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or substantially transparent) so that its state can be visually recognized. Is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted, but some or all of the various electronic components are SMT-mounted (surface mount). It may be configured (implemented). Further, in this case, a test point for confirming the operation may be provided using a tester or an oscilloscope. Further, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for a part or all of various electronic components. Further, the substrate surface of the main control board 71 may be multi-layered.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back surface side of the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is an staging control board that controls the staging, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or another material configured to be opaque (or substantially opaque). It can also be configured as a case using. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is mainly controlled by various devices connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board different from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the main relay board 73 are mainly controlled unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to provide the main relay board 73 on the board 71 without providing the main relay board 73. Further, from such a viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is between various devices and the like connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board different from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the sub-relay board 74 are sub-controlled if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to support the board 72 without providing the auxiliary relay board 74. Further, from such a viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower space), and for example, signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal are transmitted. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state (for example, bonus state or AT state) of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set to the outside according to the game playability. It is possible to inform. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, not only the status of inserting / paying medals and the status of error occurrence in the pachi-slot machine 1 also in these devices. , The transition status of such an internal state can be recognized.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1. (Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board for the testing machine. The various electronic components needed to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74, and the sub relay board 74 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically operated so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74. Is connected.

The main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control related to the overall game operation is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 as an effect control unit that controls the effect is mounted on the sub-control board 72. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. On the rom cartridge board 202, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc. Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub RAM 203 has a storage area for registering the effect contents and various effect data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. It will be provided. The random number value for the effect related to the effect may be generated and extracted in the sub CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be main control. A random number circuit may be provided in the same manner as the circuit 100 so that the generation and extraction thereof can be performed. Further, the sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various effect data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor dedicated to images such as a GPU (also referred to as “VDP”), whereby the image displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 is displayed. May be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, role ratio monitoring device 54, external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and power supply. The device 34 is electrically connected. Further, on the main control board 71, a door open / close monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, a settlement switch 9S, and an information display device 14 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via, for example, the main relay board 73.

The external centralized terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven by the gear to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 is a stepping motor 51L, respectively. The number of times the pulse is output to the 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on the count result. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. ..

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in 6 steps) (setting change) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). Used for. Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage regarding the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the relative the degree of the player's advantage. The lower the value and the higher the setting value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of the player's advantage is. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the administrator of the game store inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it from the state where it is turned counterclockwise to the initial position. And turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off, the setting can be changed by turning on the setting key type switch 52 and then turning on the power, and the setting can be made while the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 remains on. When the key type switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the administrator on the game store side. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value determination operation by the administrator on the game store side in a state where the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where the setting can be changed, the set value is sequentially increased by 1 each time the setting is changed (when the setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to the next setting 1). In this way, the set value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is subsequently operated once. That is, the start switch 7S can detect the set value confirmation operation by the administrator on the game store side. In this way, when changing the setting, the setting key type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select the set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and it can be configured so that the setting can be changed by another operation. Further, when changing the setting or confirming the setting, for example, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

The role ratio monitoring device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The combination ratio monitoring device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information is used when the manager of the game store confirms whether or not the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitoring device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. You may. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Further, even if the display in the combination ratio monitoring device 54 is started or a management switch for switching the contents thereof is provided in the cabinet G so that the above-mentioned various ratio information is displayed when this is operated. good. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitoring device 54. Further, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds, which is a buffer time considering the time required for starting the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) has elapsed from the power on, the role ratio monitoring device 54 In order to make it possible to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all seg and desimal LEDs are lit) is specified. It is desirable to have a configuration that lights (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information between the latest 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. And there is information on the proportion of characters.

The specific section ratio information is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games if it is "cumulative", 6000 games if it is "most recent 6000 games", and the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games (or the number of games in the advantageous section) in the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information of the above has been notified. Further, the continuous bonus ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, and the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to (including the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) in the state where the actuating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the bonus ratio information includes the first-class special bonus (RB), the second-class special bonus (CB), and the ordinary bonus (SB) among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target game number. ) Is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation, and here, the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) is the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). It is a concept including the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) in the state where the BB) is operating, and the operation of the second-class special bonus (CB) is the second-class special bonus. It is a concept including the operation of the type 2 special accessory (CB) in the state where the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) is operating.

It should be noted that the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in each ratio information. It can also be the target of aggregation / calculation. That is, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may only appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. Further, for example, when displaying the continuous character ratio information on a model not equipped with the first-class special accessory (RB), or displaying the specific section ratio information on a model not equipped with the advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED when displaying the item. In the 7-segment LED of No. 1, for example, by displaying the identification for non-correspondence information such as lighting and displaying the two vertical bars in the center, it is confirmed that the model does not have the correspondence information. It is desirable that the person can recognize it at a glance.

The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may be configured to be provided with a similar door open / close monitoring switch. The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, thereby monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. When the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door open error occurs. In this case, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the error state is canceled.

The ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub-control board 72 has a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of staging buttons such as staging buttons 10a and 10b, lamps / LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74. Such speakers are electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps / LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, the description thereof is omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening / closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 is the same as the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has a function of monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. The opening / closing history of the door mechanism DD can be stored for a certain period of time. The opening / closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is an opening history after the manager of the game store leaves after business hours, or if there is an opening / closing history that has been opened for a long time during business hours, this is illegal. It is possible to recognize that the act is likely to have taken place.

[3. Function flow of pachislot machine]
Subsequently, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a medal is inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 by the player (bet operation is performed) and the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is used. One random number value (in the present embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number values, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. The role related to the payout of medals is called a "small role", the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) is called the "replay role", and the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus state) is called the "bonus role". Refer to. In addition, a combination that can be won internally (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply referred to as a "role". In addition, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a "winning combination", a "preliminary decision result", a "derivation allowable condition", or the like. Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determination means", a "winning combination determination means", a "preliminary determination means", a "deriving allowable condition determination means", or the like.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described later). The main CPU 101) that performs the reel stop control process controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the pressing order thereof) when the stop button is pressed. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to those having a button shape such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and any operation can be performed as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually has the combination of the symbols valid within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible on the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses a specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. The stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the winning operation determination processing described later) has a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line related to the winning. (Or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or the combination of other predetermined symbols) is established. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, one game (unit game) is performed in the above-mentioned series of flows.

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means is applicable. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning is the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted. Can be detected, so it is possible to improve security.

Further, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, the display of the image by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.) and the light by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) Output, sound output from a speaker (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these is used to perform various effects. That is, these are effect execution means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any of these can be a means for determining the content of the production.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the effect random value is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means selects the effect to be executed this time from among the plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination (or according to a predetermined determination condition). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel rotation starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the push order to be operated, etc.). The opportunity to know or anticipate is provided to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a specification in which a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and a stop display. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that it can be grasped which symbol is arranged at which position in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, in the main ROM 102, at least data for identifying the type of the symbol at each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stored. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. In addition, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". The number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like can be appropriately changed and specified.

[4-2. Symbol combination]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the specifications are such that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 grants various benefits according to the combination of the displayed symbols, shifts from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or changes from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state. It is possible to make a transition. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described later is used as an example thereof. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the type of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the valid line. ing. The symbols constituting each combination of symbols can be specified by using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege or the like (for example, "payout or the like") is associated with each combination of symbols. Further, the symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. In addition, the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of granting benefits, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is a specification that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (whether it is determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be granted)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such an internal winning combination. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the internal lottery table, data indicating a plurality of predetermined types of internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number") and a lottery value at which each internal winning combination is determined in each game state are displayed. Is stipulated. The lottery value may vary depending on the set value. In addition, the types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding) for each internal winning combination are associated with each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a combination of a plurality of symbols with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which combination of symbols is displayed. Is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process described later in the present embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, in the range of numerical values predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0). The random number values extracted from ~ 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is awarded (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after making the determination, the internal winning combination in this game is "missing". It should be noted that this is just an example of the internal lottery process, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be adopted for the lottery process. For example, the extracted random value is sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). Whether or not) may be determined to determine the internal winning combination.

As described above, in the internal lottery table, the probability of being determined (winning probability) increases as the value of the specified lottery value is larger. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 is finally displayed not only by the determined type of internal winning combination, but also by the player's stop operation timing and push order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to change (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be performed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning combination according to the stop operation mode of the player. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a stop control mode. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), or the like is used as an example. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbol (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Then, it is assumed that the number of sliding pieces specified in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 controls so that the reel 3L is stopped (the scheduled stop position becomes "4") at the symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") moved by four symbols. In this way, the stop table defines data (number of slip pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. It should be noted that such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

If there are multiple combinations of symbols that are allowed to be displayed in the attraction priority table, data indicating which combination of symbols should be displayed preferentially (retraction) (for example, "retraction priority"). ") Is stipulated. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is attracted so that the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A. Priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, in the main control circuit 100, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position, the symbol constituting the symbol combination A and the symbol constituting the symbol combination B are displayed. Search for the existence. If there are no symbols on both sides, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions during rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority table, or a stop operation may be performed on the target reel. When it is broken, it may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position. Moreover, such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control".

In the present embodiment, the stop control may be executed by performing only the "table control", or the stop control may be executed by performing only the "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search result. It can also be configured to execute stop control that enables this to be performed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "missing", the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations, the combination of symbols related to the small combination, or the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is finally on the valid line. It will not be displayed. It should be noted that the "missing" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which the internal winning combination has not been determined.

The second element is the stop operation timing of the player (the position of the symbol (pressing position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four effective lines (or each effective line if there are multiple), the combination of the symbols depends on the stop operation timing of the player. May not be displayed. This is the so-called "missing".

The third element is the push order of the player (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, an internal winning combination to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is associated may be determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the effective line according to the pushing order of the player. The combination of symbols may vary. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a "pushing order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "pushing order replay", and if it is a small role, it is called a "pushing order small role". May be called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, various gaming states can be provided as states for playing a game in order to change the degree of advantage of the player or to obtain the intended game performance. Hereinafter, an example of the gaming state will be described.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to configure a plurality of bonus states to be provided. When a bonus combination is won, a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (carry-over state) occurs over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role". In addition, such a carry-over state may be referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)".

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the winning probability and its contents, the mode of stop control, etc., the same applies hereinafter) with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

As bonus roles, for example, a first-class special bonus (RB), a continuous bonus role related to a first-class special bonus (BB), and a second-class special bonus (CB) (but not a carry-over role). , A bonus continuous actuating device (MB) related to a second-class special bonus, an ordinary bonus (SB) (but not a carry-over role), and the like. Further, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) is played. It is composed. The BB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals to be paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285) is paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when the number of medals to be paid out exceeds an arbitrary predetermined number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when the RB or SB is won during the MB state. To. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

The operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. For example, during the operation of the bonus continuous actuating device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus, when the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus is started, the first-class special bonus It can also be configured to automatically activate the first-class special bonus (RB) at the start of the game when the object is not in operation, or at the end of the first-class special bonus. That is, it is also possible to control so that the RB is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in operation of BB may be referred to as "JAC" or the like, and the specification in which the RB in operation of BB is automatically operated in this way may be referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the operation of the RB when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the effective line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) related to the type 2 special accessory and the type 2 special accessory (CB) is also the same. That is, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is operating without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the CB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbol related to the CB can be controlled. It is also possible to control the operation of the CB when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the RT state (operate the RT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be changed with respect to the state in which the RT state is not operating (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (particularly, the winning probability) of the replay role is relatively advantageous to the player is called "high RT state" or "high probability replay state", and the lottery of the replay role is performed. An RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state", a "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transferred, for example, by satisfying any of the following migration conditions. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When winning RB, BB or MB (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state (5) (3) or (4). When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the AT state (operate the AT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not operating (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on the stop operation advantageous to the player when the push order combination described above is won. It is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, when a plurality of AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension when it is possible to extend the period (or "addition"; the same applies hereinafter)). The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by setting the type of the notification target combination to which the information of the stop operation is notified, the probability of occurrence of the notification of the information of the stop operation, and the like different from each other. Further, the transition condition and the end condition of the AT state can be appropriately set according to the playability (however, the end by executing the limit process described later is excluded). Further, the AT state may be treated as if it were the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

Further, the game period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is set as one set and the number of sets. It may be managed by (set number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) in the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation number of times) that the notification (for example, the push order navigation at the time of winning the push order small winning combination) that affects the payout of medals is performed in the AT state (navigation number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the game period given when the AT state is changed may be managed by a management method different from the game period given when the AT state is extended. Further, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (operate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it differs from the AT state in that the control is performed (the transition is avoided), the basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being notified of the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player). If it shifts to a state (or avoids shifting to a low RT state), it can be said to be synonymous with an AT state). When the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be changed to the ART state by first shifting to the AT state and then to the high RT state, or at the same time in the high RT state and the AT state ( Alternatively, it may shift to the ART state by shifting to (almost simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other game status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a gaming state other than the above-mentioned various gaming states can be provided. For example, each mode (see FIGS. 5 and 6) in the advantageous section described later is also a state in which the player plays a game, and it is advantageous whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be regarded as a gaming state. Further, from the same viewpoint, for example, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the bonus state can be changed. For example, when the bonus combination is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is easily displayed by the stop control and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination are relative to each other. It is also possible to configure the player so that the degree of advantage can be changed by providing a gaming state that is difficult to be displayed in. Further, for example, a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. Therefore, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, the following method is adopted as a method that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether or not to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state. The same applies hereinafter). You can also do it. For example, a "specific role" can be determined as an internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded to the specific combination varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, push order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 cards are paid out, and if inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 card is paid out or not paid out).

Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, whether or not to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state in this game to an advantageous one. (It may also include a decision on whether or not to directly shift to the AT state or whether or not to directly extend the gaming period in the AT state. Hereinafter, it will be described as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when the player plays a game by a specific game method, the advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and the advantageous decision is not made (the limitation is that the advantageous decision is made). It can also be configured to be) in some cases. In addition, the player may change between this game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions are limited to this game and will not continue after the next game. Also, such restrictions are sometimes referred to as "penalties".

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as a state in which the game is played with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. Hereinafter, an example of the game section will be described. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter described later). When the value) becomes a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. In addition, the non-advantageous section may be set on the condition that the predetermined value is referred to and the predetermined value is a specific update value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value. In addition, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, when the advantageous section end lottery is configured to be performed and the winning is won, etc.), that is the condition. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) can be derived only by referring to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). In addition, which internal winning combination is determined can be referred to the data indicating the internal winning combination directly such as the winning number, or the sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to the data indicating the internal winning combination indirectly, such as (the data in which is used as one determination target data).
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and a plurality of states cannot be set in the non-advantageous section. For example, the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section cannot be set as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change cannot be set as the non-advantageous section B.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section, it is necessary to end the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, the process related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) is performed. , Not only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also the processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous section can be performed. .. As other examples of various parameters that can be referred to, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the above-mentioned various parameters, type of bonus state, type of RT state, stop operation timing of any reel. , Or the push order and the like.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase becomes positive when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the determination of the CZ state transition in the normal state, the CZ precursor is set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state is actually performed, and a precursory effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state can be performed. Depending on whether the AT state transition is determined in the state, the normal state, or the CZ state, the AT state transition is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursory effect suggesting the transition to the AT state can be performed. The state such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the playability.
(6) By lighting the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify which section is the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the section is in the advantageous section (the section lamp is off). If so, it can be notified that the section is in a non-advantageous section). As described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to any timing to some extent. Basically, the lighting may be started when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section and may be continued until the non-advantageous section shifts, or the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (the advantageous section starts). However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started from the time when the AT state is first reached. If the shifted advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously. Is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Further, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter in which limit processing is executed when the number of games (number of games) in the advantageous section reaches "1500" times. For example, the advantageous section game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the time when the advantageous section is started, and adds one count each time one game is digested. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter becoming a specified value (for example, "1500" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated can be set to any number as long as the number of games is "1500" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter in which the limit process is executed when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). (Several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout counter becoming a specified value (for example, "2400" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number as long as the number of payouts is "2400" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such payout limiters are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the plus amount from the latest lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point). (That is, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). That is, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from the time when the number of medals increases in the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter to be used. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number does not subtract the bet number) instead of the net increase number described above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters, and may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be executed by using both of the number limiters. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating conditions of either limiter are satisfied after the advantageous section starts.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of times of navigation of the push order small combination in the AT state (that is, the number of times when the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided so that the limit process is executed when the limit processing is performed. That is, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game as long as the gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has specifications that can output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display can also be turned on. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the MB state is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display not only performs the above-mentioned effect during the bonus state, but also gives a bonus. The number of times can be counted by the type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display can also be used. In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform an effect during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is set. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display is also in the above-mentioned AT state. Not only can the effect be performed, but the number of ATs can be counted for each type.

Further, for example, the AT state is configured as the AT state for managing the number of sets, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first first set, and the set is started for the second and subsequent sets. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted even in the external data display. The timing of turning on and the timing of turning off each external signal can be appropriately set. That is, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by an external data display, a hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, and a change in the state can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is a requirement that the main control circuit 100 communicates only in one direction of the sub control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (command) for notifying the change of the state in the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub control circuit 200 in a timely manner. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command is configured to include parameters that specify setting values, game states, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination, a game state, and the like. Further, for example, a lock command is transmitted when a lock effect is performed. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the content of the lock effect and the like. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include parameters that specify that the reel rotation has started and the like.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters for specifying the reel to be stopped, the position where the reel is stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is confirmed, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (game state), and the like. Further, for example, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the end of the advantageous section and the factors for ending the advantageous section. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be prevented from being sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed by using various effect devices in order to enhance the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to make the game playable as intended. It is possible. Hereinafter, an example of such an effect will be described.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the information of the stop operation by the instruction monitor, which is also included in the staging in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the progress of the game can be stopped for a predetermined period (the player's game operation is invalidated for a predetermined period). Such an effect is referred to as a "rock effect (or simply" rock ")", or is also referred to as a "freeze effect (or simply" freeze ")" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a lock effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, when the start operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after all the stop operations are performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when a plurality of types of lock effects are provided, a period during which the progress of the game is stopped (a period during which the player's game operation is invalidated), a type of game operation to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do it.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the stop display mode) is combined during the execution of the lock effect described above. Can be performed by). Such an effect is referred to as a "reel effect" as well as a "design effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a reel effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. Further, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the reel effect is performed and the case where the reel effect is not performed.

In short, the reel effect is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period when the player's game operation is invalidated. It is intended to produce with. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like. Further, if a plurality of operation patterns are set, a plurality of types of reel effects can be provided. Further, a wider range of effect patterns can be set by combining a plurality of types of reel effects and a plurality of types of lock effects. It should be noted that only any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, any two may be used, or all three may be used.

(Pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect of performing a pseudo game during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such a production is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of pseudo games can be performed. Further, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the pseudo game is performed and the case where the pseudo game is not performed.

In short, the pseudo game receives the player's game operation in a pseudo manner during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The production is done by doing something like that. That is, the above-mentioned reel effect is further produced by intervening the game operation of the player. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operation. Therefore, it is not desirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in the simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the game is actually being played.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is performed, for example, in the following flow.
(1) The actual start operation of the player (the execution condition is satisfied here and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) A pseudo stop operation is accepted, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during a pseudo game).
(4) Each reel actually starts rotating after undergoing random delay processing (pseudo-game ends and actual game starts).

The random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) described above, and when each reel starts normal rotation in the situation (4) described above as it is, the player However, it may be easier to stop the operation using a specific symbol as a mark (it becomes an aid to so-called "pressing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly set for each reel. It is a process for starting rotation after it is generated (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). Further, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always predetermined so as not to be mistaken for being completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and backward for less than an hour (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation of (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped). In the situation (4) described above, each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay processing is started. As long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such fluctuation does not occur when the first reel temporarily stops and when the second reel temporarily stops. You may do it.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is provided, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), the above-mentioned (4). ), The pseudo-game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp is installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic edge. Further, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp. Further, the description portion of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", or "during pseudo-game production". It is desirable that the description such as "during automatic reeling"), and it is desirable that such a description portion occupies 1/3 or more of the surface area. The pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game in-game display for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is displayed after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), and then the above-mentioned (4). ), The main display device 210 and / or the sub display device 220 may be used until the random delay processing is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the player's game operation and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game (in the present embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device). Since all of the 220s are above the operation unit, any of them may be used). Further, in the simulated game display, the display range including the explanation portion has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and when the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm. , When the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). Further, the explanation portion of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", etc. Alternatively, it is desirable that the description is "during automatic reeling" or the like), and it is desirable that the size is such that the player can read it without concealing it.

Further, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) described above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) described above), the instruction monitor is displayed. It is desirable to configure so that the stop operation information is not notified (when it is necessary to display the stop operation information on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). By doing so, it is possible to further suppress the player's misunderstanding that the game is actually being played during the simulated game. If any of the above measures are taken, the stop operation information may be notified to the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) during the simulated game. good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the sub-side effect device may perform an effect (linked to the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

Further, in the actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the simulated game. Does not output a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo-game operation or the state in which the pseudo-game operation is possible. Therefore, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the tester can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. When the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives the pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 outputs the signal for the pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the first interface board 301 is simulated on the main control board 71 side. The game may be advanced (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for a testing machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on / off of the function may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the effect content of the pseudo game in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, which is also included in the staging in a broad sense.

(Normal production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect of completing the game (that is, ending in one game) can be performed. Such an effect is referred to as a "normal effect" as well as a "single-shot effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a normal effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a continuous (that is, continuous for a plurality of games) effect can be performed over a plurality of games. Such an effect is referred to as a "continuous reading effect" as well as a "continuous effect" or the like. It should be noted that it can be configured so that such a continuous effect is not performed, or it can be configured so that a plurality of types of continuous effects can be performed.

(Operation interlocking production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect capable of changing the effect content according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is referred to as an "operation-linked effect" and also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or a continuous effect. Further, the effect operation can include not only the operation for the effect button group but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, a content of granting a privilege, a period until the privilege is granted, and the like. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these uses are just an example.

(Other production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to perform an effect other than the above-mentioned various effects. For example, various notifications to the player or the game store (for example, immersive prevention notification, forgotten item prevention notification, error status notification, demo status notification, etc.) are also included in the staging in a broad sense as those used for purposes other than the above. .. In addition, the entanglement prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating to that effect when the advantageous section ends. Further, the forgotten item prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating to that effect when the advantageous section ends or the settlement operation is performed. Further, in the error status notification, a warning or the like indicating to that effect can be notified from the time when the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification can be notified that the table is vacant or the like when the period during which the game is not played reaches a predetermined period or when the settlement operation is performed.

[5. First game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a “first game machine”. It should be noted that, with respect to various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment. With respect to various specifications, functions, and the like described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment. That is, an invention in which these are appropriately combined can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the effective line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as the gaming state. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flags where the later-described "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the two-card bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over, and later. "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the state of 3 bets. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over between the 3BB flags, and neither bonus combination is won (carryover). It is configured to include between non-flags (not). Further, the bonus state is configured to include a 2BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 2BB and a 3BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 3BB. To.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game in a state where two medals are bet (two-card bet state) and a state where three medals are bet (three-card bet state). There is. The "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to use the game, and the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b. This includes both medals for two or three medals from credits, and medals for two or three medals are automatically hung by winning a replay role.

[5-1. Playability of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. 7 and 8 are views showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and a normal game. An increase section (advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The staging section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section, as will be described later. , It differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when the setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. In the control state of, the effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase section is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the medals. It should be noted that both the staging section and the increasing section are advantageous sections, and by mutually shifting these sections, they are configured as a series of advantageous sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the non-advantageous section. Is determined. In addition, the sub-flag plays an internal winning role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lottery (various processes related to the advantageous section) related to playability by the main control circuit 100. It is information for making the group identifiable by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so that the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "determined combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_determined cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "middle che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the advantageous section. Is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined as the secondary information (sub flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising lip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising right lip"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of the symbols of "right-up lip" is between the 3BB flags. It is displayed, and a combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), "through lip 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, which is advantageous between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Tsu Lip 2" is determined as a sub-flag when winning a section. Then, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery to be described later (for example, a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) or the figure). The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8 (f) is varied.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") serves as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. ) Is given as an example, but the mode in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, if you win such a role, the number of medals to be paid out will not be changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols will be different. The sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (stop operation timing) regardless of which flag is between (non-flag). ) Is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols is displayed. If the winning combination is won, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, which is different depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs, may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination thereof, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the "right-up rip" symbol combination is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, with respect to the specific combination. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (b) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 5), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be paraphrased as a gaming state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of an increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (grant) in the production section (normal game). Yes, in the staging section (normal game), whether or not there is a pseudo bonus transition is determined, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined according to this mode. It is designed to do.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period of not shifting to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 7 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 6, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played, once the game is transferred to the non-advantageous section, and then the normal A mode is selected when the game is transferred from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay when the transition to the pseudo bonus does not occur after the transition to the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode). Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent the deterioration of the interest caused by it.

The heaven A mode may also include a pseudo-bonus (in the case of a specification in which the AT state is continued by a decision to extend (add) during the AT state, the extension (addition)). It is a mode in which the same can be expected (the same applies hereinafter), the probability of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling is also expected. It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so as to be, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo-bonus can be expected to be in a row, and the expectation of shifting to pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high. That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect a series of pseudo-bonus games, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be considerably high. That is, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as the "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set some of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make a specification such as a squeeze, or a specification in which a non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increase section. By doing so, there is an incentive to play the game even in a state where it is confirmed that the section is not advantageous, such as after changing the setting, so that it is a motivation to start the game even when the store is opened. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the state will be the most disadvantageous, so that the motivation for continuing the game even in such a case. It becomes. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous aspect as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted). If it is (such as changing the role to be), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the production section (normal game), first, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In the first gaming machine, if the "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and if the "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time and the reel effect ("red 7 aligned" effect) in which the "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 is performed during the invalid period. , If it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the pseudo bonus is started and the "Red 7 match" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is effective. (It may be before that, but it is not the timing before the above-mentioned random delay processing is started), the information of the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay"). In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, rather than "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In that case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, if "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. If so, it may not be possible to decide to move to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. Further, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section rather than the case where "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to determine the transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to the advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or that the "winning (next game)" is always decided. Also, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow. Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of the sub flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section has already been determined at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transfer process at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. As described above, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus in the staging section (normal game) and the pseudo-bonus is started (“pseudo-bonus start” in FIG. 5), the transition to the increase section (pseudo-bonus) is performed. .. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "the end of the advantageous section". (Via End A / B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In FIG. 8 (e), "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here). , The pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed combination" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is migrated. In order not to be determined as the destination mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. It may be referred to another mode transition lottery table with a different mode.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). A plurality of (maximum 255) 1G continuous stocks can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. It is also possible to configure the 1G consecutive lottery table so that a plurality of 1G consecutive stocks can be given by one 1G consecutive lottery.

If the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock) at the end of the pseudo bonus, one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter is used). 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), or if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games is provisional here. It may be set), the pseudo bonus ends (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried forward that there is a ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus) is that it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 cards can be obtained, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transfer lottery, when reaching the ceiling, in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Whether to do it or to make it a "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (notification probability that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to that configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section by limit processing"). ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. 8 and the like are not performed, and the lottery is not performed. The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Further, when the game is played in the two-card bet state during the pseudo-bonus, the medals are not increased in the two-card bet state, so that the pseudo-bonus is not an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically disadvantaged when playing a game in a two-card bet state.

Here, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, a lottery related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 and the like are used. Although various lottery) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games, etc.) are not performed, the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter are updated. Should be done. Since these limiters have a function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired cards, these counters are not updated in the two-card bet state. If this is the case, the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired games may be exceeded due to the intervention of the game in the two-card bet state, and as a result, the gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. To get. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter is configured to be updatable every game regardless of the number of bets.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the gaming is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, when the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase value of medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state 3-card bet state). , During the pseudo-bonus may not be the increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be disadvantaged if he / she plays a game in a bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play the game in the state of three bets between the 2BB flags (in the present embodiment, the state of three bets between the two BB flags is the "recommended game". It may be described as a "state" and other states as a "deprecated gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 2-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags wins only in the 2-card bet state and wins in the 3-card bet state. It is not configured. Further, 3BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 3-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags wins only in the 3-card bet state and does not win in the 2-card bet state. Further, there is no case where 3BB wins between the 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between the 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in a two-card bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) to make a twoBB flag interval, and then a three-card bet state. If the game is played in, it is possible to play the game in the above-mentioned recommended game state without worrying about whether or not to win the bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 The ceiling shortening lottery is won with a probability of / 8 (32/256), while the ceiling shortening lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened. The number of ceiling games is not shortened.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exerted, so that the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. You may do it. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It may be possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by allowing the 1G continuous lottery to be performed at this time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the first gaming machine is in an advantageous state at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus when the current mode is the heaven mode. A special bonus medium effect to suggest that there is a certain probability is executed. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. Further, the effect during this special bonus may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus effect is performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and you expect that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a probability of 100% even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends (for example). , In heaven mode), the period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making it possible to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, in the case of the end mode). Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting (1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the "determined combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_". If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination) and it is decided to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). It is possible to execute a special lock effect. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has a "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since you can receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined, when the "fixed combination" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 7), the player shifts to the pseudo bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special lock effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect such that each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. You may do it. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described later, for example, even if the player stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, if it is decided to execute the special lock effect first in a series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is executed, but the same conditions are satisfied within the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. Even if it is established, it is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed. As a method, once the special lock effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections after that, the special lock is originally performed. It may be possible not to make a decision as to whether or not to execute the effect, or the decision is made, but if the information is stored, it indicates that the decision result is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed on condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a special lock effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not the game is played, and the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as when the winning of the "fixed role" is triggered, or it may be a different probability). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, it is assumed that whether or not the special lock effect is executed is first determined by the winning of the "fixed role", and when it is decided that the special lock effect is executed, heaven. You may shift to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special lock effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more after the determination of whether or not the special lock effect is executed is performed as described above, or the advantage described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 16 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is set each time. Is controlled so that it is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined that the pachinko machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in a series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, "determined combination"). , Control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect (for example, the special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information according to the combination of the displayed symbols (for example). For example, it is possible to determine (sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) in which information on the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. It is possible to decide.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be obtained. It is possible to diversify the playability related to granting.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, so that it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special combination (for example, 3 cards) can be won. , 2BB) is not possible to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right rip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), and the first 2 It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") in the special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (see FIG. 15 described later).

Then, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is in, which is advantageous. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to the re-game, it is said that the re-game is activated regardless of which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the granting of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. The combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (the combination of the symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "right-up lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in a state, a combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols related to the addition of game value corresponding to "parallel rip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbols are different from the pure "off" cases. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the values are still the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. It is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of an advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player has a direct disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the case of the second special permission state, and it is possible to display a specific combination. It may be configured so that it is not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in the embodiment.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to make the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different between when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the case of the first special permission state, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the second special permission state. Is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined combination of symbols may be displayed.

In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the present embodiment, this may be described as "pressing position ○", "pressing position correct answer", etc.). When the combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressing position ×", "incorrect answer of pressing position", etc.), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the stop operation (timing) of the player, so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination, and in this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific symbol is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination is not displayed and the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without proper stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect batting order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the stop operation (procedure) of the player, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of the specific symbol is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left / right first stop, the specific symbol is not an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination is not displayed and the right first stop is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. There is a third specific combination that does not display the combination of specific symbols, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game that wins the specific combination, the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation) and the advantageous section. Although it was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) is changed. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalties. Therefore, when such a change occurs, an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention may be generated.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags) is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). Is.

Further, in the first game machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" described later) is won, a combination of assigned symbols (for example, eight payouts) can be given regardless of the batting order in the first special permission state. The combination of symbols that becomes If the correct answer is not in the correct batting order, the combination of the given symbols will not be displayed, and the game value will not be given. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols to be paid out). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state.

That is, if the player plays a game in a three-card bet state between the 3BB flags even in a non-recommended gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state is not given preferential treatment, but the game value when the advantageous state is not operating. Since the grant probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. As described above, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the game value is reduced, the state in which the player's game value is difficult to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting the advantageous state is given preferential treatment, but the probability of granting the game value when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so that the advantageous state operates. The game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when it is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. As described above, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method for creating two states, a stable state and a rough wave state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". Increase. In this way, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Design layout configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "red blank", " Ten kinds of symbols of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are views showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the first gaming machine, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like. That is, in the following, any symbol is used according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (that is, batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (Display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) will be described.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. It should be noted that the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a two-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a three-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a 3-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a 2-card bet state. It is configured so that it will not be determined as an internal winning role if it is broken. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of "bonus state" is referred to in FIG. 10, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of possible game starts is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is the first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the operation is once terminated and the operation is performed again. Further, in the first gaming machine, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state is the end condition of more than 176 medals in the 3BB state. Is stipulated to have been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is "start mode", the transition destination The mode of is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and between the 2BB flags, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these are the "replay" symbols in the lower straight line or the middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up rip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is at least for the left reel 3L, either "REP28" or "REP60" to "REP63" (these are to display the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

The "F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pushing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). On the left reel 3L, the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row, and for example, a symbol such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player on other reels is also displayed. (Can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry lip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned "cherry rip" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a re-game is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pushing position is at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach eye" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if a 3-card bet state, 3 medals are paid out, and if a 2-card bet state, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, either “FRU08” or “FRU09” (these are not displayed side by side with the “watermelon” symbols, so these can be collectively referred to as “watermelon spills”). Is displayed and one medal is paid out. It should be noted that, in the case of the pressed position ×, it is also possible to generate a dropout so that the number of medals paid out is 0.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "pushing order bell A" is a 6-choice push order small role (one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If the internal winning combination is determined and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "right-down bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 medals are paid out if the bet is 3 cards, and 2 medals are paid out if the bet is 2 cards. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_" The "bell 312B1", "F_bell 312B2", "F_bell 321B1", and "F_bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, 8 medals will be paid out if the 3-card bet state, and 2 if the 2-card bet state. One medal is paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "pushing order bell B" is pushed in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-card bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-card bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-card bet state). It is a small winning combination, and if it is decided as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct answer pressing order, one of the above "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. It will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, one of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "one-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. Medal is paid out.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. is only an example and is shown in these. The mode is not limited to the above.

For example, in the first gaming machine, "BB02" can be displayed when "BB01" is dropped and becomes "missing" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when it is pure "off". In the 3-bet state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it is in the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various states, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small winning combination" is missed and "out" occurs. Therefore, in order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "missing" different in some or all of these cases, the combination of these different symbols is specified in advance in the symbol combination table, and the internal winning combination is determined. By allowing the display as a "corresponding symbol combination" according to the situation, it is possible to make the combination of the symbols related to the "missing" displayed according to the state or the like different.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) Each limit processing of the number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the staging section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the game period of the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games, and the presence / absence of ceiling shortening). All the information (information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous section) are also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or if it becomes a negative value, "0" is always maintained. Can also be configured to be). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo bonus. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the staging section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first game machine, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig.). 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the game for a predetermined regulation period is performed in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed in the game before the continuous period (55 games) per increase section, compared to the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. By executing this, it is prevented that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle and the player feels distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game before the continuous period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) for each increase section 2 times before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is continuous (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) before the increased section. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, which is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3"). However, the control payout counter does not cause "missing" (or difference) when "missing" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). As a result, the number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the hitting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference is "8"). On the other hand, if the hitting order is not appropriate, the number of medals to be paid out will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to the omission, but the control payout counter will be the difference in the number of medals in any case. +5 sheets "is counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo bonus. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the staging section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first game machine, the maximum number of acquired cards (the amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo bonus or in the middle of the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). By sometimes executing a special limit process (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given, compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is obtained, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Is multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo-bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

For the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout counter value (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "ceiling shortening is available". ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) both regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increased section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the effect section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value at which the mode transition advantageous to the player is determined in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutively villaged.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 7) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example the case where the “determined combination” is “F_determined cherry” (hereinafter, may be simply described as “determined cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. In, the "winning (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). Further, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, so in a game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player is on the left. The general procedure is to stop at one stop and aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when the game is played by a general procedure, when the "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and the pseudo bonus may be started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol even in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it can be recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform or cannot perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and the "confirmed cherry lip". When the combination of the symbols of is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry rip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry rip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "Red 7 will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated and then the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition is made. Although the "winning (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" without displaying the combination of the symbols of the "determined cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by performing the pseudo bonus start → stop operation according to the special notification from this game. It is changed to the flow of. It should be noted that the special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is performed, the "confirmed" is performed. When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of them is performed. There is a possibility that the player will be clearly aware that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (this time game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, the game period of the advantageous section is monitored by using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) and the like can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if the "navigation number" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, the normal limit processing (navigation number), the special limit processing (navigation number), or the quasi-limit processing (navigation) is used in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted in order to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example). , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), This series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"". When the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more). In the case of an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, advantageous). When the value of the section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). When, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more), the advantageous state. If not, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while considering the emotions of the player.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is a specific period. When the special period is shorter than that and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed). Or, when the amount of game value given in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a quasi-limit). When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous section. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the excessive increase in gambling.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, it should be originally given due to an operation error of the player, ignoring of instructions, and the like. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the count is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being lost, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the winning combination (for example, "determined cherry") is determined to shift to the advantageous state in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, the state after the quasi-limit processing operation). At that time, a special notification is performed so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "determined cherry lip") in which the winning of the definite combination can be clearly recognized. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even when such a special notification is performed. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the combination of special symbols is displayed in the winning combination in a state where the grant of the right is not suppressed, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, it is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed role in a state where the grant of rights is suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, whether or not to perform special notification is determined according to whether or not the winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not special notification has been performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Further, in the first game machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. It is possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts).

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the three-card bet state, but do not count in the two-card bet state. Therefore, it is possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) in the 3-card bet state, but special limit processing (number of games) and special limit in the 2-card bet state. It is not possible for the process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of a small winning combination and the number of medals paid out differ between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-card bet state. It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game in the state of two bets than to play the game in. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when the game is played in the state of two bets during the pseudo bonus, the player may be configured to be disadvantageous by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is forced in the middle of the advantageous state. It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such an alert, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and the player should play the game in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carry-over combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data structure.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data. The data stored in each storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, a symbol combination associated with the bits of each storage area is used. The "combination" shown (in FIG. 17, the design of the reel 3L, the design of the reel 3C, and the design of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in this game). It is used to. For example, when 2BB is won in this game (when it is carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the valid line in this game). Used to do. For example, when the combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the valid line in this game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area makes it possible for the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on the valid line in this game while the main CPU 101 is rotating at least one of the reels. Used for. For example, when at least one of the reels is rotating in this game, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the effective line, "1" is set to bit 0 of the storage area 1. Is stored.

(Carryover storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The carry-over combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when the bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as the internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. In addition, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination / replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process. Will be done.

(Game status flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Since the first gaming machine is not provided with the RT state, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state, but for example, an RT state is provided. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of the gaming state (mode) in the advantageous section is separately stored in the mode flag storage area described later, but the data is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also do it. The same applies to the non-advantageous section and the game section of the advantageous section. An advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming state such as the AT state and the ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively. For example, when the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1. Further, for example, when the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Activity stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 in the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 of the stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, when the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons are pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. Will be stored. Then, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but bit 1 remains stored. "0" will be stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. In the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure. Further, FIG. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as a winning flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, and the like are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, an internal lottery random value (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and an effect random value used in various lottery related to playability (other lottery random values) (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 0 to (Range of 255) and the like are extracted, and the extracted various random value values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The acquisition mode of various random numbers is not limited to the above. A required number of random values can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table according to the current game state and the random value for the internal lottery. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, for various game states, when the game is started, if the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transferred according to the established transition condition. , Or perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S7). In this process, the data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described later. The data generation, storage, and transmission methods for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a main side effect control process at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when various effects controlled by the main control circuit 100 side (main side) are performed when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the start of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the stop operation information is notified by the instruction monitor in the AT state, the notification mode is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control such as the type of the stop table used in the current game and the type of the attraction priority table is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). This process requires the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. The rotation starts. Each reel that has started rotation is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (in this case, all reels), the attraction priority is set by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table. The indicated data is acquired and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described later is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is a combination of any of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a winning operation command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout / replay operation process (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, the next time. Performs various processes necessary for operating the re-game in the game. For example, when the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same number of values as the number of bets in this game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described later. Perform the processing. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the end of the game (S15). In this process, for various gaming states, when the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols) when the game is completed, the gaming state is shifted according to the established transition condition. , Or perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a main side effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects controlled by the main control circuit 100 side (main side) are performed when the game is completed, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as needed, or it is possible to configure it so that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the above-mentioned various processes are merely examples.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main processing will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 after performing an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (not shown), and as a result of the test, determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 is normally performed (. S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the time of changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased when the settings of the carry-over combination storage area, the game state flag storage area, the mode flag storage area, and the like are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S24). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, after the main RAM 103 is initialized, a new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Will be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the off state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (YES in S26), the initialization command generation / storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (during the power cutoff) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is restored to the state before the power failure. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (S21 is NO), and in S28, when it determines that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error at power-on Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved according to the newly set value. Therefore, the main CPU 101 is normal until the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off once after the error processing at the time of power-on, and then until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). It does not shift to the process (after S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception / start check processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for medal acceptance / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay combination has been won (whether the replay has been activated) in the previous unit game.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (S41 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing of S42, the medal auxiliary storage switch check processing is performed (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is used. If it is determined that it is in the ON state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the process waits until the error is resolved. If it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this process is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medals are prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the medals will be accepted. Make it possible to accept (accept betting operations) (allow medal acceptance). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that the medal can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medals cannot be inserted or credits can be inserted (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50") (S49 is NO). , The acceptance of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state in which medals cannot be accepted (a state in which betting operations cannot be accepted).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the medal cannot be accepted (S45 is NO), in S47 it determines that the medal can be inserted or credited (S47 is YES), and After the processing of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted cards is the number of cards that can start the game (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start operation has been performed by the player.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (S49 is NO), and in S50, when it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S50 is NO), processing is performed. Is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in this unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to a set value, a number of bets, a game state, and the like (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires an internal lottery random number value from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the internal lottery random number value acquired in S4 of the above-mentioned main process. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", a serious error has occurred in the main CPU 101. Therefore, the above-mentioned power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired random number value for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, addition update) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. It is determined whether or not it has overflowed (for example, whether it has overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of this unit game. If the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of this unit game is "missing" ("missing" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combination to be determined (the random number value for internal lottery is also sequentially updated), and until the determination is made for all the internal winning combination (or the internal winning combination is in the middle of the determination). The process of S64 is repeated (until it is determined).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), is the determined internal winning combination a non-carry-over non-target role (that is, a small role or a replay instead of a bonus role that is a carry-over role)? Whether or not it is a role) is determined (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carry-over non-target combination (YES in S66), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the processing of S64. That is, in the winning flag storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over non-target combination (S66 is NO), and after the processing of S67, is the determined internal winning combination a carry-over target combination? That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus role that is a carry-over role (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carry-over target combination (YES in S68), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the bonus combinations has been carried over yet. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carry-over combination storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carry-over combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

In S68, the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over target combination (S68 is NO), and in S69, determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), And after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination is carried over (or won in the unit game this time), the main CPU 101 has data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. Stores "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs sub-flag and the like setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process after this process.

(State control process at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the start of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S81). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting between the flags as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, the flag is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), so that the check here is unnecessary. Further, for example, when there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games from the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S82), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S82 is NO), and after the processing of S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (start condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is to start the advantageous section.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S87 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, for example, counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes is started (that is, monitoring of a game period of a series of advantageous sections is started) in response to the start of the advantageous section. Perform the setting process of.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, according to the set transition destination mode, when shifting to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game shifts to the end mode. In that case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and when shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each is set. Further, a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8 and the like) is set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during the advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S92). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 28, the game start time processing during the advantageous section performed in the above-mentioned game start time state control process S91 will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs an AT period management process (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the start of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S101, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G continuous lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, and the like are set. In this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target combination wins in the AT state, navigation may not always occur, and whether or not navigation is generated in this process is a predetermined condition (for example, the type of notification target combination or a predetermined navigation). It may be determined according to the probability of occurrence).

In S102, the main CPU 101 determines in S102 whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the mode is not in the specific mode (S102 is NO) and after S104 (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S90 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S105 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start processing during the advantageous section.

The game start state control process shown in FIG. 27, the game end state control process shown in FIG. 30, the game start process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 28, and the game end process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 31 are performed. The processing configuration is basically the same. This is a process that may be performed at either the start of the game or the end of the game (for example, the process of referring to the determined internal winning combination such as the game state or the transition of the mode). Regarding the processing that the processing result should be reflected until the end of this game (or until the next game starts), it means that either one should be performed, and both are the same. It does not mean that the processing of is performed in duplicate. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, for those that need to be processed when the game is started (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.), it is assumed that the processing is performed when the game is started, and when the game is finished. For those that need to be processed (for example, processing that refers to a combination of displayed symbols), it may be performed when the game is completed. Further, for example, a process that needs to be processed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or a process that should be processed (for example, a process that refers to a stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) May be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels rotate at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), the stop of each reel is permitted (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Further, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the valid stop button is operated. When performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and configure the automatic stop control to be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bit in the operation stop button storage area is used. "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, the bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the control target reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (movement amount of the symbol) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data of the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of slip pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops from the number of slip pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the scheduled stop positions. ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S119). In this process, the data of the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel stop command can be configured to include not only the scheduled stop position but also a parameter that can specify the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are reels that are still rotating (whether or not the stop operation is performed for all the reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S122). In this process, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table, the pull-in priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process according to the stop operation mode of the player up to this point, such a process is performed. Reset various information required for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel, the set internal winning combination is set while referring to the type of the symbol at the scheduled stop position in the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the pull-in priority is acquired by referring to the pull-in priority table and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control process at the end of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked whether or not the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed in this process. Further, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether or not the combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by paying out the medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB. Set the state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, when the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, "1" is set in the payout number as the end condition, and the 3BB state is set. If the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing of S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S86 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing with reference to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S90 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game end processing during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S151, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the mode is not in the specific mode (S152 is NO) and after S153 (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S140 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end processing during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, a periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (1 interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt process is actually performed for a part or all of the process. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input state (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt, and it is checked whether or not there is a change in the input state. If there is a change in the input state, the input of the main RAM 103 is performed. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is directly stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In this process, when the command data is not stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage area 0 and the input port storage area 1 is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, various command data are temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the periodic interruption process. For example, various command data are stored in the communication data storage area. Instead of storing the data, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may be configured to be transmitted to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the lower door mechanism DD open / closed state is checked based on the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56. When various error states have occurred and the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S209). Then, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process after this process.

[7. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 33, an outline of the sub-side control process executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of an outline of the sub-side control process.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are provided on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but the sub-control circuit The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) varies depending on the type and number of connected staging devices, the type of staging performed by the staging device, and the manufacturing cost. It is possible to use the configuration. That is why the term "outline" is used in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing (S301 and S302) in the same manner as the main CPU 101. In this process, various tasks necessary for detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performing various effect execution control processes described later. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect execution control process at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the settings have been changed, the initialization process is appropriately executed on the sub side as well, and the settings must not be changed. If so, the process of returning to the state before the power failure is executed on the sub side as well.

In addition, for example, when a start command is received, the information of the parameter of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the effect of suggesting or notifying the internal winning combination, the game state, etc. (as necessary). It is determined (by lottery), and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed. Further, in the AT state, in addition to this, the content of the effect for notifying the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

Further, for example, when a lock command is received, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined by referring to the information of the parameter of the received lock command, and various effects are executed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. Control the device. In addition, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and it is linked with the stop start position and the scheduled stop position (or simply what number stop operation was performed, etc.). The content of the effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed. In addition, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is given, the content of the effect linked to the given privilege is determined and determined. Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub control board 72 (including one connected via the sub relay board 74), for example, when the effect buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the effect is executed when the effect button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when the effect button according to the effect is operated during the execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when the effect button is operated for calling the user menu described later during non-game, control for displaying the user menu is performed. Further, when the effect button is operated for the selection / decision operation while the user menu is displayed, the control according to these operations is performed.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period in which the operation related to the game and the operation related to the user menu are not performed becomes a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demo status notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the desired content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with various functions for controlling the game, various functions for controlling the effect, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have a function. In the following, an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game store side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's staging operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and a selection / determination operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the player obtains various information. , It is possible to make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement / payout table" is selected / determined, game information indicating the symbol arrangement in the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (contents of the privilege) at the time of winning can be confirmed. The information screen is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "volume / light amount adjustment" is selected / determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachi-slot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light amount of the lamp / LED group, and the like are set. The possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the staging operation) that receives the operation related to the above.

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected / determined, the effect mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the effect (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character). (Including the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of the effect (including the type of expectation when the effect occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (effect execution timing). Etc.)) etc.) can be set. The setting screen is displayed on the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the staging operation) that receives the operation related to the above.

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive an information providing service using a player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player logs in to start a game (may be a case where the game is started without a login operation), and a logout operation is performed at the end of the game to perform game history information (for example,). , Information according to the results of various games, such as how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, and how many cards have been acquired at the maximum) can be confirmed or acquired.

Further, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output, depending on the result of the game (establishment of the opening condition), and the player's information. It also includes information about incidental benefits such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

In addition, various methods can be adopted as the login / logout method in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be made to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit to log in / log out, or the player may be entered with a password. (Specifically, at the time of logout at the end of the game, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input instead of the two-dimensional code, and the password is stored. The player can take notes on paper media, take pictures with a mobile terminal, etc., and log in by logging in by logging in before the next game starts (the password obtained in this way can be entered). -Logout may be performed. In addition, these methods can be combined as appropriate so that login / logout can be performed.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation of the administrator on the game store side (may be the setting change operation or other operation by the administrator on the game store side), and the desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected / determined, the administrator of the game store can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed in the effect display unit. The date and time may be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-mentioned sub-side power-on processing (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected / determined, historical information indicating the number of inserted and discharged sheets within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected / determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is performed. An information screen is displayed on the staging display unit so that the history information indicating the above can be confirmed. Further, for example, when "error information history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the error occurrence date / time and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is shown. An information screen that enables confirmation is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the door opening date / time and the period within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. Further, for example, when the "warning setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the mode and frequency of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, at the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the staging operation) that receives the operation related to the above.

Further, for example, when the "stop setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the stop function of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, makes the game inoperable until the manager of the game store performs a release operation (for example, a reset operation). Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the above-mentioned limit processing, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the staging section) is completed. Further, when the stop function is set to the on state, the automatic settlement function described later may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when the "automatic settlement setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited game values are automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the above-mentioned limit processing, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the staging section) is completed. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to the on state, the above-mentioned stop function may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function and the automatic settlement function, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept the operation related to the setting more easily. Can be used as a part of an operation unit that accepts an operation related to the setting (that is, an operation unit that accepts an effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to increase the number of operation units that can be unnecessarily accepted. Therefore, only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as a part of the operation unit that accepts the operation related to the setting. May be possible.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited thereto. For example, it can be applied to a game machine called a so-called "pachinko machine", a "slot machine", or the like, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines capable of playing a game (performing a game control) according to a player's game operation (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. The following is just an example, but such an extended example will be described.

(Pachinko machine)
The pachinko machine is, for example, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow, a glass door including a protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. It has a payout unit (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out the game ball, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and the effect, and these are frame bodies (the frame body (which may be provided outside the game area). It is supported by (sometimes referred to simply as a "frame" etc.).

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, a launch handle as one of the operating means of the player, an upper plate capable of storing the game ball to be used for the game, and a lower plate capable of storing the paid out game ball. Etc. are provided. In many cases, the above-mentioned effect buttons and movable effect devices are provided. Further, in the game area, for example, a start area through which a game ball can pass (sometimes referred to as a "start opening" or the like), a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning opening" or the like), and the like. A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "large winning opening") and identification information (referred to as a "design", etc.) that can change between a state in which a game ball is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win. In some cases, a variable display device or the like capable of variablely displaying (including "special symbol" and "ordinary symbol") is provided.

Then, in the pachinko machine, the player operates the firing handle and launches the game ball into the game area to play the game. For example, when the launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to shift the gaming state with a probability according to the current state (for example, whether it is a probabilistic gaming state with a relatively high hit probability), the type of the starting area, or the like (for example, the game). Whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state that is advantageous to the person is determined (that is, whether or not to shift to the gaming state is drawn (or determined)). After that, when the stop condition of the variable display (for example, that the set fluctuation time has ended) is satisfied, the variable display is stopped in the stop mode according to the above determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result shifts the gaming state (hit), the stop mode to be stopped also becomes the display result corresponding to the hit, and corresponds to the hit according to the display result being displayed. It shifts to the game state to play. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned determination result does not shift the gaming state (off), the stopped mode is also the display result corresponding to the off, and the gaming state does not shift. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 bets the necessary medals and the game is started when the player starts the operation, whereas the pachinko machine launches the game ball required by the player and operates the handle. Although they differ in that the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, for example, they are common in that the game is started by the player's game motion. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that when the start opportunity is established, the stop mode (in other words, the content of the privilege to be given) that is finally permitted to be displayed is determined. ..

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the stop operation of the player, whereas in the pachinko machine, the stop condition is satisfied (regardless of the stop operation of the player). Although they differ in that the variable display is stopped, they are common in that the variable display is stopped according to the result of a predetermined decision and a privilege is given according to the stopped mode. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that they can perform a game-related effect. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display unit and the information display unit described above. Further, it is needless to say that the pachinko machine may also be provided with the above-mentioned lamp, speaker, or other effect execution means such as an effect device, and the effect may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (also referred to as "identification information" or the like) are variablely displayed in the above-mentioned effect display device. As described above, the original game result is displayed by the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be small in size, and the display result is also displayed by the lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game result. For this reason, the mainstream of pachinko machines is to play a game by variablely displaying (and stopping) the decorative symbol on the staging display device so as to be linked to the variable display of the variable display device. .. Then, such a variable display of the decorative symbol may be delayed for a certain period of time when the start opportunity is established, or the variable display may be started or temporarily stopped before the stop condition is satisfied. Basically, like the variable table device described above, the identification information is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed according to the progress of the game (for example, in the case of a hit, the decorative symbol is a special stop mode (for example, the symbols are aligned). ), While the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-special stop mode (for example, a random stitch) in the case of a missed pattern). It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, various matters described as the configuration of the external structure or the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 have properties peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, those that require a medal and cannot be replaced with a game ball, etc.). ), It can be applied as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachinko machine.

Further, also in the pachinko machine, various controls related to the game are performed by the main control circuit as the game control unit mounted on the main control board (partly, the control related to the payout is electrically connected to the main control board). (Including this, it may be performed by the payout control circuit mounted on the payout control board), and various controls related to the effect are performed by the sub-control circuit as the effect control unit mounted on the sub-control board. The various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for those having characteristics peculiar to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those related to a stop operation).

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and other game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration). It is possible to provide an ART state or the like in which these are combined. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the small winning combination more advantageous than the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increased) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the replay role is played. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to maintain a state in which disconnection is unlikely to occur (as a result, medals are difficult to decrease) for a certain period of time, and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode is available. By being notified, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to provide various gaming states having the same properties as these. For example, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the usual one, so that the game ball can be changed to a state in which it is easy to win, and the game ball is given. It is possible to maintain an easy (increasing) state for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric support state" or the like), a game ball is easily passed through the starting area by controlling the normal symbol differently from the normal state. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency by the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in the probabilistic gaming state, the special symbol is controlled differently from the usual one, so that the winning probability by the variable display device is increased (as a result, the number of gaming balls is likely to increase) for a certain period of time. Is possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1, various matters described as the configuration of the control regarding the transition (or transition) of the gaming state have the characteristics peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the game section). Except for those with transitions, etc.), it can be applied as a control configuration related to the transition (or transition) of the gaming state of the pachinko machine. The same applies to various items described elsewhere as the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Although it is in the time-saving game state, even in the pachinko machine, it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state according to the specified number of games in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). There is. That is, even in the pachinko machine, when the disadvantageous state (for example, the normal gaming state) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 900 games (rotation)) without shifting to the ceiling function (advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state)). Since it is possible to install an advantageous state (for example, a function that can shift to a time-saving game state) as a relief for the pachinko machine, various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of the pachi-slot machine 1 are the configurations related to the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. Can be applied as.

Further, although the pachinko machine is in the time-saving gaming state, even in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), if the stop mode of the variable display device results in a display result corresponding to a specific deviation, this is the case. It is possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state with this as an opportunity. That is, even in a pachinko machine, it is possible to transition (shift) the gaming state (not triggered by the transition to the jackpot gaming state, etc.) by displaying a specific display result (combination of specific symbols), for example. , The various items described as the configuration related to the transition (transition) of the RT state by displaying the combination of the specific symbols of the pachi-slot machine 1 are the configurations related to the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state by displaying the specific display result of the pachinko machine. Can be applied.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's betting operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal slot 5 and betting, or the credited medal being placed in the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button). The game is started with one of the start conditions (operation of operating 6b to bet), and if the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 32 is driven to drive the medal payout exit 11. Although the form of paying out medals or being credited has been described, the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the present embodiment relates to all the forms in which a player bets a game value required for a game, a game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, a game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to the above is applicable. That is, not only the form in which medals are physically inserted (hanged) and the medals are paid out by the movement of the player, but also the game value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachi-slot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it can be applied to a medal-less game that can be played at least in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine". The medalless gaming machine may be referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", or the like.

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the game value possessed by the player, or it may be mounted on the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a game value management device (connected) (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal number control board"). Hereinafter, an example in which this game value management device is provided will be described.

The game value management device is a device provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 having at least a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), and a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device is described as a "connection terminal board". (There is), it is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") so as to be bidirectionally communicable. The game value management device provides the game value necessary for the player to perform the game value lending operation (that is, the game value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external game value providing device. (Action to play), action to give game value (that is, action to provide the player with the game value related to the grant when the winning combination related to the granting the game value is won (the winning combination is established)), and these. It is possible to perform an operation such as electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of. The game value providing device may be referred to as a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", a "sandwich", or the like.

Further, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball ejection management device (ball ejection management server), and the game value management device is connected to the external ball ejection management device as a communication device and an external game value. It is configured so that the payout management information can be transmitted via the providing device. Here, the payout management information is composed of various information necessary for the external payout management device to be able to manage the payout. An example of the payout management information will be described later. Further, the external game value providing device and the external ball ejection management device are connected by, for example, an internet line.

Here, the “ball payout” directly means the number of game media paid out, but in the present embodiment, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, etc. How much the benefits are given to the player (for example, how much the player is positive (how much the game store is negative), or how much the player is negative (how much the game store is positive) It is a concept that includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination thereof.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the possessed game value number is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device is based on the management result of the game value number. It is also possible to manage the game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device. That is, the game value management device may be configured not only to record the total number of game values that the player can provide for the game by an electromagnetic method, but also to control the display of the recorded result. .. In this case, the game value management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded game value number to an external game value providing device, and the player can freely transmit the signal. It has a performance that the recorded game value number cannot be reduced except when it is directly operated, and a signal indicating the recorded game value number has a performance that can be transmitted only via a communication device. Is desirable.

The game value management device not only has a function of electromagnetically managing the game value of the player by using an external game value providing device, but also the number of game values bet by the physical movement of the player and the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical movement of. That is, it may be possible to manage the actual insertion and withdrawal of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. By doing so, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or can be controlled by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless gaming machine. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1. Even if there is, it can be a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

Further, in addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an input port for valuable value such as banknotes, an insertion port for a recording medium (for example, an IC card), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a returning operating means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (all not shown). The insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day of the game store but also member recording media owned by the members of the game store. The game value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid after the next day), but the game value recorded on the member recording medium is valid from the next day onward.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value to the game value providing device by either method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values according to the operation of the player to any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable values. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game value is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, when the game is ended after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the game value number to the game value providing device in response to the operation of the player to any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges a recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the discharged recording medium to a prize exchange or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, and the discharged recording medium can be used as a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, you can move the table and continue the game. Further, if the discharged recording medium is a member recording medium, the game can be stopped here because it is valid from the next day onward.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, depending on the mode of the player's return operation, the game is played. It may be configured so that only the number of game values desired by the person can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. Further, the game value providing device is supposed to record the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharge it, but the same value is given to the player's mobile terminal by using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like. Information may be transmitted, and as long as it provides the player with equivalent value, for example, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device, a lock operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device cannot be performed according to the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 or the game value providing device, for example, setting a password (and inputting the set password), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically used for the game, for example, some external structures such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout outlet 11, the selector 31 and the like are used. Since it is not necessary to provide a part of the internal structure of the hopper device 32 or the like, not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, but also the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the gaming machine. Further, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of a medalless gaming machine)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication-dedicated unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the ball ejection management information to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The payout management device is, for example, a server for payout management managed by the union (information center) to which the gaming machine maker belongs, and the transmitted payout management information is stored in the payout management device. Therefore, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether or not the gambling of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball ejection performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1 like the main control board 71, so that fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be prevented. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration Example 1 and Configuration Example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such an embodiment.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similarly to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize the trace of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, a seal by caulking or affixing a seal sticker, or affixing a caulking sticker that describes the record of cutting the caulking, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Structure example 2>
In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the configuration example 1 described above. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed therein shall be configured. The board shall be housed in an easily visible state.

Here, the medal number control board case of the configuration example 2 may be configured to be subjected to the same sealing process as the main control board case, or at least a part thereof may be sealed. You can also do it. For example, in the medal number control board case, the seal may be performed by caulking as in the main control board case, but the seal may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The stored data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball ejection management device. That is, an example of the ball ejection management information transmitted by the medal number control board to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit is shown. It should be noted that this is only an example, and among the various information shown in FIG. 34, a part thereof may be configured not to be transmitted, or information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 may be transmitted. You can also.

Further, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball ejection management device is also arbitrary. If the payout management device can monitor the payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of a game store), the ball may be transmitted at any timing. .. For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the payout management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of input" is the cumulative number of input per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for those bet by the operation of the re-game. The unit dedicated to communication transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers the information of the game value number given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for the one given by the operation of the re-game. The unit dedicated to communication transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the amusement shop).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference number generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in short, the difference number obtained in the period when the game value is most increased in one unit. (Referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference number and transmits the calculated information to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed), and the communication-dedicated unit receives the information. Is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts for pachinko machines" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various pachinko machines. .. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various bonuses at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various bonuses). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of continuous payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the continuous bonuses (RB, including RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of the continuous bonus at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of the continuous bonus). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the combination ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-dedicated unit receives. The information is transmitted to the ball ejection management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). The accumulated data "combined character ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous". The "section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instructed accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information to be aggregated / calculated even during the AT state. The accumulated data "state ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information which is the target of aggregation / calculation even during operation of various accessories.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-dedicated unit accumulates the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, it is transmitted to the payout management device at the end of business of the game store).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", which is referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The stored data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

In this way, the ball ejection management device can store various types of information (ball ejection management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. Further, the payout management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") capable of identifying an individual of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout management device can identify the gaming machine of the transmission source by these individual identification information, and for example, from a certain time, the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal number control chip ID number" are used. If the correspondence between the two is different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the ball ejection management information includes a plurality of ball ejection information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted balls" to "number of games") that can identify the ball ejection performance per unit. Therefore, the payout management device can recognize whether or not the gambling of the source gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the payout information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain time, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been performed, or there is some defect in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was.

When the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball ejection management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game store, the game machine maker, or the like, and appropriate measures will be taken. That is, each is based on a plurality of managed gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the managed gaming machine to the payout management device, and the sent ball payout management information. By constructing a management system including a ball ejection management device that manages the ball ejection performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under control.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game store can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects various information (for example, a part or all of the above-mentioned payout management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the medal number monitoring device displays all the display contents of the combination ratio monitoring device 54, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. May be good. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Further, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G so that various information may be displayed when this is operated. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

The medal number monitoring device may display the type of the error state when various error states related to the medal state occur. For example, a communication error with the main control board 71 occurs, a communication error with the connection terminal board occurs, a communication error with the game value providing device occurs, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In some cases, etc., the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it easy for the manager of the game store to recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is set in or near the medal number control board case. An explanatory part (sticker sticking, printing, etc.) may be provided.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball ejection management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in the present embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only the number of parts can be reduced, but also the wiring to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in the vicinity at least in the cabinet G. This makes it possible to improve work efficiency at the time of connection. Further, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring location can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the payout management information to the payout management device. Further, in the ball ejection management device, the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine can be appropriately managed by the transmitted ball ejection management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

Further, the function of appropriately managing the ball ejection performance may be provided on the medal number control board, and the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way. .. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal number control board may be configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). For example, the ball ejection monitoring RWM is initialized when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball ejection. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold value, for example, the advantageous section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the probability of occurrence of navigation is reduced, the probability of AT state being extended is reduced, or the like. Alternatively, the AT state itself can be terminated to control the ball ejection performance. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball ejection performance. In this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball ejection management device as the ball ejection management information. That is, both the medal number control board and the ball ejection management device may be configured to be able to manage the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Configuration example of main control board of pachislot machine)
Subsequently, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and one of them is that it is necessary to print the manufacturer name and the board control number on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for specifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “model A”) on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board control number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, when the model A is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model B"), the company Co., Ltd. AA deletes the printed lower manufacturer name and board control number by laser engraving, and in a different space, the manufacturing number and board control number related to the company (for example, the upper manufacturer of the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22") must be newly printed.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement shop, and for example, BB Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. must delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the upper row by laser engraving, and newly print the serial number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, since there is no free space in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 is reused due to the above-mentioned restrictions, although it can still be sufficiently reused in terms of hardware. There was a problem that it might not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and the board control number related to both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing the model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, the following Configuration Example 2 and Configuration Example 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Structure example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number. In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) and others are used. Code can be used. That is, the code is any as long as it includes information that allows the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal or the like). May be good.

In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first reference numeral from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when the model A is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B is removed from the game store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If this is the case, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Structure example 3>
Configuration Example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a substrate control number is printed in the same manner as in Configuration Example 2 described above. In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two copies of AA Co., Ltd. and two copies of BB Co., Ltd. are printed. Further, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or it may be on the main control board case corresponding thereto), the code is read by caulking the portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a band-shaped member or the like. It is possible to fix it in an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting a strip-shaped member or the like, it is possible to release the fixing and make the code readable.

In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. Is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, model A was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and 4 from the right. The second code is considered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture the model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is considered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the fourth from the right. If only the code of No. 1 is readable and the first to third codes from the right are unreadable, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other code unreadable, further reuse is possible, and more. It is also possible to reuse it at the game machine manufacturer. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is possible to provide only the caulking hole and to print the code at the portion corresponding to the caulking hole each time it is reused.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, the pachi-slot machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The pachi-slot machine 1 can be played using a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, a token, or a card that stores game value information given or given to a player. , In the following, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachi-slot machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the appearance of the pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part arranged in the lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 38, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the design drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that the player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal plane are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which a medal is inserted by a player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are either credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed as the game progresses, and is selected by the player. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a staging object, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating the function to the display unit A or the like, which will be described later.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided to rotate and drive the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and to start the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals won by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancel shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the pachi-slot machine 1, various patterns, and the like are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of winning a prize and the number of remaining medals credited. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the pachi-slot machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14. Further, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may be provided with a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 39, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and is a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire pachi-slot machine 1, and a sub control device SS (see FIG. 46). Etc. are housed. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determination of whether or not a prize is won. do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 40, the display unit A is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) with respect to an accessory which is a screen described later. Etc.) and by projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful effect.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 41, the irradiation unit B is a screen device arranged in front of a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward and a screen device that emits irradiation light from the projector device B2 diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorized by the case B22, and is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 47) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. There is. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 41, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 42, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As shown in FIG. 43, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed in the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 and the mounting holes B334 / B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 / B311 and the mounting holes B314 / B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313 in the left-right direction, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 44, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front center portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is widened. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314 / B334 / B344, whereby the optical mirror is between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 45, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 43, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has the side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 40). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, a screw is screwed into the upper surface of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through a screw hole formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 40). As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each configured by applying a screen paint to a base material, and have a projection surface capable of causing an image to appear.

The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Specifically, the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 is flat, whereas the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc shape. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Driven by (not shown).

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 46, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-control device SS described above is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and performing the initial focus setting. In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. , Or it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 has an LED light source, DMD, and a projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 that emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color lights as components arranged around the lens unit B21. It is equipped with a focus mechanism for adjusting the focus (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub-control device SS to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24, and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Guides you to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 gains a projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 47, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to a suitable portion on the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end portion thereof so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector device B2 will be described later.

Further, the projector device B2 has a lens unit B21, an LED substrate (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD substrate (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fan 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. The case B22 houses the lens unit B21 while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

In such a projector device B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub control device SS, and the sub control device SS controls the projector device SS so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the image is displayed on the projection surface of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that it is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are partially in contact with the back surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, as for the fin external sizes of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G are relatively large, while the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D efficiently dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air so as not to raise the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are significantly changed. It dissipates well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipation members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat dissipation effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipation fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear part of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the right rear part of the case B22 in which the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. Has been done. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that air can reach the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink 243R after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A. .. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the heat is taken from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G and forcibly taken from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245. A flow of air exhausted to is formed. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 is formed while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. ..

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to an LED board and a DMD board arranged in the case B22, and further to a focus mechanism.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1, and is a rectangular main body portion 2200 and both left and right sides of the main body portion 2200. The left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, which have a step with the main body portion 2200 and extend to both the left and right sides, and the main body portion 2200 partially extend from the rear side to the rear side. It has a rear end 2202 to be ejected. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing by screwing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter of the square hole 2201c is larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member substantially corresponding to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By fastening the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, the nut 2213 is suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 with the undercover B223 supported via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other so that the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the position can be adjusted and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 51 shows a mounting mode of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower view of FIG. 51 (a) is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper view of FIG. 51 (a) is a view of FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing along the BB'line shown in the figure below. Note that FIG. 51 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 51A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 51 (a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 51 (a). The upper view of FIG. 51 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the lower figure of FIG. 51 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 51 (b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded area indicated by the reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction as the reference direction.

FIG. 52 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 52 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. Ru. A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge portion of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 52). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

Also in the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position near the connecting portions R1 and R3 of the lower pedestal B221 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nuts 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

Adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 46) connected to the projector device B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are carried out. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 46). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position and focus adjustment of the irradiation light in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection positions and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as adjustment value data in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (see FIG. 46). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 due to transportation after shipment from the factory, and even if the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in the playground, it remains as it is. Can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is mainly positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and is in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The direction of the optical axis is adjusted according to the posture in.

In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but four locations are satisfied if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one of the pedestals. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images,
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable is provided.
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2), and
A screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). And, with
The projector (projector device B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized.
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so that the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in some cases, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above.
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A).
While the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), it is possible to irradiate light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) can be reflected diagonally downward and backward, and the main body thereof. It is possible to adjust the light reflection direction by changing the degree of screwing in the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

(2-1) A projection device (projector device B2) that projects an image by irradiation light, and
A plurality of projection planes capable of displaying the image projected by the projection device, and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one projection surface among the plurality of projection surfaces as a movable projection surface.
An upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device is provided.
The plurality of projection surfaces are surface-treated.
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device.
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall.
The upper pedestal is attached so that the in-plane position can be adjusted with respect to the upper wall, and the lower pedestal can adjust the distance with respect to the upper pedestal at three or more points while supporting the projection device. A gaming machine characterized by being attached to.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, thereby appropriately adjusting the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned at the upper wall portion B12 at three or more connecting portions R1, R2, R3. It is attached so that the posture supported via the lower pedestal B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space posture of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted by using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and by extension, a high-quality image having a high visual visual effect can be displayed on a plurality of projection surfaces. It can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above.
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other by a plurality of connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line.
Each of the plurality of connecting portions has
A connecting screw portion (connecting screw portion 2210) that protrudes from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and is screwed through the other.
A coil spring (coil spring 2211) that is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion and is arranged between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal is provided.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are spaced apart from each other in three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 that are not on the same straight line. It can be adjusted individually by simply adjusting the screw tightening amount, and the space after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic urging force of the coil spring 2211. Each posture of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions of the above, and for example, the projector device B2 can be held in an appropriate posture in any of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction.

[Third Embodiment]
The second embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment also applies to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 54 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 55 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 56 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the rear. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of a case that houses the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 54, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by side A, side B, side C, and side D.

Square holes 2201c are provided on the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 61) by screwing.

In the second embodiment, when the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1, the projector device B2 is directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter of the square hole 2201c is larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c. Note that FIG. 54 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300. In the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened by using the fixing plate B321 and the cap bolt. In the second embodiment, the fixed plate B321 is not shown, but when the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened, a conventionally known member can be appropriately selected and used.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. The three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

The lower pedestal B221 has a rectangular main body portion B221a having a rectangular opening formed in the center, a right side portion B221b and a left side portion B221c extending forward with a step from the main body portion B221a, and a main body portion B221a. It is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d having a step and extending rearward.

As shown in FIG. 55, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 56, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

A connecting screw portion 2210 is integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

Similar to the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other so that the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in each of the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting screw portions 2210. Will be done. Each of the three connecting portions is composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 47).

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, a case having the same configuration as that of the second embodiment can be adopted, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. There is.

Similar to the second embodiment, the case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector device B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 47) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 47) is attached to the front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) covered with the lens unit cover B222.

Further, although not shown, in the case B22, two intake fans 244A are located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side portion B221c in the state of being attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 58)). -The 244Bs are arranged so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 57), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 58). As a result, in the case B22, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 58, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing, and its upper end surface (upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 57) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. Is in contact with. Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this respect, in the second embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above the lower pedestal B221. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the case B22 is arranged so that the upper end of the case B22 (upper wall portion B22F) passes through the opening upward, whereby the upper end of the case B22 is arranged. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

As described above, as compared with the second embodiment, the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) with respect to the upper pedestal B220 is moved upward, so that the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 is provided. A part of the upper pedestal B220 will be arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 57) (see FIG. 58). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the irradiation light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, when emitting the irradiation light, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used. The light emission position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. FIG. 58. The upper pedestal B220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d, the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed above each. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. Thereby, while the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from the second embodiment, the same configurations as those of the second embodiment can be adopted for the configurations of the three connecting portions.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as in the second embodiment. An advanced computer program is required for such adjustment of the optical axis direction, and a large amount of cost is incurred in the development of the program. In the present embodiment, the optical axis direction and the like can be adjusted using the same program as in the second embodiment, so that it is possible to suppress the generation of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is described that the case B22 has the upper wall portion B22F, but as in the second embodiment, the case B22 with the upper side open (see FIG. 47) may be used. good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 47) as in the second embodiment. It may be that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward as compared with the second embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the second embodiment, and the same configuration as that of the second embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in the present embodiment, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the second embodiment is adopted in consideration of other effects. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 60 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 60 along the arrow LL and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 62 is a view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed, as viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 63 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 59, the projector cover B1 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside thereof. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to project inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and has a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and rear, a position adjusting surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and a front surface. It also has a connecting portion B301e for connecting the relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjusting surface B301d on the rear side.

A mounting hole B301b is formed on the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjusting hole B301c is formed on the position adjusting surface B301d. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 53) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 61, the relay plate B300 has a step between the main body portion B300A and the main body portion B300A and extends forward, and has a step between the main body portion B300A and the main body portion B300A and extends backward. The rear side portion B300C is provided. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and backward. As described above, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) with an open upper side are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape similar to a hexagon having sides E to J (see FIG. 60) in a top view.

As shown in FIG. 62, a continuous wall surface (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) is formed with sides E to J as the upper ends. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) continuously formed from the side J has a shorter vertical length as compared with the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. The wall surface B401e continuously formed from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view when cut on a horizontal plane passing through the connecting portion B301e (a surface above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and passing below the position adjusting surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 64, an opening B400 (right opening B400a and a left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 are formed. , Communicating inside the projector cover B1.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In the present embodiment, as a member provided on the lower side of the projector cover B1, a blind B500 is adopted instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 45) in the second embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 66 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 along the arrow NN.

As shown in FIG. 65, the blind B500 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and is formed so as to have a continuous inclination with the first horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally and the first horizontal portion B501. A second inclined portion B502a formed so as to have a continuous inclination with the first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally with the first inclined portion B502a, and a second horizontal portion B502b. After the third horizontal portion B502d so that the inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally continuously with the second inclined portion B502c, and the width in the left-right direction of the third horizontal portion B502d are the same. It has a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall portion B504 constituting the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. The first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d have a certain range raised in the vicinity of the outer wall portion B504 and are higher than the inner portion of the range. It has such a structure.

Further, the blind B500 has a small room B507 having a rectangular shape in a plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front side wall portion B507a, an outer wall portion B507b, a rear side wall portion B507d, and an inner wall portion B505 formed in the vertical direction. The front side wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer side wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear side wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

As described above, since the small chamber B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, the small chamber B502 in the second inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower by the length of the width in the left-right direction in the front side wall portion B507a as compared with the width in the left-right direction in the first inclined portion B502a. The outer wall portion B507b is formed with a U-shaped notch 507c having an open upper portion. Further, the upper ends of the front side wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear side wall portion B507d are lower than the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a that is slightly erected upward at its front end, and a second wall portion B501b that is continuous from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a toward the rear. A third wall portion B501c that is continuous diagonally backward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that is continuous backward from the third wall portion B501c, and a continuous inward direction from the fourth wall portion B501d. The fifth wall portion B501e and the like are formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

In the area surrounded by the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e, a screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing is formed.

As shown in FIG. 67, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and is the second of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , It is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 67, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is substantially the same plane as the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. It is placed on top. There is a certain gap between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As will be described later, the gap is filled with the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 71). Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 67) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The upper part of the space P is covered by the projector cover B1 and the lower part is covered by the blind B500. Further, on the side of the space P, the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the inner wall portion B505, the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1. It is surrounded by the surfaces B402a and B402b existing in the front and rear of the cavity B402, the inner side surface 403, and the like.

A part of the space P above the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 59), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 is connected to the space P via the cavity B402 (FIG. 64). See). In the state where the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled, the cavity B402 is a part of the space P.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) are provided with punching B450s (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
FIG. 68 is a perspective view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 65 and a case is arranged. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 71 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70.

As shown in FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat plate-shaped member, and the external shape in the top view is the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, the inner wall portion B505, and the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b of the small room B507. (See FIG. 65) The shape is similar to a figure including the upper edge of each. As a result, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

Further, a duct cover B650 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat plate-shaped member, and although the external shape in the top view is different from that of the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 75), it covers the blind B500 from above like the duct cover B600.

As shown in FIG. 70, the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 is a space above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. For the sake of clarity, the duct cover B600 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 70.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, a fan B700 near the opening is mounted on the upper front side of the duct cover B600. The fan near the opening B700 is a fan for intake air, and the air existing in front of the fan B700 near the opening can pass through the air passage portion B710 (see FIG. 72) and move to the rear. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in a state where the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is positioned in the vicinity of the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the fan B700 near the opening is shaded.

Although not shown here, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G , Housed in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 36). The two openings (not shown) formed on the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58) of the case B22 is also similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air is introduced from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 into the inside of the upper door mechanism UD through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD (the opening on the right side of the two openings). Is incorporated. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 is above the duct cover B600 in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving backward in the space P1 (see FIG. 70), the projector cover B1 is turned inward, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and the intake port B22A. Enters the inside of the case B22 via.

The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the left while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

The air leaving the case B22 passes through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402) and then changes its course forward to the space P (the space on the left side of the two spaces P). Of P), the space P1 above the duct cover B650 is moved forward. Then, the air goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and then passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Then, it is released to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by a thick arrow in FIG. Further, the air flow in the space P1 is shown by an arrow A in FIG. 70. In the present embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD exists directly above the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a part of them overlap each other.

Therefore, when a foreign substance such as a liquid enters the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from invading the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid L is charged from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls to the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 65) of the blind B500.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 67, the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. There is a certain gap between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially coincides with the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to abut on both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination so as to descend toward the rear, the liquid L is the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, and the second. It flows backward through the inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. As described above, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The flow of such a liquid L is indicated by an arrow L in FIG. 70.

The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall portion B503 and is stored in the region surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the outer wall portion B507b (and the inner wall portion B505) (FIG. 71). reference). The region is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 71 shows the stored liquid L in shades.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 70 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1 are connected to each other via the opening B510 shown in FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the opening B510 has a shape similar to a rectangle whose side view is composed of sides K to N.

The side K constituting the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a (see FIG. 65) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. As shown in FIG. 65, the upper end edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 has a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and a second inclined portion B502c. It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (the path of the liquid L).

Further, although not explicitly shown in the drawing, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper end edge of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500, and the left end thereof hits the outer surface of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. Arranged so as to be in contact with each other, the main surface B610 (see FIG. 72) forms substantially the same plane as the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 68). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 to the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22). ) Is less likely to occur.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near the opening>
FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening as viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening as viewed from the front and the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 72, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side portion B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), and screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b). It is equipped with.

The main surface B610 has a shape in which the left rear corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side portion B630 is formed so as to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole for inserting wiring for connecting various functional components (sub-control device SS or the like) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2 or the like. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engaging portion B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, a left rear engaging portion B622 erected from the main surface B610 behind the front engaging portion B621, and a right rear. The side engaging portion B623 and the lower engaging portion B624 slightly erecting from the main surface B610 and extending in the front-rear direction (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower side). It has a right engaging portion B624c) and.

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 to the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

The upper end edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621, the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622, and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper end edge B621a, the upper end edge B622a, and the upper end edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 72, the upper end edge B621a and the upper end edge B622a are shown by diagonal lines, and the air passage portion B710 is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 73, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the fan B700 in the vicinity of the opening is formed so as to project downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 has a front engaging portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400 and a rear engaging portion B422 formed behind the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. It has an extending upper upper engaging portion B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. The downward protrusion length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engagement portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 than in the upper engagement portion B423.

The lower end edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710 of the fan B700 near the opening. For the sake of clarity, the lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 73.

The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched by the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the left rear engagement portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joint portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 is substantially equal to the length in the front-rear direction in the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening, respectively.

As a result, the left front surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left rear surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is in contact with the front surface and is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the left rear side engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right back surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the back surface of the fan B700 near the opening abuts on the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B421 and the rear side engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 are moved upward from the main surface B610. The protrusion lengths of are almost equal to each other. Further, the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1 are downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. The protrusion lengths of are almost equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening.

As a result, the lower surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), And the upper surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the fan B700 near the opening is fixed by being sandwiched by the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

In a state where the fan B700 near the opening is fixed, the front peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710 is attached to the upper end edge B621a of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600 and the lower end edge B421a of the front engagement portion B421 in the projector cover B1. Positioned along (see FIGS. 69 and 74). Although not shown, the rear outer edge of the air passage portion B710 is the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engagement portion B622 and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

That is, when viewed from the front, the air passage portion B710 has a front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, a left rear engagement portion B622, a right rear engagement portion B623, and a front engagement portion of the projector cover B1. It does not overlap with B421 and the rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passage portion B710 includes the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, the left rear engagement portion B622, the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1. Not covered by the rear engaging portion B422. This makes it possible to secure the maximum area of the air passing portion.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper end edge (upper end edge B621a, upper end edge B622a, and upper end edge B623a) of the engaging portion in the duct cover B600, and the lower end edge (lower end edge) of the engaging portion in the projector cover B1. By matching B421a and the lower end edge B422a), the area of the portion where the fan B700 near the opening and the duct cover B600 abut and the area where the fan B700 near the opening and the projector cover B1 abut are increased. This makes it possible to stably fix the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 59) formed downward from the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a. See). As a result, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged behind the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the fan B700 near the opening is located deeper than the right opening B400a, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to directly hit the fan B700 near the opening. It has become like. On the other hand, since the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged close to the right opening B400a, it is easy to take in air from the outside of the projector cover B1 via the right opening B400a. As a result, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

The left rear engaging portion B622 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600 are separately configured, whereas the front engaging portion B621 is connected without dividing the left and right portions. It has a unique shape. As a result, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter backward.

Further, the length of the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engaging in the duct cover B600. The length from the left end of the portion B622 to the right end of the right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the rear engaging portion B422 in the projector cover B1. And, the lengths in the left-right direction of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening are all substantially equal. As a result, the space (cross section when the space P1 is cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction) from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 70) is substantially eliminated by the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. It is in a buried state. Also in this respect, the area of the air passing portion is secured to the maximum, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be improved.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the state where the blind and the duct cover are attached as viewed from the left. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and the duct cover.

Note that FIG. 78 shows the blind B500 viewed from the front and above, while the duct cover B600 is viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 below the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 70) has entered the inside of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store the liquid (see FIG. 71).

As described with reference to FIG. 65, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, a third horizontal portion B502d, and a small room B507. Is formed. This makes it possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 40) below the blind B500 while increasing the capacity of the liquid that can be stored, and to maintain the strength of the blind B500. There is.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the presence of the small room B507 enhances the strength of the blind B500, and the liquid can be stored in the small room B507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small room B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small room B507 from the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small room B507 provided as a rib, the space in the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 has a shape in which the left front corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. For the sake of clarity, the duct cover B650 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 75. As described with reference to FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b (see FIG. 65) of the small room B507 in a top view. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned in front of the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is from the surface B402b (see FIG. 64) existing behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1, that is, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. 71. Is also placed behind. As a result, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L, like the duct cover B600, and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 of the projector cover B1. It is less likely to invade the internal space Q (inside the case B22).

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube that communicates from the blind B500 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by inserting the liquid discharge hole S. Hereinafter, the liquid discharge hole S will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back surface side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the liquid discharge hole S is provided after the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the duct cover B600. It is composed of a side portion B630 (see FIG. 72).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch with an open lower portion in the back side wall portion B410 constituting the back surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the first back side wall portion B510 constituting the back surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the second back side wall portion B511 formed in front of the first back side wall portion B510 of the blind B500. The second back side wall portion B511 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B508 which is continuously formed from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503 toward the rear. The first back side wall portion B510 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B509 which is continuously formed from the lower end of the second back side wall portion B511 toward the rear.

The rear side portion B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back side surface B631 and a downward projecting portion B632a and a downward projecting portion B632b protruding downward from the left and right both end edges of the surface B631. The downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b face each other so as to be substantially parallel to each other at a certain distance, and a space is formed between the downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b. ..

With the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600. The space formed between the B632a and the downward protrusion B632b is superimposed in the rear view, whereby the liquid discharge hole S (for liquid discharge on the left side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76) is used. The hole S) is formed. Since the rear side portion B630 is not formed on the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 75), the liquid discharge hole S on the right side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76 is the projector cover B1. It is formed by the wiring opening B411, the wiring opening B510a of the blind B500, and the wiring opening B511a.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted into the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts (sub-control device SS or the like) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B2 or the like. Wiring for this is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector device B2 and the fan B700 near the opening by inserting the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 72).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed in the internal space Q (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1. The position is separated from the opening B510 (see FIG. 71) opened toward the surface. As a result, it is less likely that the liquid stored in the blind B500 will enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projection device is more likely to generate heat and become hotter than the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projection device does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. And.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) The screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 near the opening) arranged inside the cover member and
A partition member (duct cover B600) for partitioning the internal space of the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The partition member divides the space communicating from the first opening inside the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2).
The first space and the second space communicate with each other through the second opening.
The fan is arranged in the second space, and the fan is arranged in the second space.
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P1) by a partition member (duct cover B600). It is partitioned into space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate with each other through a second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in a first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near an opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1). This makes it possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

On the other hand, since the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1), the cover member (projector cover B1 and Even if foreign matter is mixed inside the blind B500), the foreign matter is placed in the projector (projector device B2) due to the presence of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) (first space (space)). It is possible to make it difficult for Q) to invade the side). Further, the third space (space P2) is a partition member (duct cover B600) from the second space (space P1) (a space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists). ), So if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object invades from the third space (space P2) to the second space (space P1). It is possible to prevent it from being stored. As a result, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have invaded from the outside of the game machine, and the cause of the projector (projector device B2) failure can be eliminated. Unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a) can be suppressed to improve security.

(4-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space.
The fan is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in a first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near an opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). This makes it possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, in the second space (space P), a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided, and the fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided. , In the second space (space P), it is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600). In this regard, when installing the fan (fan B700 near the opening), if a structure such as a screw or a claw is separately provided, a new space is required (in the left-right direction) for the structure. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to install a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) in a space-saving manner, and air passes through the second space (space P). The space of the possible part can be secured as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of air movement between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and make the best use of the function of the fan (fan B700 near the opening). At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1) above.
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air-passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan (fan B700 near the opening). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being obstructed by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be further improved while maximizing the suction force of the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening).

(5-1) The screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible. ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The second space can store liquid by closing the lower part.
Further, the cover member has a wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and wiring of the blind B500) for inserting a wiring for connecting a device arranged outside the cover member and the projector. The opening B510a for wiring and the opening B511a for wiring) are formed.
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening.
The wiring opening can be inserted with a mechanism (tube included in the discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). This makes it possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

Further, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device and a projector (projector device) arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a and a wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring connecting to B2) is formed, and a second space is formed. (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) have an opening for wiring (the opening B411 for wiring of the projector cover B1 and the opening B510a for wiring and the opening B511a for wiring of the blind B500). Communicating through. The second space (space P) can store liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) is an opening for wiring (projector cover). It can be discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1 and the wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. As a result, the liquid (drinks poured by the player, etc.) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even in such a case, the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from entering the device outside the second space (space P). can do. Further, the stored liquid is appropriately discharged from the wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) to reduce the amount of liquid stored to a certain limit or less. It is possible to keep it in. As a result, the liquid is excessively stored in the second space (space P), and the liquid invades the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). You can avoid the situation. In this way, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Since the internal temperature of the pachi-slot machine 1 is relatively high (about 60 ° C.), the stored liquid evaporates naturally if left unattended, even if it is not discharged using the above mechanism. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the discharge mechanism, and the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a and wiring of the blind B500). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge portion (projector cover) continuous from a part of the peripheral edge of the first opening (side j shown in FIG. 60) toward the inside of the cover member is formed. The front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed, and the front engaging portion B421) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The fan is arranged so as to abut on the opening edge in the second space.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in a first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 near an opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). This makes it possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from a part of the peripheral edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the first opening (right opening B400a). An opening edge portion (front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed continuously toward the opening, and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) has an opening edge portion (projector cover) in the second space (space P). It is arranged so as to abut on the front engaging portion B421) of B1. As a result, if a foreign substance such as a liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) is mixed inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even so, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening). On the other hand, by moving the installation position of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) as close as possible to the first opening (right opening B400a), the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) can be combined. The air can be smoothly moved between the projectors, and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In the third embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is the upper door mechanism UD (FIG. 36) was described as being housed in. As described above, when the front portion of the irradiation unit B projects to the front of the cabinet G, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hooking portion UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screwing. On the other hand, on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) is provided so as to project inward.

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the lower side surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front side projecting member G120 and hooked. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that air flows between the internal space and the external space of the pachislot machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention. May allow air to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 36) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

Further, in order to reduce the amount of foreign matter entering the inside of the pachislot machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is concerned. Should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening may be provided with some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to the punching B450) to prevent the intrusion of foreign matter. desirable.

Further, in the third embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). Was described as being disposed. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, the fan is arranged only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is placed outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). It may not be arranged. On the contrary, the fan may be arranged only outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1), and the fan may not be arranged only outside the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modification, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are slightly different from those in the third embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description will be omitted, but the blind B500 in this modification includes the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The inclined portion B502 is formed instead of the small chamber B507, and the small chamber B507 is not formed. Further, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned in front of the third embodiment, and the front surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. ..

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, the position of the intake fan is surrounded by a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ). The area surrounded by the dotted line and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F ( _R4 ) are illustrated.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 (see FIG. 71) on the right side, and when the intake fan is arranged in the area, the intake fan is the case. It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) provided on the right side surface of B22. As a result, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent to the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ) is the right side area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), and is a portion where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) of the projector cover B1. be. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 can be smoothly flowed backward through the opening B400. ..

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ) is the front region of the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and is the lower region of the opening B400. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the inside of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) are illustrated as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fan.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when the exhaust fan is arranged in the area, the exhaust fan is placed on the left side surface of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When the exhaust fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air discharged from the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As for the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 80, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. However, only the exhaust fan may be arranged.

Further, the intake fan includes an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line. , F (R ₄ ) may be arranged only in one of the regions surrounded by the dotted line, or may be disposed in two or more regions of these regions. May be good. The exhaust fan may be arranged in only one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ). It may be arranged in both areas.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that an air flow path as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 64 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air in the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow completely along the path.

An air flow path that can be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an air flow path that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by the arrow X1 in FIG. 81, for example, there may be _a flow in which the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 goes out of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the intake port _B22A in this way may move to the rear of the projector cover B1 as shown by the arrow X2. Further, as shown by the arrow X3 _, there may be an air flow in which the air discharged from the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E is directed to the rear.

Since the rear part of the projector cover B1 is open _, the air that has moved backward as shown by the arrow _X2 or the arrow X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. An exhaust fan may be arranged in the rear region of the projector cover B1 so that the air can be smoothly discharged from the rear of the projector cover B1.

Further, in the third embodiment, the partition member (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) is provided to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space. However, in the present invention, the partition member (duct cover) is provided. It is not essential to provide B600 and duct cover B650).

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination such that it descends toward the rear, the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 has an upper end edge B505a (opening) of the inner wall portion B505. The vertical distance from the lower end of 510) is longer than that of the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in the rear portion (region away from the lower end of the opening 510) of such an inclined portion B502. Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from entering the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. can do.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification has the following features.

(7-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2) and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be visually recognized.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. The opening B400) is formed.
Inside the cover member, the first space (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by the fourth opening (the opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) communicate with each other. It communicates with B510),
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (the space P on the right side), and the lower end portion has the first opening. It is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an incline so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the above.
At least a part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, whereby the first space (space P on the right side) is formed, while the second opening is formed. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) has the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (the second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (the space P on the right side). At the same time, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination such that the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) descends as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (the opening B400 on the right side) increases. Therefore, when a liquid (drink or the like poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). , The liquid will flow through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as it moves away from the portion directly below the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid is inclined. When it flows down the portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505), the third opening (right side) of the liquid is reached. Since the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the opening B510) is located above, the liquid is difficult to pass through the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid is a projector. It is unlikely that the (projector device B2) will invade the side where the (projector device B2) is arranged. In this way, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have invaded from the outside of the gaming machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1).
On the upper surface of the main body portion (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (the opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After the air is allowed to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the gaming machine. If it is discharged from the back of the machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the gaming machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, and as a result, a vicious cycle of warm air will occur between the adjacent gaming machines, and as a result, the projector. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening on the left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Since G41) exists above the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening (opening B400 on the left side) is present. When a foreign substance enters from the outside to the inside of the game machine through the opening G41 on the right side or the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side), the foreign substance enters the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) or the second opening. It is easy to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (opening B400 on the left side). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when a player injects a drink from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side), the drink passes through the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). If the projector (projector device B2) is intruded into the inside of the projector (projector device B2), the projector (projector device B2) may be damaged. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) is used from the outside of the gaming machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). And even when the liquid enters the inside of the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation occurs. Can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2).
A space that is closed downward is formed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) that is continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) and the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) is lowered. Since the closed space is formed, the liquid that has flowed down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid is below the lower end of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505), the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector device B2) through the projector.

(8-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2) and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be visually recognized.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. The opening B400) is formed.
Inside the cover member, the first space (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by the fourth opening (the opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) communicate with each other. It communicates with B510),
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, whereby the first space (space P on the right side) is formed, while the second opening is formed. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) has the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (the second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above.
The projector has a fan (intake air) arranged between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the first vent and the second vent. Equipped with fans for 244A and 244B)
The first vent (intake port B22A) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) face each other, while the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) face each other. The projector is arranged so as to face B510).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and the first. A fan (intake fan 244A / 244B) is provided between the vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E), and the first vent (intake port B22A) is the first. Since the projector (projector device B2) is arranged so as to face the opening of 3 (opening B510 on the right side) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) to face the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). By forcibly sucking air with a fan (intake fan 244A / 244B), the above-mentioned air flow can be smoothly created.

(8-3) The gaming machine according to (8-1) or (8-2).
On the upper surface of the main body portion (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (the opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the opening G41 on the left side of the two openings G41) are formed.
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After the air is allowed to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the gaming machine. If it is discharged from the back of the machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the gaming machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, and as a result, a vicious cycle of warm air will occur between the adjacent gaming machines, and as a result, the projector. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). It is housed in the cabinet G), and the arrangement position of the projector (projector device B2) is close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (top wall G4 of the cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also It is short, and accordingly, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) and the projector (projector device B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, in designing a flow path in which the air taken in from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) is discharged from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector device B2), the process is in progress. It is not necessary to make a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the pachi-slot gaming machine has been described. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86.

FIG. 82 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view showing a decorative unit and a frame member of a pachinko gaming machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the pachinko gaming machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a gaming board 6114, a dish unit 6115, a launching device 6122 for launching a gaming ball, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including the board unit, a ball payout unit for giving a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and a protective glass 6124 having transparency is arranged in the opening 6116. Further, the base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above the plate unit 6115 and a lower plate 6126 below the plate unit 6115. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout outlets 6131A and 6131B for lending and paying out the game balls (prize balls), and if the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game is played. The balls are discharged, and in particular, the upper plate 6125 stores the game balls for firing in the game area 6141.

The launcher 6122 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. The launching device 6122 is provided with a launching handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the launching handle 6132 can be operated by the player to advance the pachinko game. When the launch handle 6132 is gripped by the player and is rotated clockwise, electric power is supplied to the launch motor according to the rotation angle, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 6125 is supplied. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 in which the launched game ball can roll in front of the game board 6114. The game area 6141 is surrounded by guide rails and the like, and is an area where the game ball can roll. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching device 6122 is guided by the guide rail provided on the game board and moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then a plurality of obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141. It will flow down from the upper side of the game board while changing its traveling direction due to the collision with the game board.

As shown in FIG. 82, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decorative unit 6258 is arranged so as to project in front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decorative unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above-described embodiment is disposed in the cavity. FIG. 82 shows a state in which the inside of the decorative unit 6258 is seen through from above the decorative unit 6258.

As shown in FIG. 83, a screen device C (see FIG. 40) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) of the screen device C is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B, as in the above-described embodiment. You can do it.

The decorative unit 6258 is mounted on top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 84). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back surface side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 84, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decorative unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation unit B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decorative unit 6258.

Further, the speaker 6152 and the speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-shaped openings.

In a state where the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B each cover the front of the speaker 6152, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B, respectively. It can be released to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 84, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the right side of the front portion of the irradiation unit B. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the speaker hole 6151A.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector device B2, as in the third embodiment. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

The air that has come out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211 and moves rearward, and is discharged to the outside from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 82 and 84. In the third embodiment, a case where air is taken in from above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 and discharged to the outside and above of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100, and air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which the air for cooling the projector is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since the pachinko gaming machine has a shorter depth in the front-rear direction than the pachislot gaming machine, when another pachinko gaming machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko gaming machine in the same island facility. , There is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air warmed by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko gaming machine, it is considered that the island equipment of the pachinko gaming machine does not contain as much heat as the island equipment of the pachislot gaming machine.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 85, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decorative unit 6258. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector device B2, as in the above-described modification. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side surface of the decorative unit 6258 as well as the right side surface. As a result, the air discharged from the opening B400L to the outside of the projector cover B1 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the opening 6300L.

Such an air flow is indicated by an arrow in FIG. 85. In this modification, it is considered that the warmed air may be taken into the adjacent gaming machine because the air discharging direction is set to the side of the gaming machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the air discharge direction is to the side of the gaming machine, for example, the width of the decorative unit 6258 in the left-right direction is further shortened to make one pachinko machine. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine are configured to be separated to some extent.

Hereinafter, other modification examples will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned modification, it has been described that the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 86, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. The speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, the same air flow path as the above-mentioned example can be formed.

Although FIG. 86 shows how the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed behind the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be arranged by using the space while forming a space on the back side of the game board.

For example, an opening portion is provided in the center of the gaming board, and the irradiation unit is arranged on the base door, the gaming board, or other rear members of the pachinko gaming machine so that the front portion of the irradiation unit penetrates through the opening portion. May be good. In that case, a conventional pachinko gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine having an opening in the center of the gaming board and having a configuration in which a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the gaming board can be visually recognized through the opening). Can be diverted as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, arranging the screen mechanism, and further arranging the irradiation unit on the rear member of the game board or the like, the irradiation unit and the screen mechanism are mounted while keeping the shape of the game board as it is. It will be possible to make it a new game machine. When such a configuration is adopted, since a part of the front of the irradiation unit protrudes forward from the gaming board, a larger space behind the pachinko gaming machine can be secured. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island equipment when a pachinko gaming machine equipped with an irradiation unit is installed in the entire island equipment in a playground where the island equipment is narrow. Further, a small-sized liquid crystal display device that arranges a decorative member such as a logo according to the model or performs auxiliary decoration in front of the irradiation unit that can be visually recognized by the player (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11). By arranging an illuminated substrate or the like, the irradiation unit can be blindfolded so as not to be seen by the player, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

The screen device C may be installed in a state of being attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state of being separated from the irradiation unit B.

In the modification described above, the air discharge direction is the rear or side of the gaming machine, but the air may be discharged from above the gaming machine as in the third embodiment. When the air discharge direction is upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form an opening in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction in which the air is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged, and the path through which the air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Further, in order to make the air flow smooth, an intake fan and / or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 84) may be arranged between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 85) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 85) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if intake and exhaust are sufficiently performed by the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B, it is not necessary to dispose the fan outside the irradiation unit B.

In the above-mentioned modification, the projector cover B1 described with reference to FIG. 80 is shown as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and an opening for taking in air for cooling the projector. Further, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately adopted. These openings can be formed at any location such as the front and rear, above and below, and sides of the projector cover, and the position of forming the openings is appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector and the like. be able to. Further, the projector may be arranged inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the gaming machine is directly sent to the projector (via the projector cover). It is also possible to configure it to hit (without doing).

[Fourth Embodiment]
The second embodiment and the third embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment and the third embodiment also applies to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing a state in which the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 90 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87.

The display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 87 is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40) in the cabinet G, similarly to the display unit A described in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. It has a back plate 9014 erected in the section. By connecting the right side plate 9012, the left side plate 9013, and the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011 by screwing, a box-shaped housing in which the front side and the upper surface side are open is formed.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015.

The projector 9020 has the same configuration as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 47) described in the second embodiment (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210), and projects light including an image. It is possible to do. The projector 9020 is installed so that the lens is on the lower side, whereby the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

Below the projector installation member 9015, a mirror installation portion 9016 for installing the mirror 9030 is formed. The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016a and 9016b that are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

The mirror 9030 has the same configuration as the optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 42) described in the second embodiment, and can reflect the light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016a and 9016b of the mirror installation portion 9016. As a result, the mirror 9030 is in an inclined posture so that the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90). In FIG. 90, the irradiation range of light is shown by diagonal lines. The relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 90 is the relative positional relationship shown in FIG. 88 (the state in which the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 are installed in the unit housing 9010). It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 in the state shown in FIG. 88 in an exploded manner while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030.

A cabinet-side screen 9040 is fitted to the front portion of the bottom plate 9011 to stand upright. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 from the rear (rear side).

The cabinet-side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is incident on a uniformly flat back-side incident surface 9040a to which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident. It has a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040a. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040. Will be done. The moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In the present specification, moving images and moving images are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side.

In FIG. 91, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded. The irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet side screen 9040. Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) (the region shown by shading in FIG. 91) and passes through the peripheral region of the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 91, in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020, the peripheral region of the cabinet side screen 9040 is shown by diagonal lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through the area shown by the diagonal line in FIG. 91 travels in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Part of the light traveling forward of the cabinet-side screen 9040 will be incident on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD (FIG. 96). (B) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 95 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the second embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 92 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 39) according to the second embodiment. Is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 93, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH forming the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. Further, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 38) in the central portion (position superposed on the cabinet side screen 9040 in the front view), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. It is provided. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the image becomes visible to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a curved shape of a flat screen (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and the reel screen mechanism described in the second embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 45) in the side view, the shape in the top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface.

Like the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are transmissive screens that are displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 has an incident surface 9050a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9050b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9050a. , Have. The door-side left screen 9060 has an incident surface 9060a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9060b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9060a. , Have.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side, respectively. That is, the incident surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050, and the incident surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. There is.

FIG. 92 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged in the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet side screen 9040 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 92, the side constituting the left end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 95) and the side constituting the right end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other. (Or substantially abutting), the side 9050c of the door side right screen 9050 is located slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet side screen 9040. Further, the side constituting the right end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 95) and the side constituting the left end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other (or substantially in contact with each other). ), And the side 9060c of the door side screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet side screen 9040.

The sides 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and the sides 9040c and the side 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively located on substantially the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. It will be located.

Further, a side constituting the lower end of the door side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 95), a side constituting the lower end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 95), and a lower end of the cabinet side screen 9040. (Side 9040e shown in FIG. 87) has substantially the same position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on substantially the same plane). Further, the vertical lengths of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (sides 9050c and sides 9060c) are longer than the vertical lengths of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (sides 9040c and sides 9040d). There is. As a result, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at substantially the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are located at substantially the same height as the cabinet-side screen 9040. Has a taller structure.

<Display of images on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. FIG. 96B is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. FIG. 96C is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. 97 and 98 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen.

In FIG. 96 (a), the region shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 91 (the peripheral region of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020) is divided into three regions (region I, region II, for convenience. And, it is shown separately in region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region II is a region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region III is a region located above the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 96A, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded as in FIG. 91.

As described above, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region I in FIG. 96 (a) is the door side right screen 9050. It is incident on the incident surface 9050a. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region II in FIG. 96 (a) is the door side left screen. It is incident on the incident surface 9060a of 9060. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the left screen 9060 on the door side.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to the game) are displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060. In the present embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image. Images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the data.

97 and 98 show such image data. The shaded area (area A) in FIG. 97A contains information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040. The shaded area (region B) in FIG. 97 (a) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door side right screen 9050. The shaded area (region C) in FIG. 97 (a) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door side left screen 9060. The remaining region (region D) in FIG. 97A contains information having a pixel value of 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of the pixel formed on the liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. The fact that the pixel value is 0 indicates that the light transmittance is the minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the region where the pixel value is 0 is black.

FIG. 97B shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 97B includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the fireworks image 9101 in the area B, and information indicating the character image 9102 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the character image 9102 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040 are The positions in the front-back direction are almost the same. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 are approximately equal in distance from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction, so that the focal points are not significantly deviated. It has become.

FIG. 98A shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98A includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B, and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. .. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060. ..

FIG. 98 (b) shows an example of still another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98B includes information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for a game is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, in a gaming machine in which an image is projected from such a projector onto a screen, there is a problem that the staging expression is poor due to the flat screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various staging expressions.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) Screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen is provided.
The screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
As the screen, a first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) arranged sideways or above or below the first screen in front view. Is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while the light projected by the projector is the first. At least a part of the light that does not enter the first screen is arranged so as to enter the second screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) is arranged on the side of the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) in the front view. There is. Then, while a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), the first screen (cabinet) of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident. At least a part of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can be incident on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), respectively, and these images are viewed by the player. In that case, they will be displayed in a positional relationship so that they are lined up side by side. Thereby, the player can visually see the player through the images displayed on such two screens (the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform a variety of directing expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1) above.
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the first screen visible. Equipped with
The second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening / closing door.
It is characterized by that.

Generally, the opening / closing door of a gaming machine is decorated (modeled) according to the model, but such decoration requires a large amount of cost. Then, every time a new model is developed (for each project), if the opening / closing door is shaped and the decoration is changed, the cost will increase accordingly.

In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is provided with a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), and the second screen. By displaying an image (an image similar to the decoration on the outside) on (the right screen 9050 on the door side and the left screen 9060 on the door side), the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not decorated with the decoration peculiar to the model. However, the same visual effect as when the decoration is applied can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a simple opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) without decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, it is not necessary to change the decoration of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) on a large scale, and image data according to the model (image data similar to the decoration peculiar to the model). ) Should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) are made suitable for the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change. It is possible to reduce the cost.

In the fourth embodiment, among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region I (the region located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 96 (a) is incident on the door side right screen 9050. Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region II (the region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 96 (a) is incident on the door side left screen 9060 on the door side. It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 are arranged respectively. That is, it has been described that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) in the front view.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is above or below the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view. It may be arranged. For example, while the door side upper screen is provided on the upper side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 is located above the region III (cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 96 (a). The light that has passed through the region) may be configured to enter the upper screen on the door side. Further, while the door side lower screen is provided under the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet side screen (for example, FIG. 96 (a)). ), The light that has passed through the region (the region opposite to the region III on the cabinet side screen 9040) may be configured to enter the lower door side screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens of the door side right screen, the door side left screen, the door side upper screen, and the door side lower screen may be provided, or any of the four screens may be provided. One, two, or three screens may be provided. A screen arranged on the side of such a cabinet-side screen (door-side right screen or door-side left screen) and a screen arranged above or below the cabinet-side screen (door-side upper screen or door-side lower). The screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) in the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) is provided in an area close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view. Alternatively, it may be provided in a region separated from the first screen (cabinet side screen) to some extent. For example, by changing the structure of the arrangement position of the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 95), etc. An upper screen, a left screen on the door side, a right screen on the door side, and the like may be provided. As a result, if the light projected from the projector is incident on the back side of these screens and the image is displayed on the front side, the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms can be designed unique to the model. The model information can be displayed, and such design and information can be easily changed by appropriately using the image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right horizontal panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When a second screen (door side upper screen, door side left screen, door side right screen, etc.) is provided at these arrangement positions (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD). , It is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 91). For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the irradiation range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that the cabinet side screen is not provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate, and the light that travels forward without incident on the cabinet side screen is the top panel mechanism HA, left side. To reach the arrangement position of the panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE, etc. (the area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that the light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD). It is possible to design. As described above, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in the front view is irradiated by the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the outer peripheral portion of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) may be irradiated in a wider range.

In the fourth embodiment, as an example of image data, the region A, the region B, and the region C shown in FIG. 97 (a) are separate images (in the example of FIG. 97 (b), the effect image 9100 and the fireworks image). The image data including the information indicating 9101 and the character image 9102) has been described. The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, information indicating one image (for example, an effect image 9100) so as to straddle the area A, the area B, and the area C. Image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, and each screen is displayed. The one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is formed by integrating some of the images displayed in. As described above, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screens arranged in the peripheral area thereof (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door side lower screen, etc.). May be displayed individually, or one video expression may be performed as a whole by combining the images displayed on each screen.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in a state of being exposed on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 (door side right screen 9050 and door side left). No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (door side right screen and door side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's field of view, and it is considered that there is no hindrance for the player to visually recognize the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, the rigidity of the gaming machine can be ensured and the second screen can be prevented from being damaged. When the transparent panel is provided, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel having irregularities can be adopted. This makes it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the second screen (the right screen on the door side and the left screen on the door side), and gives an appearance similar to that when the opening / closing door itself is three-dimensionally decorated. Can be created.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, it has been described that the shapes of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved shapes of a flat screen (the shape in the top view is an arc shape). However, the shape of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, and door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a screen having an arbitrary shape can be appropriately adopted. For example, the second screen may be a screen having a flat shape such as the cabinet side screen 9040, a screen having irregularities, or a screen having a rounded shape. , The screen may have an angular shape.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The second to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment also applies to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 99 is a vertical sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet.

In FIG. 99, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown by using the alternate long and short dash line. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90).

In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that a part of the light traveling forward in this way is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 88) from the rear (rear side). On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the cabinet side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 102 and 103). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decorative unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Hereinafter, each unit will be described.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as viewed from the front while the translucent plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the upper holding member and the upper frame as viewed from below. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 102 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 103 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower holding member UD101, and the upper holding member UD102 are assembled, and the lower frame UD100 shows a state in which they exist independently. There is. In FIG. 105, the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown in an assembled state, and the lower holding member UD101 and the upper holding member UD102 are shown to be present independently. FIG. 106 shows that the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 each exist independently. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the screen unit 1040 includes a translucent plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

The translucent plate 1045 is mainly made of a resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The translucent plate 1045 has a flat surface portion 1045a located at the center, a curved portion 1045b formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1045a toward the rear, and the curved portion 1045b toward the rear from the rear end. The side surface portion 1045c formed continuously is provided. The flat surface portion 1045a and the side surface portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other. The curved portion 1045b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved, as in the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 93) in the fourth embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is a screen according to a fourth embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), It has an incident surface on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1046 is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, using, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected. Shows color.

The screen sheet 1046 includes a flat surface portion 1046a located at the center and a curved portion 1046b formed continuously from both left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1046a toward the rear. The flat surface portion 1046a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved. The flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat surface portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the translucent plate 1045. Specifically, the front surface of the flat surface portion 1045a of the translucent plate 1045 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045. And the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (still image or still image) related to the game is applied to the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046. Moving image) is displayed. Since the translucent plate 1045 is formed transparently and there is no structure in front of the translucent plate 1045 that blocks the player's view, when an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is displayed by the player. It becomes visible from.

Further, since the screen sheet 1046 has a flat surface portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and the positions in the depth direction are different between the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, images are displayed on both the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying the image, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. Further, in the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b are formed by forming (molding in an open space), respectively, and thereby, for example, when the curved portion is formed by vacuum processing or the like. It is possible to suppress the deformation of the image as compared with.

The translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state where the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. It is supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and is slightly projected upward at the horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and the front end of the bottom plate UD100a. The wall portion UD100b, the right end portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end portion of the bottom plate UD100a, and the left side portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end portion of the bottom plate UD100a are provided. The translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a in a state where the translucent plate 1045 is in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side portion UD100c, and the left side portion UD100d. In this state, the lower part of the front surface of the translucent plate 1045 abuts on the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 so that the entire front lower portion of the transparent plate 1045 can be brought into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 105, the lower holding member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and the front side surface (holding surface UD101a) thereof has a curved shape and a flat portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. It has a formed part. With the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 mounted on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower holding member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, so that the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is the lower frame UD100. It is sandwiched between the wall portion UD100b and the translucent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower holding member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 104) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially quadrangular outer shape in front view, and the bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction and the bottom surface UD110a slightly downward from the front portion. It is provided with a protruding wall portion UD110b. In the state where the upper frame UD110 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, the upper end edge of the translucent plate 1045 abuts on the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 in the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, and the front surface of the translucent plate 1045. The upper portion is positioned so as to abut on the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the translucent plate 1045 so that the upper front surface of the translucent plate 1045 can abut over a certain range.

The front side surface of the upper holding member UD102 (holding surface UD102a, see FIG. 105) has a portion formed in a planar shape and a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. The upper holding member UD102 has a screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 by passing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 106) in a state where the upper surface thereof is in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing it into the UD110c. As a result, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b and the translucent plate 1045 of the upper frame UD110 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the lower portion of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. As a result, the screen sheet 1046 can be brought into close contact with the translucent plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the occurrence of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being disturbed.

As shown in FIG. 107, when the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045 are the flat portions of the screen sheet 1046. While the 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are covered, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), there is at least a gap corresponding to the length in the front-rear direction of the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045. For the sake of clarity, such gaps are shaded in FIG. 107.

An image is displayed on the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed. No image is displayed on (the side surface portion 1045c, that is, the shaded portion in FIG. 107). This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the image is embossed at a position separated in the front direction from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), and realizes a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decorative unit 1050>
FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet as viewed from the rear.

In addition, in FIG. 108, the first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 show the state in which they are assembled, and the upper frame UD110 and the screen sheet 1056 are shown. , And the screen sheet 1057 show how they exist independently.

As shown in FIG. 108, the decorative unit 1050 is adjacent to the first structure 1051 arranged in the center, the second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, and the second structure 1052. It includes a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged on the back side of these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is arranged on the back surface side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is arranged on the back surface side of the third structure 1053 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, and have a shape that can be fitted in the adjacent portion. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d together with the fourth structure 1054.

The first structure 1051 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape). The second structure 1052 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a flame). The third structure 1053 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and like the screen sheet 1046, the incident on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident. It has a surface and a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, and are milky white and semi-white when not projected. It is transparent or has a gray color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057. , Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a configuration in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front surface side thereof. The half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transmissive film sheet to the surface of the substrate or by depositing a metal film on the surface of a substrate by a conventionally known method, and a part of the incident light can be formed. While reflecting, it has the property of transmitting part of it.

By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when light is not projected from the projector 9020, an object existing around the third structure 1053 is reflected, for example, black plating is applied. It will look like a part with a sword. As the object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 100 can be provided. The structure having a shape imitating a chain may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a shape imitating a chain) is flowing and moving is displayed on the screen sheet 1057. This makes it possible to produce an effect as if the stationary object is moving when no light is projected from the projector 9020. As described above, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive effect by both the modeled object and the image related to the modeled object.

Further, the screen sheet 1056 has a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a shape convex on the incident surface side are arranged. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and in combination with the modeled object arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive effect can be produced. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the character shape of "GOD", the image corresponding to the character "GOD" is displayed on the screen sheet 1056 to "GOD". It is possible to create an appearance in which the characters "" are shining. Further, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted from the vicinity of the optical axis of the projection lens) is incident on the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is arranged at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing the prism layer having a high light-collecting effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from being lowered. As with the screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member as viewed from the front. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of a cross section of a light transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member as viewed from the front.

Note that FIG. 109 shows a state in which the light guide member 1062 is removed from the state in which the light transmissive plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are assembled. .. In FIG. 110, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are slightly displaced from the assembled state of the lower frame UD100 in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062. Is enlarged and shown. In FIG. 111, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are cut in a horizontal plane in an assembled state, and the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 is enlarged. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 101, the indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along each of the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. There is.

As shown in FIG. 109, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED substrate 1061 and a light guide member 1062.

The LED substrate 1061 is arranged substantially parallel to the side surface portion 1045c on each of the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c of the lower frame UD100 and the slightly right side of the left side portion UD100d (slightly inside the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045). .. A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED substrate 1061 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged in the vicinity of the right side portion UD100c is installed so as to emit light in the right direction, and the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged in the vicinity of the left side portion UD100d is in the left direction. It is installed so as to emit light. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged so that a part thereof overlaps with the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 in the side view, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged slightly separated from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and a plurality of openings 1062a that open inward are formed in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in the upper part and the lower part, respectively, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED board 1061 by a screw inserted through the screw hole 1061b formed in the LED board 1061. Will be done. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw inserted through a screw hole 1062c formed in the upper portion thereof and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d that open in the forward direction in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 109 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. 110 communicate with each other inside the light guide member 1062. Further, in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100, a plurality of openings UD100g penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the vertical direction. As a result, in a state where the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 111, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062, enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, changes the traveling direction from sideways to forward, and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , It is discharged forward from the opening UD100g of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d). The arrow in FIG. 111 indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045. Further, the rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) and the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c are substantially the same in the front-rear direction, and the length of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) in the front-rear direction is the side surface. It is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction in the portion 1045c. Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially in contact with) the rear end of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) are separated from each other. It is positioned on almost the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 so as to have the above-mentioned positional relationship with the peripheral members. Then, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045. As described with reference to FIG. 107, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and the image is not displayed in the portion (the shaded portion in FIG. 107), so that the image stands out. It is possible to give such an impression to the player. In the present embodiment, the portion where the image is displayed and the image are displayed due to the light emitted from the LED 1061a (along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045) from the portion where such an image is not displayed. It is possible to emphasize the boundary with the part that is not covered and give the player the impression that the image is embossed more prominently.

<Mounting the upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the cabinet, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. 115 is a right side view of a cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from below. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 112 shows a state in which the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 113 shows that the hook portion UD120 is attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side projecting member G120 is shown to be removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 114 shows how the hook portion UD120 and the front surface side projecting member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 115 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hooking portion UD120, and the front side projecting member G120 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 115, the hooking portion UD120 and the front surface side projecting member G120 are shown by diagonal lines. FIG. 116 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 117 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are viewed from different directions in a state where the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. is doing. FIG. 118 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the hooking portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b with an open bottom is formed on the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed on a surface orthogonal to the main surface UD120a of the hook portion UD120, and the hook portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. By fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front surface side projecting member G120 is formed by bending the main surface G120a horizontally arranged, the front end central portion G120b formed by bending the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a upward, and the right side of the front end of the main surface G120a upward. The front end of the main surface G120a is upward between the formed front end right side portion G120c, the front end left side portion G120d formed by bending the front end left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end central portion G120b and the front end right side portion G120c. And the left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and backward between the right mounting portion G120e formed by bending backward and the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side portion G120d. And a rear side portion G120g formed by bending the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a downward.

The front end right side portion G120c and the front end left side portion G120d are formed behind the front end central portion G120b, and the heights of the front end central portion G120b, the front end right side portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d are substantially the same. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are formed behind the front end right portion G120c and the front end left portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are set. , The heights thereof are higher than the heights of the central portion G120b at the front end, the right portion G120c at the front end, and the left portion G120d at the front end. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f have horizontally arranged surfaces.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front side projecting member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the front protruding member G120 is fixed to the cabinet G so that the front portion of the main surface UD120a (front end central portion G120b, front end right portion G120c, front end left portion G120d, right). The mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f) project forward from the cabinet G.

On the other hand, on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) is provided so as to project inward. The notch UD120b is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. As a result, the hooking portion UD120 is locked to the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 104). A plurality of downward projecting portions UD100i are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward projecting portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and extends from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h toward the front. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 104) is formed at the rear end of the downward protrusion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 117, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged horizontally in the upper portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 118, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is a downward projecting portion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is in close proximity (substantially in contact) with the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While mounting the lower side surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front surface side projecting member G120, the notch UD120b of the hooking portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the lower protruding portion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. Will be. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G.

In the present embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. When a hinge is provided, the range in which an image can be displayed is limited on the side portion of the gaming machine, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the amount above the hinge is not present. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear end of the curved portion 1045b on both the left and right sides of the transmissive plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 in the left-right direction. Will be possible. This makes it possible to produce a powerful effect with a large screen.

Further, three screens, a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057, are provided, and as in the fourth embodiment, information indicating an image displayed on each screen is combined into one image data. If included (see FIGS. 97 and 98), the image can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 115), but foreign matter enters through the gap. Even in the case where the foreign matter is present, the presence of the front-side protruding member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from invading the inside of the cabinet G.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The second to fifth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the fifth embodiment also applies to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed, as viewed from the front. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of how light is projected from the projector device as viewed from the side.

As shown in FIG. 119, the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G. Similar to the second embodiment (see FIG. 41), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2, and a mirror. It includes a projector cover B1 for accommodating the mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the second embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 45) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 123). .. Similar to the second embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 42).

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is in a posture in which the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so as to be lower in the rear than in the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. Placed above. Since the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32) so that the rear side is lower than the front side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 120). In FIG. 120, the irradiation range of light is shown by diagonal lines. Similar to the fifth embodiment, all the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 100 to 103). The images are incident from the rear (rear side) to each of the screen sheets, and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjustment of the traveling direction of the irradiation light>
FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

As described in the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being exteriorized by the case B22 (see FIG. 47).

Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 48). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c. FIG. 51 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c, but in the present embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (the screw head is on the upper back side). (Like) inserted. The upper pedestal B220 may be attached not to the projector cover B1 but to another member fixed inside the cabinet G.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 47), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing from below. Be done. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape (see FIG. 57) is adopted. The case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), which is an internal component of the projector device B2, an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, and a projector control board B23 is housed on the lower surface of the case B22. (See FIG. 47) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 51, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected by three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 47 and 49). .. As a result, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and are located on the upper side of each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the degree of inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 in the three-dimensional space. Since the details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 52, the description thereof is omitted here.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, it is possible to appropriately adjust the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1, and the projector device B2 can be arranged at an appropriate position. .. Further, the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 can be appropriately adjusted, and the posture of the case B22 (lens unit B21 or the like which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted. It can be appropriate. As described above, the projector device B2 is configured so that the position and the posture in the cabinet G can be changed to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light.

As shown in FIG. 121, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Further, although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 122, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

An angle adjusting hole B111 (see FIG. 44) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 from the upper side (back side). As described in the second embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. As a result, the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to do.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 123 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 125 is a rear view of the gaming machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged view of the periphery of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 129 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine in a state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 123, in a state where the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned so as to face the closing lid G100. Behind the upper pedestal B220, a space is formed in which no other member exists.

Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G. Spaces in which other members do not exist are formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. In FIG. 123, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is shown by diagonal lines.

The irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by fastening screws. As shown in FIG. 122, screw holes B100a to D for inserting screws are formed in the rear portion of the projector cover B1. In a state where the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3, the surface B110a on which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b on which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c on which the screw holes B100c and d are formed are formed. Each abuts on the inner surface (front surface) of the back wall G3. These surfaces B110a to c are formed so as to be separated from each other, whereby the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are open. ing.

As shown in FIG. 124, an operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening in which the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and viewed from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are viewed from the rear. , R3 (particularly nut 2213, see FIG. 52) and the head of the mounting screw T (not shown) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 are visible through the operating window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, the position of the mounting screw T can be moved within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2 can be moved. Can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower part on the back side, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 is seen through the operation window G10. The head of the screw (not shown) inserted through the adjusting hole B111 can also be visually recognized. As a result, the screw can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the screw.

Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 127 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 128 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally forward.

As shown in FIG. 127, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G at the peripheral edge of the opening G10a. The peripheral edge G10b formed so as to have a square-shaped surface at a recessed position with respect to the peripheral surface), the four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, and the outer edge and the back wall of the peripheral edge G10b. It is provided with a connection portion G10d for connecting to the outer surface of the G3. As shown in FIG. 128, the peripheral portion G10b is not visible from the front, but the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3, so that it can be confirmed from the front. It is shown that the screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-shaped member, and has a horizontally long rectangular back surface G100a, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. It includes a portion G100c and a peripheral portion G100d formed so as to face forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and is from the opening G10a of the operation window G10. Is also getting bigger. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operating window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operating window G10 and the closing are used. The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 are overlapped with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw through which the screw hole G10c is inserted from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss portion G100c. Be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Then, the screw for fastening the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), so that the security for the inside of the cabinet G is secured. Can be secured.

In adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 are screwed with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD open. The screw may be released by operating from the front side and turning it appropriately. Thereby, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, mounting inserted into the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G via the opening G10a. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11), the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closing lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d (the length protruding forward of the peripheral edge portion G100d when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b. Is equal to the length up to (height of the boss portion G100c). Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts on the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 is also used for operation. It comes into contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 129 shows how the closing lid G100 is arranged in such a state. In FIG. 129, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the shaded portion indicates the back wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded portion (front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the shaded portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the space S is the above. It corresponds to the "protruding length of the peripheral portion G100d forward" and the "height of the boss portion G100c".

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (front end of the peripheral portion G100d) and the back wall G3 (operation window G10) can be stably attached. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the peripheral portion G10b) and the peripheral portion G10b), and to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed so as to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d, and the peripheral edge portion of the closing lid G100. The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the length of the peripheral portion G100d protruding forward with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially coincides with the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (operation window). It is slightly shorter than the length of the connection portion G10d of the G10 in the front-rear direction). The length of the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 in the front-rear direction and the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction are constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100 forms substantially the same plane as the outer surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outer surface of the back wall G3). It is difficult to visually recognize the existence of the closing lid G100).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for a game is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making adjustments to a projector with the projector mounted inside.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057) and
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjustment part for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting part R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) has a projector (internal component of the projector device B2). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjusting unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21)) Etc.))) is attached to the inside of the housing unit (cabinet G), and the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, upper side) from the outside of the housing unit (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-2) With screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjustment part for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting part R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector and has an opening on the front surface.
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
In addition to the front surface, the main body is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid) capable of closing the opening. G100) is attached,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (internal component of the projector device B2) is provided in the main body (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjusting unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. The adjustment portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) is possible from the outside of the main body portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21)) Etc.))) is still attached to the inside of the main body (cabinet G), and the adjustment part (connecting part R1, R2, R3, upper side of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-3) The gaming machine of the above (10-2).
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body portion (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body portion (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body portion (cabinet G), it is necessary to release the screw from the inside of the main body portion (cabinet G). This makes it possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while ensuring security for the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the outside of the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closing lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing, or it may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body portion (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner surface or outer surface of the back wall G3) of the main body portion (cabinet G) is a cabinet G (cabinet G). It may be formed in a rail shape on the inside or the outside of the back wall G3), and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. When the closing member (closing lid G100) slides on the guide member in the left-right direction (or front-back direction), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed and the opening (operation window) is closed. If the opening G10a) of the G10 is configured to be switched between the open state and the open state, the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside of the main body portion (cabinet G) in the open state, as in the sixth embodiment. In addition, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such an effect, in the present invention, the configuration of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not essential, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is not attached to the main body (cabinet G), and the main body is not attached. The opening provided in (cabinet G) (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to be always open.

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided and closed on any wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, upper surface wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body portion (cabinet G). It can be configured to attach a member (closing lid G100). For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided in the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4, and a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, the adjusting portion (for example, the connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3). The attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4. When the upper surface wall G4 is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a closing member (closing lid G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 36) are provided with the operation window G10, respectively. It may be adopted as the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the above, or separately, a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the operation window G10 is adopted while not forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. It may be that.

Further, openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are opened in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three wall surfaces of the back wall G3, the side wall G2, and the upper surface wall G4) of the main body portion (cabinet G). And a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. For example, an adjusting portion for adjusting the position (attitude) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or a mounting portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) can be operated from the outside by providing an opening G10a for the operation window G10 on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching a closing lid G10, while adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3. The opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided on the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. It may be that.

Further, a plurality of openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are provided on one wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, or upper surface wall G4) of the main body portion (cabinet G), and each opening is provided. A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, an adjusting portion for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or a mounting portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) can be operated from the outside by providing a first opening near the center of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching a first closing lid capable of closing the first opening, while the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror mechanism B3. A second opening is provided above the first opening so that the adjusting portion for adjusting the position (posture) (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. It may be provided and a second closing lid capable of closing the second opening may be attached. When a plurality of openings are provided, closing members capable of individually closing each opening may be attached as many as the number of openings, or only one closing member capable of closing a plurality of openings at the same time may be attached.

When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), in order to facilitate the operation for adjustment, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is opened from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in front. When viewed, the members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 in the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw or the like inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) (FIG. 125). reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, all of the plurality of members can be visually recognized when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). (For example, it is desirable that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged so as to be visible). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) has a diameter larger than the distance between these members (distance between the farthest members). It is good to say. This facilitates adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). Being is not essential. For example, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjustment hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11)). Even if you cannot see the screw inserted in (see FIG. 126), if you can see the member when you look into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) by changing the angle (see FIG. 126). As long as a space is formed between the member and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (screw, nut, etc. for adjustment) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (irradiation) is provided in the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD). It has been described that the control board (main control board MS, sub control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) while the unit B) is housed (see FIG. 40). ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be divided into an upper space and a lower space, and the space in which the projector (illumination unit B) is housed and the control board (main control board MS or sub). It is not necessary to distinguish it from the space in which the control device SS, etc.) is accommodated. For example, the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) may be arranged in the rear space (see FIG. 123) of the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. As a result, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively utilized, and the phenomenon that the heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) is trapped in the lower space can be alleviated. .. The opening / closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) or may be composed of one door.

[7th Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the seventh embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment also applies to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment is limited to, for example, "in the first embodiment" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment". Even if it is described above, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the seventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, even if the description is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments, the pachi-slot according to the seventh embodiment is not deviated from the purpose of the seventh embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to sixth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachi-slot machine 1 has the same shape and the same processing as those of the first to sixth embodiments, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and then is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). Then, all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen 3010 (see FIGS. 132 and 133). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the central screen 3010 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the central screen 3010. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen unit 3000. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the central screen unit 3000 includes a central screen 3010 and a rear translucent plate 3050.

The central screen 3010 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is a screen according to the fourth embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), It has an incident surface on the back surface on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface on the front surface on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The central screen 3010 is made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected. Shows color. The central screen 3010 is formed by three-dimensional molding so as to have rigidity (not flexibility).

The central screen 3010 is continuously formed from the flat surface portion 3011 located at the center and the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 3011 toward the rear, as in the screen sheet 1046 (see FIG. 102) in the fourth embodiment. It is provided with a curved portion 3012. The flat surface portion 3011 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 3012 has a curved flat plate shape as in the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 94) in the fourth embodiment. ing.

The rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is mainly made of transparent polycarbonate and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Like the light-transmitting plate 1045 (see FIG. 102) in the fourth embodiment, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is continuous from the centrally located flat surface portion 3051 and the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 3051 toward the rear. It is provided with a curved portion 3052 formed in the above. The flat surface portion 3051 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 3052 has a curved shape of a flat plate.

The central screen 3010 is arranged on the frontmost surface (outermost surface) of the upper door mechanism UD (pachislot machine 1). As a result, there is no other member between the central screen 3010 and the player. The rear translucent plate 3050 is arranged on the back side of the central screen 3010, and reinforces the central screen 3010 from the back side (cabinet G side). The material of the rear translucent plate 3050 is not particularly limited as long as it can reinforce the central screen 3010, and in addition to polycarbonate, an acrylic plate, a resin such as ABS, a glass plate, or the like is appropriately used. be able to.

Since the rear translucent plate 3050 has translucency, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear translucent plate 3050 and is incident on the incident surface (rear surface) of the central screen 3010. do. As a result, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the central screen 3010. Since there is no structure in front of the central screen 3010 that blocks the player's field of view, when an image is displayed on the central screen 3010, the image becomes visible to the player.

Further, a left side decoration unit 3100L and a right side decoration unit 3100R are provided on the left side portion and the right side portion of the upper door mechanism UD, respectively, and a front top unit 3200 is provided on the upper portion of the upper door mechanism UD. Has been done. Hereinafter, each configuration will be described in more detail.

<Arrangement relationship between the central screen 3010 and the side decoration part 3110>
FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the central screen as viewed from the front. FIG. 135 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the uneven portion on the right side of the central screen. FIG. 136 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decorative unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the side decorative portion is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion as viewed from the front. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion as viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the right side decorative portion. FIG. 141 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the right side decorative portion.

As shown in FIG. 134, on the rear side portion (right side portion) of the curved portion 3012 (right curved portion 3012R) of the central screen 3010, the right side uneven portion 3020R (upper right side uneven portion 3021R, right middle side uneven portion 3022R, And the lower right side uneven portion 3023R) is formed. Further, on the rear side portion (left side portion) of the curved portion 3012 (left curved portion 3012L) of the central screen 3010, the left side uneven portion 3020L (upper left side uneven portion 3021L, left middle side uneven portion 3022L, and left lower side uneven portion 3022L) Part 3023L) is formed.

The central screen 3010 has a symmetrical structure, and the right side uneven portion 3020R and the left side uneven portion 3020L are also symmetrical with each other. Therefore, in the following, the right side uneven portion 3020R (upper right side uneven portion 3021R, right middle side uneven portion 3022R, and lower right side uneven portion 3023R) and left side uneven portion 3020L (upper left side uneven portion 3021L, left middle side uneven portion 3021L) The portion 3022L and the lower left side uneven portion 3023L) may be referred to as a side uneven portion 3020 (upper side uneven portion 3021, middle side uneven portion 3022, and lower side uneven portion 3023).

As shown in FIG. 135, the upper side uneven portion 3021 has a recess 3021a recessed with respect to the surrounding surface and a protrusion 3021b projecting with respect to the recess 3021a. The protrusion 3021b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3021a. Similarly, the middle side uneven portion 3022 has a recess 3022a recessed with respect to the surrounding surface and a protrusion 3022b projecting with respect to the recess 3022a. The protrusion 3022b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3022a. The lower side uneven portion 3023 has a recess 3023a recessed with respect to the surrounding surface and a protrusion 3023b projecting with respect to the recess 3023a. The protrusion 3023b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3023a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 135, the recess 3021a, the recess 3022a, and the recess 3023a are shown in black.

Further, the central screen 3010 has a rear side portion 3013 formed continuously from the rear end of the curved portion 3012 toward the rear. The rear side portion 3013 is formed substantially flat. For clarity, FIG. 135 shows the rear side portion 3013 with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, a right side decorative portion 3110R is arranged along the right curved portion 3012R on the right side of the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010. Similarly, on the left side of the left curved portion 3012L of the central screen 3010, the left side decorative portion 3110L is arranged along the left curved portion 3012L. The right side decoration unit 3110R and the left side decoration unit 3110L are components of the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L (see FIG. 130), respectively. The right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L have symmetrical structures. In the present specification, the right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L are not distinguished and may be referred to as a side decorative portion 3110.

As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the side decorative portion 3110 has an outer portion 3111 and an inner portion 3112. The outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 are each formed in a flat plate shape and are arranged substantially parallel to each other. Further, the side decorative portion 3110 has a bulging portion 3113 (upper bulging portion 3114, middle bulging portion 3115, and lower bulging portion) that bulges from the front portion of the inner portion 3112 toward the side opposite to the outer portion 3111. It has a part 3116).

FIG. 140 shows a state in which the side decorative portion 3110 is cut on a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulging portion 3115. As shown in FIG. 140, the middle bulging portion 3115 has a front side portion 3115a arranged on the front surface side and a bent portion 3115b formed by bending from the side edge of the front side portion 3115a. As a result, a triangular space 3115c surrounded by the inner portion 3112, the front side portion 3115a, and the bent portion 3115b (extended portion) is formed.

FIG. 141 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the side decorative portion 3110 are cut on a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulging portion 3115. For clarity, FIG. 141 shows the central screen 3010 and the side decorations 3110 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled, with the other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. ing. Further, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the side decorative portion 3110 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 141, the inner portion 3112 of the side decorative portion 3110 abuts on the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010, and the bent portion 3115b of the side decorative portion 3110 meets the concave portion 3022a in the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010. It is in contact. As a result, the protrusion 3022b in the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space 3115c of the side decorative portion 3110.

Similarly, although detailed illustration is omitted, the vicinity of the upper bulging portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110 has a structure corresponding to the upper side uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010, and the lower bulge of the side decorative portion 3110. The vicinity of the protruding portion 3116 has a structure corresponding to the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the protrusion 3021b in the upper side uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner portion 3112 and the upper bulging portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110. Further, the protrusion 3023b in the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner portion 3112 and the lower bulging portion 3116 of the side decorative portion 3110.

From the above, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the side decorative portion 3110 is arranged along the curved portion 3012 and the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the side decorative portion 3110 is in a state of covering the rear side portion of the central screen 3010. Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined motif image (an image showing the motif of the pachi-slot machine 1) is displayed on the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. The motif image is an image corresponding to a pillar (pillar image), and the size of the pillar image corresponds to the size of the curved portion 3012. Due to the shape of the curved portion 3012, the pillar image will have a three-dimensional appearance. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that a pillar having the same size and curvature as the size and curvature of the curved portion 3012 actually exists, and the side decorative portion 3110 rides on the pillar. You can make it look like you are. Further, it is possible to give the player the impression that the decoration of the side decoration portion 3110 (bulging portion 3113, etc.) is directly applied to the pillar. Since there is no other member between the player and the central screen 3010, the pillar can be directly touched by the player. Further, the image displayed on the rear side portion of the central screen 3010 may appear distorted to the player, but the side decoration portion 3110 covers the portion, so that the distorted image may be blindfolded. It is possible, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the image from being deteriorated.

<Side decoration unit 3100>
FIG. 142 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the side LED substrate and the light guide. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the side LED substrate and the light guide. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the side LED and the light guide. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the light guide and the side light lens. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the side light lens as viewed from the rear. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the side light lens. FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of a side light lens. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate, the light guide, and the side light lens. FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the side decorative portion. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the side decoration portion and the side light lens. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plate. FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side light-shielding plate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side LED board cover is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157.

As shown in FIG. 142, the right side decorative unit 3100R is disposed on the right side portion of the central screen 3010, and the left side decorative unit 3100L is disposed on the left side portion of the central screen 3010. The right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L have a symmetrical structure. In this specification, the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L are not distinguished and may be referred to as a side decoration unit 3100.

As shown in FIG. 143, the side decoration unit 3100 includes a side decoration unit 3110, a side LED substrate 3120, a light guide 3130, and a side light lens 3140. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 143, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 and the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 are shaded, and the cut surface of the side decorative portion 3110 and the cut surface of the side LED substrate 3120 are shown in black. , The cut surface of the light guide 3130 and the cut surface of the side light lens 3140 are shown by diagonal lines.

In FIG. 144, the side LED substrate 3120 and the light guide 3130 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are shown by removing other components while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, a plurality of side LEDs 3122 are provided on the surface 3121 of the side LED substrate 3120. Specifically, two side LEDs 3122a, two side LEDs 3122b, two side LEDs 3122c, two side LEDs 3122d, two side LEDs 3122e, two side LEDs 3122f, and two side LEDs 3122g are provided. The side LED 3122 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction (generally to the right) of the substrate surface. Further, the side LED 3122 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green.

The light guide 3130 includes a first light guide unit 3131, a second light guide unit 3132, a third light guide unit 3133, a fourth light guide unit 3134, a fifth light guide unit 3135, a sixth light guide unit 3136, and a third light guide unit. 7 The light guide unit 3137 is provided, and these have a structure in which they are sequentially connected. Further, the light guide 3130 is made of a material having a high light transmittance (for example, about 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%) (for example, a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate).

The first light guide portion 3131 has a base portion 3131a, an upper branch portion 3131b branched from the rear end of the base portion 3131a, and a lower branch portion 3131c. Similarly, the second light guide portion 3132 has a base portion 3132a, an upper branch portion 3132b branched from the rear end of the base portion 3132a, and a lower branch portion 3132c. The third light guide portion 3133 has a base portion 3133a, an upper branch portion 3133b branched from the rear end of the base portion 3133a, and a lower branch portion 3133c. The fourth light guide portion 3134 has a base portion 3134a, an upper branch portion 3134b branched from the base portion 3134a, and a lower branch portion 3134c. The fifth light guide portion 3135 has a base portion 3135a, an upper branch portion 3135b branched from the base portion 3135a, and a lower branch portion 3135c. The sixth light guide portion 3136 has a base portion 3136a, an upper branch portion 3136b branched from the base portion 3136a, and a lower branch portion 3136c. The seventh light guide portion 3137 has a base portion 3137a, an upper branch portion 3137b branched from the base portion 3137a, and a lower branch portion 3137c.

As shown in FIG. 144, the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c in the first light guide unit 3131 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122a, respectively. Similarly, the upper branch portion 3132b and the lower branch portion 3132c of the second light guide unit 3132 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122b, respectively. The upper branch portion 3133b and the lower branch portion 3133c of the third light guide unit 3133 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122c, respectively. The upper branch portion 3134b and the lower branch portion 3134c in the fourth light guide unit 3134 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122d, respectively. The upper branch portion 3135b and the lower branch portion 3135c in the fifth light guide portion 3135 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122e, respectively. The upper branch portion 3136b and the lower branch portion 3136c in the sixth light guide unit 3136 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122f, respectively. The upper branch portion 3137b and the lower branch portion 3137c in the seventh light guide portion 3137 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122 g, respectively.

As a result, the light emitted from the side LED 3122a is incident on the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c. As shown in FIG. 146, the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c are bent with respect to the base portion 3131a. As a result, the light incident on the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c changes the traveling direction forward inside the first light guide portion 3131 and reaches the front surface 3131d of the base portion 3131a. Similarly, the light emitted from the side LED 3122b reaches the front surface 3132d of the base portion 3132a in the second light guide portion 3132. The light emitted from the side LED 3122c reaches the front surface 3133d of the base portion 3133a in the third light guide portion 3133. The light emitted from the side LED 3122d reaches the front surface 3134d of the base portion 3134a in the fourth light guide portion 3134. The light emitted from the side LED 3122e reaches the front surface 3135d of the base portion 3135a in the fifth light guide portion 3135. The light emitted from the side LED 3122f reaches the front surface 3136d of the base portion 3136a in the sixth light guide portion 3136. The light emitted from the side LED 3122g reaches the front surface 3137d of the base portion 3137a in the seventh light guide portion 3137.

For clarity, FIG. 146 shows the side LEDs 3122a-3122g and the light guide 3130 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled, with the other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. ing. Further, the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the substrate portions 3131a to 3137a are shown by diagonal lines. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d are formed as substantially flat surfaces in the vertical direction, and the normal direction thereof is the front direction.

In FIG. 147, the light guide 3130 and the side light lens 3140 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are shown by removing other components while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the side light lens 3140 has a first light guide unit 3141, a second light guide unit 3142, a third light guide unit 3143, a fourth light guide unit 3144, and a fifth light guide unit 3145. , A sixth light guide unit 3146 and a seventh light guide unit 3147 are provided, and these have a structure in which they are sequentially connected. The side light lens 3140 is made of a translucent material.

FIG. 149 shows a state in which the side light lens 3140 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the first light guide unit 3141. FIG. 150 shows a state in which the side light lens 3140 is cut on a horizontal plane passing through the second light guide unit 3142.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first light guide portion 3141 has a rear projection portion 3141a formed in a plate shape and projecting rearward, and a front projection portion formed so as to continuously project forward from the rear projection portion 3141a. It has a portion 3141b and. Similarly, the fourth light guide portion 3144 includes a rear projecting portion 3144a formed in a plate shape and projecting rearward, and a front projecting portion 3144b formed so as to continuously project forward from the rear projecting portion 3144a. have. The seventh light guide portion 3147 has a rear projecting portion 3147a formed in a plate shape and projecting rearward, and a front projecting portion 3147b formed so as to continuously project forward from the rear projecting portion 3147a. ing.

As shown in FIG. 150, the second light guide portion 3142 is forward via a rear protruding portion 3142a formed in a plate shape and projecting rearward and a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protruding portion 3142a. It has a right front protrusion 3142b and a left front protrusion 3142c that protrude. Similarly, the third light guide portion 3143 has a rear protruding portion 3143a formed in a plate shape and projecting rearward, and a right front projecting forward via a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protruding portion 3143a. It has a protrusion 3143b and a left front protrusion 3143c. The fifth light guide portion 3145 has a rear protruding portion 3145a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right front protruding portion 3145b protruding forward via a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protruding portion 3145a. And a left front protrusion 3145c. The sixth light guide portion 3146 has a rear protruding portion 3146a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right front protruding portion 3146b protruding forward via a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protruding portion 3146a. And a left front protrusion 3146c.

In FIG. 148, the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the rear protruding portions 3141a to 3147a in the first light guide unit 3141 to the seventh light guide unit 3147 are shown by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 147, the rear end faces 3141d to 3147d of the first light guide section 3141 to the seventh light guide section 3147 of the side light lens 3140 are the first light guide section 3131 to the seventh light guide of the light guide 3130, respectively. It is arranged so as to face the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the portion 3137.

In FIG. 151, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, the light guide 3130, and the side light lens 3140 in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are provided with other components while maintaining their relative positional relationships. It is deleted and shown. As shown in FIG. 151, a rear side portion 3053 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 is arranged between the light guide 3130 and the side light lens 3140 (see FIG. 143). The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the first light guide section 3131 to the seventh light guide section 3137 of the light guide 3130 are substantially in contact with the back surface of the rear side portion 3053 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050. The rear end faces 3141d to 3147d of the first light guide section 3141 to the seventh light guide section 3147 of the side light lens 3140 are substantially in contact with the front surface side surface of the rear side portion 3053 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050.

Here, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is made of a material having a high light transmittance (for example, about 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%) (for example, a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate). ing. Therefore, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122 to 3122g and reaching the front surface 3131d to 3137d of the light guide 3130 is incident on the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the side light lens 3140. The rear side portion 3053 of the rear side translucent plate 3050 is a portion formed into a flat plate shape by bending the rear end of the rear side translucent plate 3050.

The light incident on the rear end surface 3141d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the first light guide portion 3141 and reaches the front protruding portion 3141b. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3144d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the fourth light guide portion 3144 and reaches the front protruding portion 3144b. The light incident on the rear end surface 3147d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the seventh light guide portion 3147 and reaches the front protruding portion 3147b.

Further, the light incident on the rear end surface 3142d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the second light guide portion 3142 and reaches the right front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3143d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the third light guide portion 3143 and reaches the right front protrusion portion 3143b and the left front protrusion portion 3143c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3145d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the fifth light guide portion 3145 and reaches the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3146d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the sixth light guide portion 3146 and reaches the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c.

As shown in FIG. 152, the side decorative portion 3110 has a light emitting opening 3117 (first light emitting opening 3117a, second light emitting opening 3117b, third light emitting opening 3117c, first) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The 4 light emitting openings 3117d, the 5th light emitting opening 3117e, the 6th light emitting opening 3117f, and the 7th light emitting opening 3117g) are formed. The first light emitting opening 3117a, the fourth light emitting opening 3117d, and the seventh light emitting opening 3117g are each provided with one opening, and the second light emitting opening 3117b and the third light are provided. The emission opening 3117c, the fifth light emission opening 3117e, and the sixth light emission opening 3117f are each provided with two openings.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 152, the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g are shown by diagonal lines. The side decoration portion 3110 has a structure that protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the first light emitting opening 3117a, the peripheral edge of the fourth light emitting opening 3117d, and the peripheral edge of the seventh light emitting opening 3117g. , These protruding structures are formed so as to be continuous with the upper bulging portion 3114, the middle bulging portion 3115, and the lower bulging portion 3116, respectively.

The shapes of the first light emitting opening 3117a, the fourth light emitting opening 3117d, and the seventh light emitting opening 3117g are the front protrusion 3141b, the front protrusion 3144b, and the front protrusion of the side light lens 3140, respectively. It corresponds to the shape of the portion 3147b. The shapes of the two second light emitting openings 3117b, the two third light emitting openings 3117c, the two fifth light emitting openings 3117e, and the two sixth light emitting openings 3117f are on the right side, respectively. Shapes of the front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c, the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c, and the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c. It corresponds to.

The side light lens 3140 is arranged between the outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 (see FIG. 139) in the side decoration portion 3110. As shown in FIG. 153, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front protrusion 3141b, the right front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion of the side light lens 3140 are assembled. 3143c, front protrusion 3144b, right front protrusion 3145b and left front protrusion 3145c, right front protrusion 3146b and left front protrusion 3146c, and front protrusion 3147b, respectively, are openings for light emission of the side decoration portion 3110. It fits into 3117a to 3117g, and these protrusions close the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g. From the above, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g is emitted from the side light lens 3140 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g. The front end faces of these protrusions are textured so that the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g shine evenly.

As shown in FIG. 154, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, a side shading plate 3150 is arranged between the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 and the rear side portion 3053 of the rear translucent plate 3050. It is set up. As shown in FIG. 155, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end of the central screen 3010 is positioned in front of the rear end of the rear translucent plate 3050, and the rear translucent plate 3050 is positioned. The rear part is not covered by the central screen 3010 and is exposed. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 155 shows the exposed portion (exposed portion 3054) with diagonal lines. The side shading plate 3150 is arranged so as to cover the exposed portion 3054.

The side light-shielding plate 3150 has a light-shielding property so as to block the passage of light. The side light-shielding plate 3150 is made of polycarbonate or the like and is colored black. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side shading plate 3150 is shown by diagonal lines. By disposing the side shading plate 3150, it is possible to prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from passing through the exposed portion 3054 of the rear translucent plate 3050 and invading the side light lens 3140. It has become like.

The upper end of the side light-shielding plate 3150 is slightly lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, and the upper portion of the exposed portion 3054 is not covered by the side light-shielding plate 3150 and is still exposed. However, the upper end of the side light lens 3140 is also lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 (which is substantially the same height as the side light-shielding plate 3150), and is projected from the projector 9020 via the exposed portion. The emitted light does not enter the side light lens 3140.

Further, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side LED board cover 3160 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the shielding wall member 3300 is shown by shading. A side LED board 3120 is installed on the side LED board cover 3160. As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the side LED board cover 3160 is arranged on the side of the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130, and together with the side decoration portion 3110 and the key receiving member 3320, the upper door mechanism UD (pachislot machine) is arranged. It constitutes the outermost surface of the machine 1). The shielding wall member 3300 will be described in detail later.

<Shielding wall member 3300>
FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the front. FIG. 160 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shield wall member around the left side portion. FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the harness protector for the speaker are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment as viewed from above. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in another embodiment as viewed from above. FIG. 165 is a front view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shielding wall member and the light guide.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 the shielding wall member 3300 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical and has a rectangular annular shape with an opening in the center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 3300 includes a lower side portion 3302, a left side portion 3303, a right side portion 3304, and an upper portion 3305 arranged around the light passage opening 3301.

The lower side portion 3302 has a lower side surface 3302a. The lower side surface 3302a constitutes an upper surface (a surface facing the light passage opening 3301) of the lower side portion 3302, and is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Although not shown, the lower side surface 3302a is textured to form fine irregularities. The wrinkle processing is a processing in which a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as a light diffusion treatment. In the present specification, the shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by the grain processing is not particularly limited, and is a pattern such as satin finish, wood grain, rock grain, sand grain, cloth grain / silk grain, geometric pattern, or parallel. It is possible to appropriately form a pattern or the like in which thin lines are lined up at equal intervals.

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 includes a first left inner wall surface 3303a, a second left side inner wall surface 3303b, a third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and a fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d. The first left inner wall surface 3303a, the second left side inner wall surface 3303b, the third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and the fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d refer to the right side surface (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301) of the left side portion 3303. It is configured and is formed in the substantially vertical direction. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 160 shows a state in which the left side portion 3303 is cut in a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 3303a is continuously formed from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 3303 toward the diagonally rearward direction. The second left inner wall surface 3303b is continuously formed from the rear end (right end) of the first left side inner wall surface 3303a toward the rear with a steeper inclination than the first left side inner wall surface 3303a. The third left inner wall surface 3303c is continuously formed from the rear end of the second left side inner wall surface 3303b toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left side inner wall surface 3303a and a gentle slope than the second left side inner wall surface 3303b. Has been done. The fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is continuously formed from the rear end of the third left inner wall surface 3303c toward the rear with a steeper inclination than the second left inner wall surface 3303b.

Further, the left side portion 3303 has a left side rear end portion 3303e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 3303f of the left rear end portion 3303e is continuously formed from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d toward the right side. The front surface 3303f and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d are substantially orthogonal to each other. The length of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d becomes shorter in the front-rear direction toward the upper side, and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is not formed on the upper part of the left side portion 3303, and the left rear end portion is formed. The front surface 3303f of the 3303e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 3303c.

Similarly, although detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 3304 includes a first right inner wall surface 3304a, a second right side inner wall surface 3304b, a third right side inner wall surface 3304c, a fourth right side inner wall surface 3304d, and a right rear end portion. It is equipped with 3304e. The first right inner wall surface 3304a, the second right side inner wall surface 3304b, the third right side inner wall surface 3304c, the fourth right side inner wall surface 3304d, and the right rear end portion 3304e are the first left side inner wall surface 3303a and the second left side inner wall surface, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 3303b, the third left inner wall surface 3303c, the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d, and the left rear end portion 3303e.

The left rear end portion 3303e and the right rear end portion 3304e are each formed in a substantially vertical direction. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 161, the back surface 3303 g of the left rear end portion 3303e and the back surface 3304 g of the right rear end portion 3304e are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the lower portion 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged above the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331. As a result, the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331 are substantially completely covered by the lower side portion 3302 (lower side surface 3302a). The position in the front-rear direction on the front end edge 3302b of the lower portion 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 substantially coincides with the position in the front-rear direction on the rear end edge of the lower portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050. That is, the front end edge 3302b of the lower side portion 3302 substantially coincides with the rear end edge of the lower side portion 3055 in a plan view, and the lower side portion 3302 and the lower side portion 3055 are arranged without any gap. The lower portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050 is continuously formed from the lower ends of the flat surface portion 3051 and the curved portion 3052 toward the rear, and is arranged substantially horizontally.

The right side portion 3304 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the left side of the right side LED substrate 3120R and the right side key receiving member 3320R. As a result, the right side LED substrate 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R have the right side portion 3304 (first right inner wall surface 3304a, second right inner wall surface 3304b, third right side inner wall surface 3304c, and fourth right side inner wall surface 3304d). Almost completely covered by.

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 3303 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the right side of the left side LED substrate 3120L and the left side key receiving member 3320L. As a result, the left side LED substrate 3120L and the left side key receiving member 3320L have the left side portion 3303 (first left inner wall surface 3303a, second left side inner wall surface 3303b, third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d). Almost completely covered by.

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 (light reflected by the mirror 9030) travels forward (the side on which the central screen 3010 is arranged) (see FIG. 99). In FIG. 164, the irradiation range of such light is shown by diagonal lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 3301 of the shielding wall member 3300 and reaches the central screen 3010. On the other hand, a part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the left side portion 3303 (the right side portion of the left rear end portion 3303e) and the right side portion 3304 (the left portion of the right rear end portion 3304e) of the shielding wall member 3300. do. Since the shielding wall member 3300 does not have translucency, the light cannot pass through the left side portion 3303 and the right side portion 3304 and is reflected by the left side portion 3303 and the right side portion 3304, so that the central screen It does not reach 3010.

On the other hand, the other embodiment shown in FIG. 164 (b) has the same configuration as the present embodiment except that the shielding wall member 3300 is not provided. In this embodiment, the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164 (b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164 (a) because the progress of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is not hindered by the shielding wall member 3300. It has become. Specifically, in FIG. 164 (a), the region I and the region II are not the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 164 (b), the region I and the region II are the irradiation range. Regions I and II are regions located on the periphery of the central screen 3010 in front view.

The left side LED substrate 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L are arranged in the area I. Further, in the area II, the right side LED substrate 3120R and the right side key receiving member 3320R are arranged. Therefore, in another embodiment, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left side LED substrate 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L, and the right side LED substrate 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R. A situation may occur in which the reflected light is incident on the central screen 3010. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the region I and the region II are not included in the irradiation range, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is the left side LED substrate 3120L, the left key receiving member 3320L, and the right. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the light is reflected by the side LED substrate 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R (the reflected light is incident on the central screen 3010).

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 has a left side front end portion 3303h formed by slightly bending the front end to the left. Similarly, the right side portion 3304 has a right side front end portion 3304h formed by slightly bending the front end to the right. As shown in FIG. 165, the left front end portion 3303h and the right front end portion 3304h have a light guide opening 3306 (first light guide opening 3306a, second light guide opening 3306b, third light guide) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 3306c, the opening for the fourth light guide 3306d, the opening for the fifth light guide 3306e, the opening for the sixth light guide 3306f, and the opening for the seventh light guide 3306g) are formed.

The light guide openings 3306a to 3306g have a shape in front view slightly larger than that of the base portions 3131a to 3137a in the first light guide portions 3131 to 7 light guide portions 3137 of the light guide 3130. As shown in FIG. 166, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g have the base portions in the first light guide portion 3131 to the seventh light guide portion 3137 of the light guide 3130, respectively. The front portion of 3131a to 3137a is inserted. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the substrate portions 3131a to 3137a are positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface 3304i (front surface 3303i) of the right front end portion 3304h (left front end portion 3303h). As a result, the light transmitted through the light guide 3130 travels from the light guide 3130 to the side light lens 3140 via the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g.

<Formation of air flow path>
FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 169 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front / rear frame and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in FIG. 168. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. FIG. 171 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the front. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the rear and from below. FIG. 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. 174 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. FIG. 176 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 167, a right side ventilation opening 3307R and a left side ventilation opening 3307L are formed in the upper portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300. The right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L are each formed so that air can pass in the front-rear direction. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 167, the right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L are shown by diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168, the top frame base 3210 has an upper surface wall 3211. The top frame base 3210 is a component of the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130), and is a member constituting the skeleton of the front top unit 3200. A plurality of right vents 3212R and left left vents 3212L are formed on the upper wall 3211. The top frame base 3210 is made of polycarbonate or the like and has a symmetrical structure. The top frame base 3210 is colored black by mixing a pigment or a dye with a resin material and coloring the resin material before molding. As a result, the top frame base 3210 does not transmit light.

An upper front and rear frame 3230 is arranged below the top frame base 3210. As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the upper front and rear frame 3230 has a structure in which the right side portion 3230R and the left side portion 3230L are connected by the central portion 3230C. The right side portion 3230R is formed with a right side opening 3231R that is open upward and a right side opening 3232R that is open toward the rear. The left side portion 3230L is formed with a left side opening 3231L that is open upward and a left side opening 3323L that is open toward the rear.

The right opening 3231R and the right opening 3232R communicate with each other via the right cavity 3233R formed inside the right side portion 3230R, and the left side opening 3231L and the left side opening 3232L are the left side formed inside the left side portion 3230L. It communicates through the cavity 3233L. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 170, the opening 3231 (right side opening 3231R and left side opening 3231L) and the opening 3232 (right side opening 3232R and left side opening 3232L) are shown by diagonal lines.

A duct seal 3240 (right side duct seal 3240R and left side duct seal 3240L) is arranged between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front and rear frame 3230. The right side duct seal 3240R and the left side duct seal 3240L each have a rectangular shape with a large opening in the center, and are arranged along the peripheral edges of the right side opening 3231R and the left side opening 3231L in the upper front and rear frame 3230. As the duct seal 3240, a cushioning member (for example, rubber packing) capable of sealing between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front / rear frame 3230 can be appropriately adopted.

Here, the right vent 3212R and the left vent 3212L of the top frame base 3210 communicate with the right cavity 3233R and the left cavity 3233L via the right opening 3231R and the left opening 3231L of the upper front and rear frames 3230, respectively. The right side cavity 3233R and the left side cavity 3233L communicate with the right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L of the shielding wall member 3300 via the right side opening 3232R and the left side opening 3232L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through, for example, the left vent 3212L, the left cavity 3233L, and the left ventilation opening 3307L. This air enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57). The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the right while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). The air exiting the case B22 is discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the right side ventilation opening 3307R, the right side cavity 3233R, and the right side ventilation port 3212R.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In the second embodiment, it has been described that the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, a frame base engaging groove 3234 (frame base engaging groove 3234R and frame base engaging groove 3234L) is formed in the central portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230. The frame base engaging groove 3234 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction as a recess recessed from the surrounding surface. The frame base engaging groove 3234R and the frame base engaging groove 3234L have substantially the same configuration and are provided so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 171, the frame base engaging groove 3234 is composed of a groove bottom portion 3234a, and a left side wall surface 3234b and a right side wall surface 3234c connecting the groove bottom portion 3234a and the surrounding surface. The frame base engaging groove 3234 is formed from the front end to the rear of the central portion 3230C, but the rear end of the frame base engaging groove 3234 is positioned in front of the rear end of the central portion 3230C. As a result, the left and right sides of the frame base engaging groove 3234 (groove left side portion 3235 and groove right side portion 3236) are connected by the rear portion of the frame base engaging groove 3234 (groove rear side portion 3237).

Further, at the rear end of the frame base engaging groove 3234, a groove rear opening 3234d opened toward the rear is formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 171 the left side wall surface 3234b of the frame base engaging groove 3234L is shown in black, and the groove rear opening 3234d of the frame base engaging groove 3234R is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 172, front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 (front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213R and front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213L) are formed on the lower surface 3211a of the upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210. The front-rear frame engaging protrusion 3213 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction as a convex portion protruding from the surrounding surface. The front-rear frame engaging protrusions 3213R and the front-rear frame engaging protrusions 3213L have substantially the same configuration and are provided so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

The distance between the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213R and the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213L is substantially the same as the distance between the frame base engaging groove 3234R and the frame base engaging groove 3234L in the upper front / rear frame 3230. Further, the sizes of the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213R and the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213L are slightly smaller than the frame base engaging grooves 3234R and the frame base engaging grooves 3234L.

As shown in FIG. 173, the front-rear frame engaging projection 3213 has a front-rear frame engaging claw 3213a. The front-rear frame engaging claw 3213a is formed by projecting the lower portion thereof rearward at the rear end of the front-rear frame engaging protrusion 3213. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 173, the side surface of the front / rear frame engaging protrusion 3213 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 174, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front / rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 project rearward from the groove rear opening 3234d of the upper front / rear frame 3230. It should be noted that, of the lower surface of the central portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230, the portion where the frame base engaging groove 3234 is formed is downward corresponding to the recess of the frame base engaging groove 3234. A structure 3238 protruding in the shape of a figure is formed.

In FIG. 175, the top frame base 3210 and the upper front-rear frame 3230 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through the front-rear frame engaging protrusion 3213R and the frame base engaging groove 3234R). It shows the situation. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 175, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the upper front and rear frames 3230 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 175, the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213R and the front / rear frame engaging protrusions 3213L of the top frame base 3210 are inserted into the frame base engaging grooves 3234R and the frame base engaging grooves 3234L of the upper front / rear frame 3230, respectively. ing. In this state, the front / rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 are positioned below the groove rear side portion 3237 in the upper front / rear frame 3230.

The upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 is formed in a flat plate shape and basically does not have a structure serving as a support column, so that sufficient strength is not ensured. In this regard, if the front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 are slid along the frame base engaging groove 3234, the top frame base 3210 can be easily attached to the upper front and rear frame 3230, and the top frame base 3210 can be easily attached. Can be prevented from being damaged. After mounting, the top frame base 3210 can be supported by the upper front and rear frames 3230 to prevent the upper surface wall 3211 from bending.

As shown in FIG. 167, the boundary portion (upper right corner portion 3310R) between the right side portion 3304 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 has a structure that bulges toward the light passage opening 3301. A speaker opening 3311 is formed in the upper right corner portion 3310R. For the sake of clarity, the speaker opening 3311 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 167.

Below the speaker opening 3311, a speaker inclined portion 3312 having an inclination so as to descend toward the rear is provided. As a result, a harness placement space 3313 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 3312. As shown in FIG. 176, a harness 3314 for connecting to the speaker 3410 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 3313. The harness 3314 is connected to the speaker 3410 via the speaker opening 3311. FIG. 176 shows that a part of the speaker 3410 is exposed through the speaker opening 3311.

A speaker harness protector 3315 is arranged on the back side of the speaker opening 3311. The speaker harness protector 3315 has a structure in which a predetermined step is formed by a surface in a front-rear direction and a surface in a vertical direction. As a result, the harness arrangement space 3313 is closed by the speaker harness protector 3315, and the harness 3314 is surrounded by the wall portion composed of the speaker inclined portion 3312 and the speaker harness protector 3315.

Similarly, a speaker opening 3311 and a speaker inclined portion 3312 are formed at the boundary portion (upper left corner portion 3310L) between the left side portion 3303 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300. Since the upper left corner portion 3310L has a structure symmetrical to the upper right corner portion 3310R, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 176, the speaker harness protector 3315 on the back side of the upper right corner 3310R is removed, while the speaker harness protector 3315 on the back side of the upper left corner 3310L is attached.

<Image reflection on top frame base 3210>
FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the front. FIG. 178 is a bottom view of the top frame base. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from slightly below. FIG. 180 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. FIG. 181 is a schematic view of the flat surface portion of the central screen and the lower surface wall of the top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 177, the top frame base 3210 includes a bottom wall 3214. The lower surface wall 3214 is formed in a flat plate shape and is substantially parallel to the upper surface wall 3211. The upper surface wall 3211 and the lower surface wall 3214 are arranged substantially horizontally. For the sake of clarity, the lower wall 3214 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 177.

As shown in FIG. 178, the lower surface 3215 of the lower surface wall 3214 has an image reflecting surface 3216 and a decorative surface 3217. The image reflecting surface 3216 has an arc shape (a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc). The image reflecting surface 3216 is not subjected to embossing or the like except for the pattern 3216a formed as a concave groove, and is a substantially flat and smooth surface as a whole. The decorative surface 3217 is a portion surrounding the image reflecting surface 3216, and is entirely decorated with unevenness.

The image reflecting surface 3216 can reflect light by applying a reflective paint. As conventionally known, the reflective paint is composed of a transparent paint and glass beads, and has a strong reflective performance. As the transparent paint, any paint (for example, the same resin material as the light-shielding paint described later) can be used. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating can be adopted. The reflective paint contains a black pigment (eg, carbon black), and the image reflective surface 3216 has a black appearance. The color of the image reflecting surface 3216 is not particularly limited and can be painted in any color.

As shown in FIG. 179, when the upper door mechanism UD is looked up from below (when viewed from the player's point of view), the image reflecting surface 3216 comes into view. FIG. 180 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the image reflecting surface 3216). ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 180, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat surface portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (bottom wall 3214) is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end edge 3214a (the portion corresponding to the string in the bow shape) in the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is the front surface of the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010. It is substantially in contact with the side surface (display surface 3011a). The display surface 3011a of the central screen 3010 and the image reflection surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 are arranged so as to be substantially orthogonal to each other. As a result, the image reflecting surface 3216 is a surface that is continuous from the upper part (slightly below the upper end) of the display surface 3011a toward the front.

FIG. 181 schematically shows the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is looked up from below. Further, in this schematic diagram, a semicircular image (semicircular image 3011b) is displayed on the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010. The semicircular image 3011b is an image projected by the projector 9020.

Here, as described above, the reflected image 3216a is displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 because the image reflecting surface 3216 can reflect light. The reflected image 3216a has a line-symmetrical graphic shape (semicircular shape) with the contact portion with the image reflecting surface 3216 on the central screen 3010 (the lower end of the trailing edge 3214a on the lower surface wall 3214) as the axis of symmetry. .. Therefore, by showing the semicircle image 3011b and the reflection image 3216a to the player, the circle can be perceived as if it were displayed. In FIG. 181, the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a are shown by diagonal lines, respectively.

<Arrangement relationship between the center screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210>
FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the central screen as viewed from the front and the bottom. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the central screen as viewed from the rear and from below. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the central screen as viewed from rear and above. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the rear and from below. FIG. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185. 187 to 189 are cross-sectional views of the central screen and top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 182, the central screen 3010 has a front upper end portion 3015 formed so as to project forward from the upper end of the front surface 3014. The front surface 3014 is composed of a front surface (display surface 3011a) of the flat surface portion 3011 and a front surface side surface 3012a of the curved portion 3012. The front upper end portion 3015 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014.

Specifically, the front upper end portion 3015 has a central portion 3015a, a first left side portion 3015b, a second left side portion 3015c, a first right side portion 3015d, and a second right side portion 3015e. The central portion 3015a is formed substantially horizontally in the center of the central screen 3010. The first left side portion 3015b is continuously formed from the left end of the central portion 3015 toward the lower left. The second left side portion 3015c is continuously formed from the left end of the first left side portion 3015b toward the left side. The first right side portion 3015d is continuously formed from the right end of the central portion 3015a toward the lower right. The second right side portion 3015e is continuously formed from the right end to the right side of the first right side portion 3015d. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 182, the lower surface 3015f of the front upper end portion 3015 is shown in black.

A through hole 3016L is formed in the vicinity of the first left side portion 3015b, and a through hole 3016R is formed in the vicinity of the first right side portion 3015d. The through hole 3016 (through hole 3016L and through hole 3016R) is formed so as to penetrate the central screen 3010 in the front-rear direction. Further, the central screen 3010 has a front lower end portion 3017 formed so as to project forward from the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface 3014. The front lower end portion 3017 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014, similarly to the front upper end portion 3015.

As shown in FIG. 183, the central screen 3010 has a rear upper end portion 3019 formed so as to project rearward from the upper end of the back surface 3018. The back surface 3018 is composed of a front surface on the back surface side of the flat surface portion 3011 and a surface surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 3012. The rear upper end portion 3019 is formed substantially perpendicular to the back surface 3018. Specifically, the rear upper end portion 3019 has a left side portion 3019a and a right side portion 3019b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 183, the lower surface 3019c of the rear upper end portion 3019 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper surface 3019d of the left side portion 3019a is continuous with the upper surface of the first left side portion 3015b and the upper surface of the second left side portion 3015c, and these surfaces are integrated. Similarly, the upper surface 3019e of the right side portion 3019b is continuous with the upper surface of the first right side portion 3015d and the upper surface of the second right side portion 3015e, and these surfaces are integrated. Further, the central screen 3010 has a rear lower end portion 3020 formed so as to project rearward from the lower end of the back surface 3018. The rear lower end portion 3020 is formed substantially perpendicular to the back surface 3018, similarly to the rear upper end portion 3019.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the top frame base 3210 is formed with a sound emitting opening 3218 (sound emitting opening 3218L and sound emitting opening 3218R). Further, a screen contact portion 3219 is formed on the top frame base 3210. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 185, the sound emitting opening 3218L and the sound emitting opening 3218R are shown by diagonal lines. Further, in FIG. 186, the screen contact portion 3219 is shown in black.

A part of the screen contact portion 3219 is the rear end edge 3214a of the lower surface wall 3214, and the screen contact portion 3219 is from the rear end edge 3214a (screen contact portion 3219C) and the left end of the rear end edge 3214a. A portion continuously formed toward the left (screen contact portion 3219L) and a portion continuously formed toward the right from the right end of the rear end edge 3214a (screen contact portion 3219R). It is composed.

A boss portion 3220L is formed in the lower right portion around the sound emitting opening 3218L so as to project rearward from the screen contact portion 3219L. Similarly, a boss portion 3220R is formed in the lower left portion around the sound emitting opening 3218R so as to project rearward from the screen contact portion 3219R. Further, in the vicinity of the boss portion 3220 (boss portion 3220L and boss portion 3220R), screw holes 3221 (screw holes 3221L and screw holes 3221R) penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed.

In FIG. 187, the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010). It shows the situation. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 187, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat surface portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (bottom wall 3214) is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 187, the screen contact portion 3219C (rear end edge 3214a) of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219C is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (central portion 3015a) of the central screen 3010.

FIG. 188 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 188, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (right curved portion 3012R) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 188, the screen contact portion 3219R of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219R is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010. Similarly, although not shown, the screen contact portion 3219L of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219L is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second left side portion 3015c) of the central screen 3010.

As described above, the screen contact portion 3219 (screen contact portion 3219L, screen contact portion 3219C, and screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210 substantially corresponds to the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. I'm in contact. Above the screen contact portion 3219, the front upper end portion 3015 of the central screen 3010 (central portion 3015a, first left side portion 3015b, second left side portion 3015c, first right side portion 3015d, and second right side portion 3015e). ) Is arranged. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the screen contact portion 3219 of the top frame base 3210 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if an attempt is made to allow a wire-shaped instrument to enter through the gap. , The front upper end portion 3015 becomes an obstacle so that the intrusion can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto act from being performed through the gap.

In FIG. 189, the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are vertically faced in the front-rear direction (the surface passing through the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows the state of disconnection. For clarity, in FIG. 189, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in black, and the rear upper end 3019 (left side 3019a) and front upper end 3015 of the center screen 3010. The upper surface of (second left side portion 3015c) is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 189, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap each other. As a result, the boss portion 3220L is inserted into the through hole 3016L, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220L is in a state of slightly projecting rearward from the back surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016L is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220L.

Similarly, although not shown, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016R of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap each other. As a result, the boss portion 3220R is inserted into the through hole 3016R, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220R is in a state of slightly projecting rearward from the back surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016R is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220R.

The through hole 3016 (through hole 3016L and through hole 3016R) and the boss portion 3220 (boss portion 3220L and boss portion 3220R) are used when the rear translucent plate 3050 is attached to the top frame base 3210 by screwing. It has become something that can be done. This will be described in detail later.

<Arrangement relationship between the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050>
FIG. 190 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 191 (a) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in this embodiment is incident on the rear translucent plate from above. FIG. 191 (b) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in another embodiment is incident on the rear translucent plate from above. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the rear translucent plate as viewed from the rear. FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the central screen and the rear translucent plate as viewed from the rear.

FIG. 190 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 are assembled and cut in a horizontal plane. FIG. 191 schematically shows the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190. In FIG. 192, the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190 are partially enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 190, the front surface of the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 3051 of the rear translucent plate 3050 are in close contact with each other (or close to each other (substantially abutting)). However, a gap is formed between the back surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050. For clarity, FIG. 190 shows the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 in black.

As described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the rear translucent plate 3050. FIG. 191 (a) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point X on the rear translucent plate 3050. Here, for convenience, a part of the curved portion 3052 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 will be described as being substantially flat (curvature is 0).

At this time, the direction of the tangent line (L ₁ (X)) with respect to the curved portion 3052 at the point X substantially coincides with the forming direction of the curved portion 3052. The straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) are substantially orthogonal to each other, and the angle α formed by the straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) is approximately 90 °. That is, the incident angle (90 ° −α) with respect to the curved portion 3052 of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L is approximately 0 °.

On the other hand, in the other embodiment shown in FIG. 191 (b), the flat surface portion 3051 and the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050 are substantially the same as the flat surface portion 3011 and the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. It has a size and shape. As a result, the front surface of the flat surface portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 3051 of the rear translucent plate 3050 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface and the rear surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 are brought into close contact with each other. The front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the side translucent plate 3050 is in close contact with the surface.

The curvature of the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 according to the other embodiment shown in FIG. 191 (b) is substantially the same as the curvature of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. FIG. 191 (b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear translucent plate 3050. The point Y is a point on the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 according to another embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light with respect to the point X. The angle β between the straight line (L ₂ (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent line (L ₁ (Y)) to the curved portion 3052 at the point Y and the straight line L, that is, the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L. The incident angle with respect to the curved portion 3052 is larger than the incident angle (90 ° −α) in the present embodiment.

Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L with respect to the curved portion 3052 is as described above, in another embodiment, the light reflected at the point Y is on the flat surface portion 3011 side of the central screen 3010. It is easier to progress. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress such reflection and prevent a situation in which the reflected light is incident on the central screen 3010.

As shown in FIG. 192, in the vicinity of the left end portion of the surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 3052L of the rear light transmissive plate 3050, fine irregularities are formed by performing grain processing over a predetermined range. There is. In FIG. 192, the textured region (textured region 3052X) is shown in black. As described above, the wrinkle processing is a processing in which a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as a light diffusion treatment.

The rear translucent plate 3050 has a symmetrical structure, and although not shown, the same embossing is applied to the vicinity of the right end portion of the back surface of the curved portion 3052R of the rear translucent plate 3050. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a situation in which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the central screen 3010 due to reflection.

Further, the same grain processing is applied to the surface surface (near the grain processing area 3052X of the rear translucent plate 3050) on the back side (inside of the pachi-slot machine 1) in the curved portion 3012 or the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010. May be. It is also possible not to perform the embossing on either one or both of the embossing on the rear translucent plate 3050 and the embossing on the central screen 3010.

As shown in FIG. 193, a screw hole 3056L and a screw hole 3056R are formed on the upper portion of the rear light transmitting plate 3050. As shown in FIG. 194, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016L and the through hole 3016R of the central screen 3010 overlap with the screw hole 3056L and the screw hole 3056R of the rear translucent plate 3050, respectively. do. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 194, the front upper end portion 3015 (first left side portion 3015b, second left side portion 3015c, first right side portion 3015d, and second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010 is shown in black. ing.

<Fixing the central screen 3010>
FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing a state in which the underframe is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism.

In FIG. 195, the upper door mechanism UD is cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through a through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010, a screw hole 3056L of the rear translucent plate 3050, and a boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it was done. For clarity, in FIG. 195, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 and the cut surface of the screw 3090 are shaded, the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 is shaded, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is black. It is shown by.

As shown in FIG. 195, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3056L of the rear translucent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap each other. Similarly, although not shown, the screw hole 3056R of the rear translucent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap each other. By screwing the screw 3090 through which the screw hole 3056 (screw hole 3056L and screw hole 3056R) is inserted into the hole formed in the boss portion 3220 (boss portion 3220L and boss portion 3220R), the rear translucent plate 3050 is topped. It is attached to the frame base 3210. Further, as described above, the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010 substantially abuts on the screen contact portion 3219 (screen contact portion 3219L, screen contact portion 3219C, and screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210. ing. As a result, the central screen 3010 is sandwiched between the rear translucent plate 3050 and the top frame base 3210.

As shown in FIG. 196, an underframe 3070 is arranged below the upper door mechanism UD. Specifically, the underframe 3070 is arranged so as to cover the lower surface 3020a of the rear lower end portion 3020 in the central screen 3010 and the lower surface 3055a of the lower portion 3055 in the rear translucent plate 3050.

FIG. 197 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD is cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the upper door mechanism UD). For clarity, in FIG. 197, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 is shaded, and the cut surface of the underframe 3070 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 197, the underframe 3070 has an upper portion 3071 formed by bending the front end upward. The upper portion 3071 has a structure that is bent toward the rear, and the trailing edge 3071a is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the trailing edge 3071a is positioned slightly above the front lower end 3017 in the central screen 3010. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the underframe 3070 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter through the gap, the front lower end portion 3017 will be an obstacle. It has become possible to prevent the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto act from being performed through the gap.

The front lower end portion 3017 is formed slightly above the lower end of the front end portion 3014. Further, the lower portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050 is configured to have a step, and the front portion thereof is arranged so as to be placed on the rear lower end portion 3020 of the central screen 3010.

<Speaker unit 3400>
FIG. 198 is a front view showing a state in which the top side panel is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top side panel and the speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 200 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a left side speaker unit 3400L and a right side speaker unit 3400R. Since the left side speaker unit 3400L and the right side speaker unit 3400R have symmetrical structures, only the left side speaker unit 3400L will be described below. Further, the left side speaker unit 3400L and the right side speaker unit 3400R are not distinguished and are referred to as a speaker unit 3400.

The speaker unit 3400 includes a speaker 3410, a speaker grill 3420, a top side panel 3430, a plurality of speaker unit LEDs 3440, a speaker side lens 3450, and a top frame decoration 3460. In FIG. 198, the top side panel 3430 of the left side speaker unit 3400L is removed, while the top side panel 3430 of the right side speaker unit 3400R is attached.

The speaker grill 3420 and the top side panel 3430 are arranged in front of the speaker 3410. The speaker grill 3420 has a mesh structure (mesh-like structure), and a plurality of holes 3421 are formed. The top side panel 3430 is formed with a sound emitting opening 3431 in the center. The sound output from the speaker 3410 is emitted forward through these holes 3421 and the sound emitting opening 3431.

The speaker unit LED3440 includes a speaker unit LED3440a arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410, and a speaker unit LED3440b arranged on the outer side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410. It is provided. The speaker unit LED3440 is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction. Further, the LED 3440 for the speaker unit is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green.

The top side panel 3430 is formed of a translucent material and is arranged on the front side of the LED 3440 for a speaker unit. The light emitted from the LED 3440a for the speaker unit passes through the inner portion 3432 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the light emitted from the LED 3440b for the speaker unit passes through the outer portion 3433 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

An opening 3434 for emitting light is formed in the inner portion 3432 of the top side panel 3430. The light emitting opening 3434 has a shape corresponding to the speaker side lens 3450, and the speaker side lens 3450 fits into the light emitting opening 3434, whereby the light emitting opening 3434 is closed. The speaker side lens 3450 is made of a translucent material. Although not shown, an LED 3440c for a speaker unit is arranged on the back side of the speaker side lens 3450. The light emitted from the LED 3440c for the speaker unit passes through the speaker side lens 3450 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, a screw hole 3435 is formed in the top side panel 3430. The top frame decoration 3460 is arranged on the front side of the screw hole 3435. As shown in FIG. 200, a boss portion 3462 is formed on the back surface 3461 of the top frame decoration 3460 so as to project rearward. In FIG. 200, the top frame decoration 3460 is shown as viewed from the rear, while the other configurations are shown as viewed from the front.

In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the screw hole 3221 (see FIG. 185) of the top frame base 3210, the screw hole 3435 of the top side panel 3430, and the boss portion 3462 of the top frame decoration 3460 overlap each other. The top frame base 3210 is attached to the top frame decoration 3460 by screwing the screw through which the screw hole 3221 and the screw hole 3435 are inserted into the hole formed in the boss portion 3462. Since the screw is arranged on the back side of the top frame decoration 3460 and is not visible to the player, a good appearance can be realized.

<Front top unit 3200>
FIG. 201 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and the top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 203 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow-eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 203. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view of a top frame base, a top center LED substrate, and a center LED substrate base.

As described above, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130). As shown in FIGS. 201 to 204, the front top unit 3200 includes a top center LED substrate 3250, a top reflector 3260, an arrow eye reflector 3270 (left arrow eye reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R), and a top lens 3280. And a top center panel 3290.

A plurality of center LEDs 3252 are provided on the surface 3251 of the top center LED substrate 3250. The center LED 3252 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. The center LED 3252 is a full-color LED and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. The center LED 3252 includes a center LED 3252a, a center LED 3252b, a center LED 3252c, a center LED 3252d, a center LED 3252e, a center LED 3252f, and a center LED 3252g.

The center LED 3252a is provided in the center of the top center LED substrate 3250. The center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are provided on the left side of the center LED 3252a, and the arrangement location of the center LED 3252c is an area surrounded by the arrangement location of the center LED 3252b. The center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are provided on the right side of the center LED 3252a, and the arrangement location of the center LED 3252e is an area surrounded by the arrangement location of the center LED 3252d. The center LED 3252f is provided on the left side of the center LED 3252b, and the center LED 3252g is provided on the right side of the center LED 3252d.

The top frame base 3210 has a connection portion 3222 (first connection portion 3222a, second connection portion 3222b, third connection portion 3222c, fourth connection portion 3222d, fifth connection portion 3222e) that connects the upper surface wall 3211 and the lower surface wall 3214. , And a sixth connection portion 3222f). As a result, the central region 3223a, the first left side region 3223b, the first right side region 3223c, the second left side region 3223d, and the second right side region 3223e are partitioned.

The central region 3223a is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the second connection portion 3222b in the front view. The first left side region 3223b is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the third connection portion 3222c in the front view. The first right side region 3223c is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the second connecting portion 3222b, and the fourth connecting portion 3222d in the front view.

The second left side region 3223d is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the third connecting portion 3222c, and the fifth connecting portion 3222e in the front view. The second right side region 3223e is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the fourth connection portion 3222d, and the sixth connection portion 3222f in the front view. The fifth connection portion 3222e and the sixth connection portion 3222f form a part of the peripheral edge of the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R, respectively.

The central region 3223a, the first left side region 3223b, the first right side region 3223c, the second left side region 3223d, and the second right side region 3223e are hollow portions penetrating in the front-rear direction, respectively. In front view, the center LED 3252a is located in the central region 3223a, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are located in the first left side region 3223b, and the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are located in the first right side region 3223c. The center LED 3252f is positioned in the second left side region 3223d, and the center LED 3252g is located in the second right side region 3223e.

A left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the left side portion of the top center LED substrate 3250. The left top inner cover 3255L substantially matches the outer shape of the second left side region 3223d, and is arranged so as to overlap with the second left side region 3223d in the front view. Similarly, a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the right side portion of the top center LED substrate 3250. The right side top inner cover 3255R substantially matches the outer shape of the second right side region 3223e, and is arranged so as to overlap with the second right side region 3223e in the front view.

In FIG. 205, the top frame base 3210, the top center LED board 3250, and the center LED board base 3256 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through the second right side region 3223e). It shows how it was done. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 205, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the top center LED board 3250 and the center LED board base 3256 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 205, a center LED substrate base 3256 is attached to the top frame base 3210. The upper portion of the center LED substrate base 3256 is substantially in contact with the upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, and the lower portion is substantially in contact with the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210. The top center LED board 3250 is installed on the center LED board base 3256. As a result, the top center LED substrate 3250 is arranged in the vertical direction (so that the normal direction of the substrate surface is the front direction) between the upper surface wall 3211 and the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210. Therefore, the center LED 3252 can emit light in the forward direction.

<Top reflector 3260>
FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the top reflector as viewed from the front. FIG. 207 is a rear view of the top reflector. FIG. 208 is a front view of the top reflector and the top center LED substrate. 209 and 210 are partially enlarged perspective views of the top reflector and the top center LED substrate. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top reflector, the top center LED substrate, and the top frame base.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the top reflector 3260 includes an upper surface wall 3261, a lower surface wall 3262, a central partition portion 3263, a first left partition portion 3264, a first right partition portion 3265, and a second left side. It includes a partition portion 3266 and a second right partition portion 3267.

The central partition portion 3263 is formed so as to connect the upper surface wall 3261 and the lower surface wall 3262 at the center in the left-right direction of the top reflector 3260. The first left partition portion 3264 is formed so as to connect the rear end of the upper surface wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower surface wall 3262 on the left side of the central partition portion 3263. The first right partition portion 3265 is formed so as to connect the rear end of the upper surface wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower surface wall 3262 on the right side of the central partition portion 3263. The second left partition portion 3266 is continuously formed from the left end of the first left partition portion 3264 toward the left. The second right partition portion 3267 is continuously formed from the right end of the first right partition portion 3265 toward the right.

The central partition 3263 is formed with a light emitting opening 3268a on the back surface side, and the first left partition portion 3264 is formed with a light emitting opening 3268b and a light emitting opening 3268c on the back surface side. The first right partition portion 3265 is formed with a light emitting opening 3268d and a light emitting opening 3268e on the back surface side, and the second left side partition portion 3266 is formed with a light emitting opening 3268f on the back surface side. The second right partition portion 3267 is formed with a light emitting opening 3268 g on the back surface side.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 207, the light emitting openings 3268a to 3268g are shown by diagonal lines. The light emitting opening 3268a penetrates the central partition portion 3263 toward the front surface side. The light emitting opening 3268b and the light emitting opening 3268c penetrate the first left partition portion 3264 toward the front side. The light emitting opening 3268d and the light emitting opening 3268e penetrate the first right partition portion 3265 toward the front surface side. The light emitting opening 3268f penetrates the second left partition portion 3266 toward the front surface side. The light emitting opening 3268 g penetrates the second right partition portion 3267 toward the front surface side.

As a result, a space having a predetermined spread (light passing space 3269a to 3269g) is formed corresponding to each light emitting opening 3268a to 3268g. Further, the peripheral portion of each of the light emitting openings 3268a to 3268g is in close proximity (substantially abutting) to the surface 3251 of the top center LED substrate 3250.

As shown in FIG. 208, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g are positioned so as to overlap with the light emitting openings 3268a to 3268g, respectively. As a result, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g passes through the light passage spaces 3269a to 3269g, respectively. Here, one light passing space 3269 and another light passing space 3269 are separated by a wall portion provided in the top reflector 3260. This will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the central partition portion 3263 has a triangular prism-shaped base portion 3263a and a protrusion portion 3263b that protrudes forward from the base portion 3263a, and the protrusion portion 3263b from the base portion 3263a. A cavity 3263c that communicates with the above is formed. The cavity 3263c is a space surrounded by the left inner wall portion 3263d, the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the upper inner wall portion 3263f. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the front end edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d, the front end edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the front end edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f are shown in black. The trailing edge thereof constitutes the peripheral edge of the light emitting opening 3268a, and the left inner wall portion 3263d and the right inner wall portion 3263e are connected at these rear end portions.

The light passage space 3269a is configured as a cavity 3263c. As a result, the light passing space 3269a is separated from the light passing space 3269b by the left side portion of the base portion 3263a, and is separated from the light passing space 3269d by the right side portion of the base portion 3263a.

Further, the light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the first left partition portion 3264. The range of one light passing space 3269b is defined by the inclined wall portion 3264a, and the one light passing space 3269b is separated from the other light passing space 3269b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3264a defining one light passing space 3269b is shown by an oblique line. The inclined wall portion 3264a has an inclination that expands toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the trailing edge (light emitting opening 3268b). Is formed.

Further, the light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye of the first left partition portion 3264. The light passage space 3269c is separated from the light passage space 3269b by the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye. The area defined by the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye is divided into two by the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye. As a result, one light passage space 3269c is separated from the other light passage space 3269c.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge 3264d of the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye is shown in black, the front surface 3264e continuous from the peripheral edge of the light emitting opening 3268c is shown by the diagonal line, and the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye is shown. The front surface 3264f is shaded. The central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye is formed so as to project forward from the front surface 3264e. Further, the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye has a shorter length in the anteroposterior direction as compared with the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye, and the front surface 3264f of the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye is the periphery for the arrow eye. It is positioned behind the front edge 3264d of the wall portion 3264b. The central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye is formed with a screw hole 3264g that penetrates the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the light passing space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the second left partition portion 3266. The range of one light passing space 3269f is defined by the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the one light passing space 3269f is separated from the other light passing space 3269f. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3266a that defines one light passing space 3269f is shown by diagonal lines. The inclined wall portion 3266a has an inclination that expands toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the trailing edge (light emitting opening 3268f). Is formed.

The top reflector 3260 has a symmetrical structure, and similarly, the light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a of the first right partition portion 3265, and is formed by the inclined wall portion 3265a. , One light passage space 3269d is separated from the other light passage space 3269d. Further, the light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b of the first right partition portion 3265, and the light passage space 3269e is the light passage space by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b. It is separated from 3269d. The area defined by the peripheral wall portion 3265b for the arrow eye is divided into two by the central wall portion 3265c for the arrow eye. As a result, one light passage space 3269e is separated from the other light passage space 3269e. Further, the light passing space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a of the second right partition portion 3267, and the one light passing space 3269g is separated from the other light passing space 3269g by the inclined wall portion 3267a. It is separated.

As shown in FIG. 211, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper surface of the upper surface wall 3261 in the top reflector 3260 substantially abuts on the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3211 in the top frame base 3210, and the top reflector 3260. The lower surface of the lower surface wall 3262 substantially abuts on the upper surface of the lower surface wall 3214 in the top frame base 3210.

As a result, the front of the light passage space 3269d and the light passage space 3269e is partitioned by the upper surface wall 3261 and the lower surface wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the right side wall surface 3263 g of the central partition portion 3263, and the fourth connection portion 3222d of the top frame base 3210. It is a space that has been created. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 211, the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 is shown in diagonal lines, the upper surface of the lower surface wall 3262 is shown in black, and the right side wall surface 3263 g is shown in shading. Similarly, although not shown, in front of the light passage space 3269b and the light passage space 3269c, the upper surface wall 3261 and the lower surface wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the left side wall surface 3263h of the central partition portion 3263, and the third connection portion of the top frame base 3210. It is a space partitioned by 3222c.

<Arrow eye reflector 3270>
FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector as viewed from the front and the right. FIG. 213 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector as viewed from the rear. FIG. 215 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector. 216 and 217 are perspective views of the center LED, the top reflector, and the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view of the center LED, the top reflector, and the left arrow eye reflector.

Since the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R have symmetrical structures, they are not distinguished below and will be described as the arrow eye reflector 3270. As shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, the arrow-eye reflector 3270 has a hollow three-dimensional shape with the front and rear open.

Specifically, the arrow-eye reflector 3270 includes a base portion 3271, a front side portion 3272, and a rear side portion 3273. The base portion 3271 has a structure that occupies most of the arrow eye reflector 3270. The front side portion 3272 is formed so as to project forward from the front end portion of the base portion 3271. The rear side portion 3273 is formed so as to project rearward from the rear end portion of the base portion 3271.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 212, the front end edge 3272a of the substrate portion 3271 and the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 are shown in black. The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 are formed so as to have a step at the front end edge 3271a of the base portion 3271. The outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 is formed so as to connect the front end edge 3272a of the base portion 3271 and the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272.

The figure defined by the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 and the figure defined by the front end edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 have substantially similar shapes, and the figure defined by the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272. Is smaller than the figure defined by the front end edge 3271a of the substrate portion 3271. Further, the front side portion 3272 is formed with a front side opening 3272c that opens toward the front. The peripheral edge of the front opening 3272c coincides with the front edge 3272a of the front portion 3272.

The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side portion 3273 are formed so as to have a step at the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271. Further, the rear side portion 3273 is formed with a first rear side opening 3273b and a second rear side opening 3273c that open toward the rear. A cavity is formed inside the arrow-eye reflector 3270, and the first posterior opening 3273b and the second posterior opening 3273c communicate with the anterior opening 3272c.

Further, the rear side portion 3273 has a rear side partition portion 3273d between the first rear side opening 3273b and the second rear side opening 3273c. The rear partition portion 3273d is formed in a flat plate shape so as to connect the upper portion and the lower portion of the rear side portion 3273. A screw hole 3273e is formed in the rear partition portion 3273d. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 213, the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c are shown by diagonal lines, and the back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d is netted. Shown by hanging.

A first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273g is formed in a part of the peripheral edge of the first rear opening 3273b so as to project rearward from the back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. Further, a second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h is formed in a part of the peripheral edge of the second rear opening 3273c so as to project rearward from the back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. The side surface of the first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273g and the side surface of the second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h coincide with the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side opening portion 3273. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 214, the rear end surface 3273i of the first rear opening peripheral edge 3273g and the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral edge 3273h are shown by diagonal lines, and the rear end surface 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black. Shows.

FIG. 215 shows a state in which the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is cut at a vertical surface (a surface passing through the substrate portion 3271) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 215, the inner wall surface 3270a of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is formed with an inclination that expands toward the front. As a result, when the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is cut in the vertical direction (the vertical surface such that the distance between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c is X in the front-rear direction), the cross section thereof is formed. The area of the corresponding opening (cross-sectional opening 3270X) increases as the value of X increases.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 215, the cut surface of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is shown by diagonal lines. The cross-sectional opening 3270X is a portion surrounded by the diagonal line. As described above, on the outer wall surface (outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, outer wall surface 3273a) of the arrow-eye reflector 3270, between the base portion 3272 and the front side portion 3272, and between the base portion 3272 and the rear side portion 3273. The inner wall surface 3270a is continuously formed between the base portion 3271, the front side portion 3272, and the rear side portion 3273 without having such a step. .. Therefore, the thickness of the front side portion 3272 (distance between the outer wall surface 3272b and the inner wall surface 3270a) is smaller than the thickness of the base portion 3271 (distance between the outer wall surface 3271b and the inner wall surface 3270a). In FIG. 215, the thickness of the substrate portion 3271 is indicated by d. The substrate portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 are each formed to have a substantially uniform thickness.

As will be described in detail later, the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 is close to the rear surface side of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 224). Here, since the arrow-eye reflector 3270 itself does not transmit light, the shadow of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 (particularly, the arrow-eye) when the center LED 3252 around the arrow-eye reflector 3270 emits light to produce light emission with the front top unit 3200. It is feared that the shadow of the front end of the reflector 3270) will be visible to the player through the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290, which will lead to a deterioration in the aesthetic appearance of the game machine. However, as in the present embodiment, the area of the front end portion of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is reduced by providing a step on the front end side of the arrow eye reflector 3270 and making the front side portion 3272 thinner than the base portion 3271. As a result, it is possible to reduce the shadow of the front end of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 at the time of light emission effect, and it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance of the game machine.

Further, the arrow eye reflector 3270 is formed with a boss portion 3270b so as to project forward from the rear partition portion 3273d of the rear side portion 3273. The boss portion 3270b has a cylindrical shape, and the screw hole 3273e is formed so as to penetrate the rear partition portion 3273d and extend to a part of the boss portion 3270b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 215, the front surface 3273k of the rear partition portion 3273d is shown in black, and the front surface of the boss portion 3270b is shaded.

As shown in the figure, the letter "L" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. On the other hand, the letter "R" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This makes it possible to easily distinguish between the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right-arrow eye reflector 3270R.

FIG. 216 disassembles the top reflector 3260 and the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L, and shows the top reflector 3260 as viewed from the front (generally the front), while the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L shows the rear (generally the back). ) Is shown. FIG. 217 shows a state in which the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are viewed from the front. FIG. 218 shows a cross section of the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L in a state where they are assembled, as viewed from the left. Further, in FIGS. 216 to 218, components other than the center LED 3252, the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are deleted while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the center LED 3252 and the top reflector 3260. ing.

As shown in FIG. 216, a screw hole 3264 g is formed in the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye of the top reflector 3260. As described above, the screw hole 3264g is formed so as to penetrate the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction. Similarly, although not shown, a screw hole 3265 g is formed in the central wall portion 3265c for the arrow eye of the top reflector 3260. The screw hole 3265 g is formed so as to penetrate the first right partition portion 3265 in the front-rear direction.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3264 g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are superimposed. The left arrow eye reflector 3270L is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw through which the screw hole 3264g is inserted into the screw hole 3273e. Similarly, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3265 g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are superimposed. The right arrow eye reflector 3270R is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw through which the screw hole 3265 g is inserted into the screw hole 3273e.

As a result, the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right-arrow eye reflector 3270R are respectively arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260. At this time, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap with the two light emitting openings 3268c in the top reflector 3260, respectively. Then, the first rear opening 3273b and the light emitting opening 3268c communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light emitting opening 3268c communicate with each other. Similarly, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap with the two light emitting openings 3268e in the top reflector 3260, respectively. Then, the first rear opening 3273b and the light emitting opening 3268e communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light emitting opening 3268e communicate with each other.

In FIG. 218, the center LED 3252, the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are vertically faced in the front-rear direction (the surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L passing through the second rear opening 3273c) in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. ) Shows how it was cut. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 218, the cut surface of the top reflector 3260 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shaded, and the side surface and front surface 3273k of the rear partition portion 3273d of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. Are shown in diagonal lines and black, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 218, the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially abuts on the front surface 3264e in the peripheral edge portion of the light emitting opening 3268c in the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector. The back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d in the 3270L substantially abuts the front surface 3264f of the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye in the top reflector 3260, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is an arrow in the top reflector 3260. It substantially abuts on the front edge 3264d of the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the eye. Similarly, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R also substantially abuts on the top reflector 3260.

<Light emission from the center LED 3252>
As described above, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252a overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252a passes through the light passage space 3269a (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and travels to the front portion in the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269a is a cavity 3263c (a space surrounded by the left inner wall portion 3263d, the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the upper inner wall portion 3263f) in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252b overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268b of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b passes through the light passage space 3269b (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and travels to the front portion in the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252c overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268c of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. (See FIGS. 208 and 217). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252c is the light passage space 3269c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c and front side). It passes through a cavity that communicates with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the anterior portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3264b for the arrow eye and the central wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252d overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268d of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252d passes through the light passage space 3269d (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and travels to the front portion in the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252e overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268e of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. (See FIGS. 208 and 217). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is the light passage space 3269e of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c and front side). It passes through a cavity that communicates with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the anterior portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3265b for the arrow eye and the central wall portion 3265c for the arrow eye in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252f overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268f of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f passes through the light passage space 3269f (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and travels to the front portion in the upper door mechanism UD. The light passing space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252 g overlaps with the light emitting opening 3268 g of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g passes through the light passage space 3269g (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and travels to the front portion in the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

The light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels as described above, but the wall surface of the top reflector 3260 located in the passage path of the light (left inner wall portion 3263d, right inner wall portion 3263e, upper inner wall portion 3263f, inclined wall). Part 3264a, sloping wall part 3265a, sloping wall part 3266a, sloping wall part 3267a, right side wall surface 3263g, left side wall surface 3263h, etc.) Is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels forward while being reflected by these wall surfaces.

The left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the second left partition portion 3266 of the top reflector 3260, and the right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the second right partition portion 3267 of the top reflector 3260. Is provided (see FIG. 203). The left side top inner cover 3255L is formed in a flat plate shape, and its back surface is arranged so as to substantially abut the front surface of the second left side partition portion 3266 (peripheral portion of the inclined wall portion 3266a). The right top inner cover 3255R is formed in a flat plate shape, and its back surface is arranged so as to substantially abut the front surface of the second right partition portion 3267 (peripheral portion of the inclined wall portion 3267a).

As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f is incident on the back surface of the left top inner cover 3255L. The left side top inner cover 3255L is formed of a translucent material, and the light passes through the left side top inner cover 3255L and travels in front of the left side top inner cover 3255L. Similarly, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g is incident on the back surface of the right top inner cover 3255R. The right side top inner cover 3255R is formed of a translucent material, and the light passes through the right side top inner cover 3255R and travels in front of the right side top inner cover 3255R.

<Top lens 3280>
FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the top frame base and the top lens. FIG. 220 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top lens is removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of the top lens as viewed from the rear and above. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of a top center LED substrate, a top reflector, a left arrow eye reflector, a right arrow eye reflector, and a top lens. 223 and 224 are cross-sectional views of a top center LED substrate, a top reflector, a left arrow eye reflector, a right arrow eye reflector, and a top lens. FIG. 225 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and the top lens. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector and the top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the top lens 3280 is surrounded by the front end edge 3211b of the upper surface wall 3211 in the top frame base 3210, the front end edge 3214b of the lower surface wall 3214, the fifth connection portion 3222e, and the sixth connection portion 3222f. It almost matches the outer shape of the figure. The top lens 3280 is arranged along the front end edge 3211b, the front end edge 3214b, the fifth connection portion 3222e, and the sixth connection portion 3222f.

As a result, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the central region 3223a, the first left side region 3223b, the first right side region 3223c, the second left side region 3223d, and the second right side region 3223e of the top frame base 3210 (FIG. 204) is covered from the front by the top lens 3280.

Specifically, the top lens 3280 has a symmetrical structure, and includes a central portion 3281, a left side portion 3482, and a right side portion 3283. The central portion 3281 has a triangular shape and is formed. The left side portion 3482 is formed so as to be continuous from the left end of the central portion 3281 toward the left side. The left side portion 3482 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes to the left. The right side portion 3283 is formed so as to be continuous from the right end of the central portion 3281 toward the right side. The right side portion 3283 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes to the right.

A central front convex portion 3281a is formed on the front surface side of the central portion 3281. The central front convex portion 3281a extends in the vertical direction in the center in the left-right direction as a convex portion slightly bulging forward with respect to the surrounding surface. Further, a through hole 3281b and a through hole 3281c are formed in the central portion 3281. The first connection portion 3222a and the second connection portion 3222b of the top frame base 3210 are formed with screw holes 3224a and screw holes 3224b at locations overlapping with the through holes 3281b and the through holes 3281c, respectively.

The left side portion 3482 has an upper left side portion 3282a and a lower left side portion 3282b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side portion 3382a. The upper left side portion 3482a and the lower left side portion 3382b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three left front convex portions 3284 (first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284b, and third left front convex portion 3284c) are formed on the front surface side of the left upper portion 3482a. The first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c are respectively convex portions that slightly bulge with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3282c). It has the shape of an inverted dogleg.

Similarly, the right side portion 3283 has an upper right side portion 3283a and a lower right side portion 3283b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side portion 3283a. The upper right side portion 3283a and the lower right side portion 3283b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three right front convex portions 3285 (first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, and third right front convex portion 3285c) are formed on the front surface side of the right upper portion 3283a. The first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c are respectively convex portions that slightly bulge with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3283c). It has a dogleg shape.

Further, the lower left side portion 3282b is formed with a lower left protrusion portion 3482d that protrudes downward. The lower left protrusion 3482d is formed with a lower left front convex portion 3282e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. Further, the lower right side portion 3283b is formed with a lower right protruding portion 3283d that protrudes downward. The lower right protruding portion 3283d is formed with a lower right front convex portion 3283e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the lower left protrusion 3482d and the lower right protrusion 3283d project downward from the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210, respectively, and the lower left protrusion 3225a and the lower right protrusion 3225b. Fitted in.

As shown in FIG. 221, a central rear side recess 3281d is formed on the back surface side of the central portion 3281. The central rear recess 3281d extends vertically in the center in the left-right direction as a recess slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (peripheral portion 3281e). The formed portion of the central rear side concave portion 3281d overlaps with the formed portion of the central front side convex portion 3281a. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edge of the central rear concave portion 3281d substantially coincides with the outer edge of the central front convex portion 3281a. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 221 shows the central rear recess 3281d with diagonal lines.

Further, three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) are formed on the back side of the left side portion 3482. .. The first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c are respectively recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3482f). It has a U-shape. These left rear recesses 3286 are basically formed in the upper left rear portion 3282a, but a small portion under the first left rear recess 3286a is formed in the lower left side portion 3282b.

The first left rear side concave portion 3286a, the second left rear side concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear side concave portion 3286c are formed at the first left front side convex portion 3284a, the second left front side convex portion 3284b, and It overlaps with the formed portion of the third left front convex portion 3284c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear side concave portion 3286c are each the first left front side convex portion 3284a. , The outer edge of the second left front convex portion 3284b and the third left front convex portion 3284c.

Further, two convex portions (first left rear convex portion 3288a and second left rear convex portion 3288b) are formed between the first left rear concave portion 3286a and the second left rear concave portion 3286b. Two convex portions (third left rear convex portion 3288c and fourth left rear convex portion 3288d) are formed between the second left rear concave portion 3286b and the third left rear concave portion 3286c. There is. The first left rear convex portion 3288a, the second left rear convex portion 3288b, the third left rear convex portion 3288c, and the fourth left rear convex portion 3288d are each peripheral surfaces (rear main surface 3482f). ) As a convex portion slightly bulging, and is formed so as to connect adjacent left rear side concave portions 3286.

Similarly, three right rear recesses 3287 (first right rear recess 3287a, second right rear recess 3287b, and third right rear recess 3287c) are formed on the back side of the right side portion 3283. There is. The first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c are respectively recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). It has an inverted shape of the character. These right rear recesses 3287 are basically formed in the upper right rear portion 3283a, but a small portion under the first right rear recess 3287a is formed in the lower right side portion 3283b. ..

The first right rear side concave portion 3287a, the second right rear side concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear side concave portion 3287c are formed at the first right front side convex portion 3285a, the second right front side convex portion 3285b, and the third right rear side concave portion 3287c, respectively. It overlaps with the formed portion of the third right front convex portion 3285c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave concave portion 3287c are respectively the first right front side convex portion 3285a. , The outer edge of the second right front convex portion 3285b and the third right front convex portion 3285c.

Further, two convex portions (first right rear side convex portion 3289a and second right rear side convex portion 3289b) are formed between the first right rear side concave portion 3287a and the second right rear side concave portion 3287b. Two convex portions (third right rear convex portion 3289c and fourth right rear convex portion 3289d) are formed between the second right rear concave portion 3287b and the third right rear concave portion 3287c. There is. The first right rear convex portion 3289a, the second right rear convex portion 3289b, the third right rear convex portion 3289c, and the fourth right rear convex portion 3289d are each peripheral surfaces (rear main surface 3283f). ) As a convex portion slightly bulging, and is formed so as to connect adjacent right rear concave portions 3287.

Further, on the back surface side of the lower left protruding portion 3382d, a lower left rear concave portion 3282g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed. Further, on the back surface side of the lower right protruding portion 3283d, a lower right rear concave portion 3283 g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed. The formed portions of the lower left rear concave portion 328 g and the lower right rear concave portion 3283 g overlap with the formed portions of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the lower left rear concave portion 3282 g and the lower right rear concave portion 3283 g substantially coincide with the outer edges of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. ..

As shown in FIGS. 222 to 224, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. There is. At this time, the front end edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d in the top reflector 3260, the front end edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, the front end edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f (see FIG. 209), and the peripheral edge portion 3281e of the central portion 3281 in the top lens 3280. Are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially in contact with each other.

Further, the front end edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the rear side main surface 3482f of the left side portion 3382 in the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially equal to each other. Contact. Similarly, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 in the right arrow eye reflector 3270R and the rear main surface 3283f of the right side portion 3283 in the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially parallel to each other. Contact.

In FIG. 223, the top center LED substrate 3250, the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and the top lens 3280 are arranged in a horizontal plane (boss of the arrow eye reflector 3270) in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. The state of cutting at the surface passing through the portion 3270b) is shown. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 223, the cut surface of the central partition 3263 in the top reflector 3260 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

In FIG. 224, the top center LED substrate 3250, the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and the top lens 3280 are vertically faced in the front-rear direction (top lens) in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. It shows a state of cutting at the surface passing through the first left rear convex portion 3288a and the second left rear convex portion 3288b of 3280. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 224, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shaded, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines.

In FIG. 225, the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are disassembled, and the left-arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown as viewed from the front, while the top lens 3280 is shown as viewed from the rear. There is. FIG. 226 shows a state in which the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are cut at a vertical surface in the left-right direction (a surface passing through the base portion 3271 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L) in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. There is. Further, in FIG. 226, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shaded, and the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c in the top lens 3280 are shown. It is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, the outer shape of the front end edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is abbreviated as the shape of the virtual figure 3286X defined by the three left rear side recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280. Match. The virtual figure 3286X is a figure surrounded by P, Q, R, and S in FIG. 225. In FIG. 225, the front end edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

Specifically, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is composed of an upper front edge 3272p, a lower front edge 3272q, a left front edge 3272r, and a right front edge 3272s. The upper front edge 3272p and the lower front edge 3272q are each formed linearly. The left front edge 3272r and the right front edge 3272s are each formed in an inverted V shape.

On the other hand, the outer edge of each of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280 is composed of a linear upper end edge 3286p and a lower end edge 3286q, and a dogleg-shaped left end edge 3286r and a right end edge 3286s, respectively. There is. The virtual figure 3286X has a line segment (P) connecting the upper end edges 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286, a line segment (Q) connecting the lower end edges 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286, and a third left rear side. It is a figure surrounded by the left end edge 3286r (R) of the recess 3286c and the right end edge 3286s (S) of the first left rear side recess 3286a.

The upper end edge 3286p of the first left rear recess 3286a, the upper edge 3286p of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the upper edge 3286p of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line. Further, the lower end edge 3286q of the first left rear recess 3286a, the lower end edge 3286q of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the lower end edge 3286q of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper front end edge 3272p of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially overlaps with the upper end edge 3286p of the three left rear concave portions 3286 in the top lens 3280, and is below the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. The front edge 3272q substantially overlaps with the lower edge 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280, and the left front edge 3272r of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is the left edge 3286r of the third left rear recess 3286c in the top lens 3280. The right front edge 3272s of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially overlaps with the right edge 3286s of the first left rear recess 3286a in the top lens 3280. Then, the front end edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is arranged along the peripheral edge of the virtual figure 3286X in the top lens 3280, and substantially abuts on the rear main surface 3482f.

From the above, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252c) that has passed through the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c and the front opening 3272c) is It is incident on the first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear concave concave portion 3286c of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 217).

Similarly, although not shown, light (emitted from the center LED 3252e) that has passed through the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (the cavity that communicates the first posterior opening 3273b and the second posterior opening 3273c and the anterior opening 3272c). The light) is incident on the first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c of the top lens 3280.

Further, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) that has passed through the cavity 3263c (see FIG. 209) of the central partition portion 3263 in the top reflector 3260 is incident on the central rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 216). .. Further, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g is a region of forming the central rear concave portion 3281d in the top lens 3280, a forming region of the left rear side concave portion 3286, and a right rear concave portion. It is incident on a region other than the formation region of 3287.

The passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252a is separated from the passage path of the light emitted from the other center LED 3252 by the wall surface of the top reflector 3260. As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 other than the center LED 3252a is prevented from entering the central rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280.

Further, the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252c is separated from the passage path of the light emitted from the other center LED 3252 by the wall surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 other than the center LED 3252c is prevented from entering the left rear concave portion 3286 of the top lens 3280.

Similarly, the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is separated from the passage path of the light emitted from the other center LED 3252 by the wall surface of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 other than the center LED 3252e is prevented from entering the right rear concave portion 3287 of the top lens 3280.

The top lens 3280 is made of a translucent material, and the light incident on the top lens 3280 is transmitted through the top lens 3280. Then, the light transmitted through the top lens 3280 is incident on the top center panel 3290 arranged on the front side of the top lens 3280 (or, as will be described later, the pachislot machine is inserted through the opening formed in the top center panel 3290. It will be released to the outside of the machine 1).

<Top center panel 3290>
FIG. 227 is a perspective view of the top center panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 228 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel. FIG. 229 is a perspective view of the top center panel as viewed from rear and above. FIG. 230 is a rear view of the top center panel and the top lens. FIG. 231 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and the top lens. FIG. 232 is a front view of the top center panel and the top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 227 and 228, the top center panel 3290 has a symmetrical structure, and the external shape in front view corresponds to the top lens 3280 (the top center panel 3290 is the top lens). It is slightly larger than 3280). Specifically, the top center panel 3290 includes a central portion 3291, a left side portion 3292, and a right side portion 3293.

The central portion 3291 has a triangular shape and is formed. A central opening 3291a is formed in the central portion 3291. The central opening 3291a is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction as a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shape of the central opening 3291a corresponds to the central front convex portion 3281a in the top lens 3280. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 228, the central opening 3291a is shaded.

The left side portion 3292 is formed so as to be continuous from the left end of the central portion 3291 toward the left side. The left side portion 3292 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes to the left. The left side portion 3292 includes an upper left side portion 3292a, a left bending portion 3292b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side portion 3292a, and a lower left side portion continuously formed downward from the lower end of the left bending portion 3292b. It has 3292c and. Three left side openings 3294 (first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, and third left side opening 3294c) are formed in the left upper side portion 3292a.

The first left side opening 3294a, the second left side opening 3294b, and the third left side opening 3294c each have an inverted dogleg shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c are the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front in the top lens 3280, respectively. It has a shape corresponding to the side convex portion 3284c. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 228, the first left side opening 3294a, the second left side opening 3294b, and the third left side opening 3294c are shown by diagonal lines.

The right side portion 3293 is formed so as to be continuous from the right end of the central portion 3291 toward the right side. The right side portion 3293 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes to the right. The right side portion 3293 is a lower right side formed continuously from the lower right side portion 3293a, the right bending portion 3293b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side portion 3293a, and the lower right bending portion 3293b downward. It has a portion 3293c and. Three right side openings 3295 (first right side opening 3295a, second right side opening 3295b, and third right side opening 3295c) are formed in the right upper side portion 3293a.

The first right side opening 3295a, the second right side opening 3295b, and the third right side opening 3295c each have a dogleg shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c are the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front in the top lens 3280, respectively. It has a shape corresponding to the side convex portion 3285c.

Further, the top center panel 3290 has a lower left protruding portion 3292d formed so as to protrude downward from the lower left side portion 3292c and a lower right formed so as to protrude downward from the lower right side portion 3293c. It has a protrusion 3293d. The lower left protrusion 3292d is formed with a lower left opening 3292e as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the lower right protrusion 3293d is formed with a lower right opening 3293e as a through opening penetrating in the front-rear direction. There is. For clarity, FIG. 228 shows the lower left opening 3292e in diagonal lines. The shapes of the lower left opening 3292e and the lower right opening 3293e correspond to the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e in the top lens 3280, respectively.

Further, a plurality of groove portions 3296 are formed on the top center panel 3290. Each groove portion 3296 is a recess recessed from the surrounding surface, similarly to the frame base engaging groove 3234 (see FIG. 171) of the upper front and rear frame 3230. The left side portion 3292 and the right side portion 3293 are each provided with three groove portions 3296, and these groove portions 3296 extend over a predetermined length on the front surface 3290a (front surface) of the top center panel 3290. It is formed to do. For the sake of clarity, the groove 3296 is shown in black in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 229, the top center panel 3290 has an upper end protrusion 3297. The upper end protrusion 3297 is formed so as to project rearward at the upper end of the top center panel 3290. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 229, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 is shown by diagonal lines.

Further, a boss portion 3291b and a boss portion 3291c are formed on the back surface side of the central portion 3291. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the boss portion 3291b and the boss portion 3291c are inserted into the through hole 3281b and the through hole 3281c of the top lens 3280, respectively. As described above, the through hole 3281b and the through hole 3281c of the top lens 3280 overlap with the screw hole 3224a and the screw hole 3224b of the top frame base 3210, respectively (see FIG. 220).

The screw through which the screw hole 3224a of the top frame base 3210 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 3291b of the top center panel 3290, and the screw through which the screw hole 3224b of the top frame base 3210 is inserted is inserted into the top center panel 3290. By screwing into the hole formed in the boss portion 3291c, the top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 are connected.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged so as to be fitted to the back side of the top center panel 3290. As a result, the central front convex portion 3281a and the three left front convex portions 3284 (the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c) in the top lens 3280 have three. The right front convex portion 3285 (first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, and third right front convex portion 3285c), lower left front convex portion 3482e, and lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. , Central opening 3291a, three left opening 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c), three right opening 3295 (first right opening 3295a, first) in the top center panel 3290. 2 Fits into the right side opening 3295b and the third right side opening 3295c), the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e, and their protrusions on the top lens 3280 block those openings in the top center panel 3290. To.

The front surface of the top lens 3280 (the portion excluding the convex portion such as the central front convex portion 3281a, the left front convex portion 3284, the right front convex portion 3285, the lower left front convex portion 3282e, and the lower right front convex portion 3283e) is The top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the back surface (the portion excluding the openings such as the central opening 3291a, the left opening 3294, the right opening 3295, the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e). The surfaces are substantially in contact with each other.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 230, the outer edge of the top lens 3280 is shown by a thick line. FIG. 231 shows a state in which the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are cut at a vertical surface in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through the first left front convex portion 3284a of the top lens 3280). ing. In FIG. 231, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shaded, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines. Further, in FIG. 232, the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280, the three left front convex portions 3284 (the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c). Three right front convex portions 3285 (first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, and third right front convex portion 3285c), lower left front convex portion 3482e, and lower right front convex portion 3283e. Is indicated by diagonal lines.

<Light emission effect in front top unit 3200>
From the above, the light incident on the central rear concave portion 3281d of the top lens 3280 (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) is pachislot from the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280 via the central opening 3291a of the top center panel 3290. It is released to the outside of the machine 1.

Further, the light (emitted from the center LED 3252c) incident on the three left rear concave portions 3286 (first left rear concave portion 3286a, second left rear concave concave portion 3286b, and third left rear concave concave portion 3286c) in the top lens 3280. The light) passes through the three left side openings 3294 (first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, and third left side opening 3294c) in the top center panel 3290, and three left front side convex portions in the top lens 3280. It is discharged from 3284 (the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c) to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the light (emitted from the center LED 3252e) incident on the three right rear concave portions 3287 (first right rear concave portion 3287a, second right rear concave concave portion 3287b, and third right rear concave concave portion 3287c) in the top lens 3280. The light) passes through the three right opening 3295s (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c) in the top center panel 3290, and three right front convex portions in the top lens 3280. It is discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 from 3285 (the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c).

Further, light incident on a region other than the central rear recess 3281d forming region, the left rear concave 3286 forming region, and the right rear concave 3287 forming region in the top lens 3280 (center LED3252b, center LED3252d, center LED3252f). , And the light emitted from the center LED 3252g) is the formation region of the central opening 3291a in the top center panel 3290, the three left side openings 3294 (first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, and third left side opening 3294c). ), And a region other than the formation region of the three right side openings 3295 (first right side opening 3295a, second right side opening 3295b, and third right side opening 3295c).

The top center panel 3290 is made of a translucent material and exhibits a silver color in a state where the center LED 3252 does not emit light. A metal film is vapor-deposited on the front surface 3290a (see FIG. 227) of the top center panel 3290, and for example, tin and indium are used as the metal to be vapor-deposited. As a result, the light transmittance of the top center panel 3290 is about 20%. In the groove portion 3296 (the portion corresponding to the groove bottom portion 3234a shown in FIG. 171), the metal film to be vapor-deposited is thinner than the other portions on the front surface 3290a. As a result, the light transmittance of the groove portion 3296 is relatively high.

When the center LED 3252 is emitting light, the light incident on the top center panel 3290 (light emitted from the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g) passes through the top center panel 3290, and the light is transmitted. Is discharged from the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. As a result, the color of the top center panel 3290 changes from silver depending on the emission color of the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g.

Here, as described above, the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252a, the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252c, and the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e are the top reflector 3260, respectively. The left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are separated from the passage path of the light emitted from the other center LED 3252. Further, the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f and the passage path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are separated by the top reflector 3260.

From the above, the front top unit 3200 is divided into the following areas in the front view.
(I) Forming region of the central front convex portion 3281a in the top lens 3280 (ii) Forming region of the three left front convex portions 3284 in the top lens 3280 (iii) Forming region of the three right front convex portions 3285 in the top lens 3280 (iii) iv) Area on the left side of the above (i) excluding the above (ii) (v) Area on the right side of the above (i) excluding the above (iii)

The region (i) is illuminated by the light emitted from the center LED 3252a. The region (ii) is illuminated by the light emitted from the center LED 3252c. The area (iii) is illuminated by the light emitted from the center LED 3252e. The region (iv) is illuminated by the light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f. The region (v) is illuminated by the light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

Therefore, the appearance of the color in the regions (i) to (v) can be changed according to the color of the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g. For example, by changing the emission color of the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g according to the situation of the game, the appearance of the color in the regions (i) to (v) can be changed.

For example, in the first state (for example, the normal state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is the first color (for example, orange), and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g is the second color (for example). For example, white), and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are all the first color (for example). For example, orange), and in the third state (for example, a second CZ state different from the first CZ state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. Can be configured to have a second color (for example, white).

As a result, in the first state (for example, the normal state), the region (iv) is made to look like a color based on the first color (for example, orange), while the region (v) is displayed. The second color (for example, white) is used as the base color, and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), both the regions (iv) and (v) are the first. The color (for example, orange) is used as the base color, and in the third state (for example, the second CZ state), both the regions (iv) and (v) are the second color (for example). For example, it can be made to look like a color based on white).

At this time, the emission color of the center LED 3252c may be the same color as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, or may be a different color. For example, depending on the situation of the game, a case where light having the same color as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f (for example, orange) is emitted from the center LED 3252c and a color different from the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f (for example). , Blue) may be switched between the case where the light is emitted from the center LED 3252c and the case where the light is emitted from the center LED 3252c.

Similarly, the emission color of the center LED 3252e may be the same as or different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. For example, depending on the situation of the game, a case where light having the same color as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g (for example, white) is emitted from the center LED 3252e and a color different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g (for example, for example). It may be possible to switch between the case where the light (blue) is emitted from the center LED 3252e and the case where the light is emitted from the center LED 3252e.

Further, the emission color of the center LED 3252a may be the same as or different from the emission color of the other center LEDs 3252. For example, the emission color of the center LED 3252a may be configured to be a color that is always different from the emission color of other center LEDs 3252 (for example, green).

As described above, the inclined wall portion 3264a, the inclined wall portion 3265a, the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the inclined wall portion 3267a (see FIGS. 209 and 210) of the top reflector 3260, and the inner wall surface of the arrow-eye reflector 3270. The 3270a (see FIG. 215) is formed with an inclination that expands toward the front. As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 advances while being diffused from the light source, and the entire top lens 3280 to the top center panel 3290 can be evenly illuminated.

Further, a part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b is guided to the lower left front convex portion 3282e of the top lens 3280, and is passed through the lower left opening 3292e of the top center panel 3290, and the pachislot machine 1 is transmitted from the lower left front convex portion 3282e. It is released to the outside of. Similarly, a part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d is guided to the lower right front convex portion 3283e in the top lens 3280, and is guided to the lower right front convex portion 3283e through the lower right opening 3293e in the top center panel 3290. Is released to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Thereby, in combination with the semicircular image 3011b displayed on the central screen 3010 to the reflected image 3216a (see FIG. 181) displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210, the semicircular image 3011b to the reflected image 3216a Is the outline of the character's face, and can be shown to the player as if the light emitted from the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e is the eyes of the character.

Further, light of the same color (for example, orange) as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a (see FIG. 199) in the left speaker unit 3400L, and is the same as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. Color (for example, white) light may be emitted from the speaker unit LED3440a in the right side speaker unit 3400R. As a result, the light emitting effect of the front top unit 3200 and the light emitting effect of the speaker unit 3400 can be linked. In order to enhance the sense of unity in these light emission effects, a metal film similar to that of the top center panel 3290 may be vapor-deposited on the inner portion 3432 (see FIG. 199) of the speaker unit 3400.

<Countermeasures against light leakage in the front top unit 3200>
FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing the top frame base and the top center panel viewed from slightly above in an exploded manner. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base as viewed from slightly above. FIG. 235 is a perspective view of the top center panel as viewed from the rear and slightly below. FIG. 236 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the front. FIG. 237 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel as viewed from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 238 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel. FIG. 239 is a perspective view of the top lens as viewed from below. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the top lens. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram of a top center LED substrate, a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel.

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top center panel 3290 has a front end edge 3211b of the upper surface wall 3211 in the top frame base 3210 and a front end edge 3214b and a fifth of the lower surface wall 3214. It generally matches the outer shape of the figure surrounded by the connecting portion 3222e and the sixth connecting portion 3222f. The top center panel 3290 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection 3222e, and sixth connection 3222f.

As a result, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the central region 3223a, the first left side region 3223b, the first right side region 3223c, the second left side region 3223d, and the second right side region 3223e of the top frame base 3210 (FIG. 204) is covered from the front by the top center panel 3290.

The upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 has an upper wall front side surface 3226. The shape of the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall substantially matches the shape of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290. In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is arranged on the upper side of the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210, and the upper end protrusion 3226 of the upper wall front side surface 3226. Covered by part 3297. At this time, the lower surface 3297b (see FIG. 235) of the upper end protruding portion 3297 is substantially in contact with the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall.

Further, the top frame base 3210 has a lower contact surface 3227 formed so as to project downward from the front portion of the lower surface wall 3214. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235, the top center panel 3290 has a lower contact surface 3298 near the lower end on the back side. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other.

For clarity, FIG. 233 shows the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 in diagonal lines, FIG. 234 shows the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 in diagonal lines, and FIG. 235 shows the top. The lower surface 3297b and the lower contact surface 3298 of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the center panel 3290 are shown in black. Hereinafter, the positional relationship between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 will be described in more detail.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the top frame base 3210 has an upper contact surface 3228 that is slightly erected upward from the rear end of the upper wall front side surface 3226. For clarity, FIG. 236 shows the upper contact surface 3228 in black. The upper end of the upper contact surface 3228 is continuous with the upper wall main surface 3211c. As a result, the upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 are connected by the upper contact surface 3228, and have a step on the upper contact surface 3228.

The upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 form the upper surface of the upper wall 3211. The trailing edge 3297c of the top protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210. Further, the upper end protruding portion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is formed so as to have a thickness (slightly smaller) similar to the length in the vertical direction of the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210.

As a result, in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 is substantially in contact with the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 in the entire left-right direction. ing. Then, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 and the upper wall main surface 3211c of the top frame base 3210 are positioned so as to form substantially the same plane.

Further, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 has a first lower contact surface 3227a and a second lower contact surface 3227b. The first lower contact surface 3227a is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction as a slightly curved curved surface on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3225a and the right side of the lower right protrusion 3225b (see FIG. 220). .. The second lower contact surface 3227b is formed from the lower left protruding portion 3225a to the lower right protruding portion 3225b. Although only the left side portion of the top frame base 3210 is shown in FIG. 236, the right side portion of the top frame base 3210 also has a similar structure.

Further, the front end edge 3214b of the lower surface wall 3214 in the top frame base 3210 is formed so as to project forward from the upper end of the first lower contact surface 3227a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 236, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 is shown by diagonal lines, and the front end edge 3214b and the second lower contact surface 3227b of the lower wall 3214 are shown in black.

The lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210, and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 and the top frame base 3210. The lower contact surface 3227 can be substantially brought into contact with the lower contact surface 3227 in the entire left-right direction.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237, the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a first lower contact surface 3298a and a second lower contact surface 3298b. The first lower contact surface 3298a is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction as a slightly curved curved surface on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3292d and the right side of the lower right protrusion 3293d. The second lower contact surface 3298b is formed from the lower left protruding portion 3292d to the lower right protruding portion 3293d. Although only the left side portion of the top center panel 3290 is shown in FIG. 237, the right side portion of the top center panel 3290 also has a similar structure.

The vicinity of the lower end portion on the back surface side of the lower left side portion 3292c and the lower right side portion 3293c (see FIG. 227) has a structure slightly bulging toward the rear, and the back surface of the bulging portion is the first lower portion. The side contact surface is 3298a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 237, the first lower contact surface 3298a is shown in diagonal lines and the second lower contact surface 3298b is shown in black. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 is substantially in contact with the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210, and the top center panel 3290 is the first. 2 The lower contact surface 3298b is substantially in contact with the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210.

In FIG. 238, the top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are vertically faced in the front-rear direction (the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the top frame base 3210). The state of cutting at the surface passing through the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 is shown. For clarity, FIG. 238 shows the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 in black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 in shades.

As shown in FIG. 238, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. ing. In FIG. 238, these substantially abutting portions (boundary portions) at the lower part of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 are shown as the boundary portion A. The lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is positioned in the vicinity of the boundary portion A. The top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 do not abut between the lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 and the boundary portion A, and the gap X is between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290. Is formed.

As shown in FIG. 239, a black light-shielding paint is applied to the lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280. As a result, the lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 has a light-shielding property and can block the passage of light. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating using a masking jig can be adopted. In FIG. 239, the lower end edge 3280a (the portion coated with the light-shielding paint) of the top lens 3280 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 240, the front surface (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) and the back surface (rear main surface 3282f and rear main surface 3382f) of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other. It is formed so as to be. The lower end edge 3280a is formed as a portion connecting these surfaces (a portion indicated by a thick line in the figure). Note that FIG. 240 shows a state in which the top lens 3280 is cut at a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 240, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines.

FIG. 241 schematically shows a state in which the top center LED substrate 3250, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 241 the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shaded, and the top reflector 3260 and the arrow-eye reflector 3270 are not shown. ..

As shown in FIG. 241, a part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252 and incident on the top lens 3280 is guided inside the top lens 3280 and reaches the lower end edge 3280a. However, since the lower end edge 3280a has a light-shielding property, the light cannot pass through the lower end edge 3280a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the lower end edge 3280a and leaking to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 from the very small gap formed in the gap X and the boundary portion A.

As shown in FIG. 238, the front end edge 3214b of the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is arranged above the boundary portion A. As a result, if there is a slight gap in the boundary portion A, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter through the gap, the front end edge 3214b may be an obstacle to prevent the intrusion. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto act from being performed through the gap.

As described above, the lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is coated with a black light-shielding paint (black coating is applied) so as to have a light-shielding property, but the upper end edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is this. It is not painted in black like this. This point will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 238, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other, and the top frame base The upper contact surface 3228 of 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. In FIG. 238, these substantially abutting portions (boundary portions) in the upper part of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 are shown as the boundary portion B. Further, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 do not abut between the upper end edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 and the boundary portion B, and the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 are not in contact with each other. A gap Y is formed.

Here, the boundary portion A is only a portion (vertical portion) in which the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. The structure of the boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is simple (a linear structure in a cross-sectional view). On the other hand, the boundary portion B is a portion (a portion in the front-rear direction) in which the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other and the top frame. It is composed of a portion (a portion in the vertical direction) in which the upper contact surface 3228 of the base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other, and the top frame base 3210 and the top. The structure of the boundary portion with the center panel 3290 is complicated and intricate (a structure bent in a cross-sectional view).

Therefore, the boundary portion B is more difficult for light to pass through than the boundary portion A, and even if the upper end edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 does not have a light-shielding property, the light passing through the upper end edge 3280b can pass through the gap Y and the boundary portion. It is unlikely that the light leaks to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through a very small gap formed in B. On the other hand, the light that has passed through the gap Y is incident on the upper end protruding portion 3297 of the top center panel 3290, which makes it possible to illuminate the upper end protruding portion 3297.

When the structure of the boundary portion between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is complicated, from the viewpoint that light does not easily leak from the boundary portion, for example, the lower end edge of the lower left protruding portion 3382d in the top lens 3280. And the lower end edge (see FIG. 239) of the lower right protruding portion 3283d may not be coated with the black coating as described above.

In FIG. 242, the top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are vertically faced in the front-rear direction (the lower left front convex portion 3482e and the top center panel 3290 of the top lens 3280). It shows a state of cutting at the lower left opening 3292e). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 242, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210 and the second lower contact surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. ing. On the upper side of the second lower contact surface 3298b in the top center panel 3290, a lower rear protrusion 3299 that protrudes rearward from the second lower contact surface 3298b is formed. On the other hand, on the upper side of the second lower contact surface 3227b in the top frame base 3210, a recess 3229 recessed with respect to the second lower contact surface 3227b is formed. The lower rear protrusion 3299 of the top center panel 3290 is housed in the recess 3229 of the top frame base 3210.

As described above, the boundary portion between the lower left protruding portion 3225a of the top frame base 3210 and the lower left protruding portion 3292d of the top center panel 3290 has a complicated structure, and it is unlikely that light leaks from the boundary portion. It has become. The same applies to the boundary portion between the lower right protruding portion 3225b of the top frame base 3210 and the lower right protruding portion 3293d of the top center panel 3290. Therefore, the lower end edge of the top lens 3280 arranged near these boundaries (the lower end edge of the lower left protruding portion 3382d and the lower end edge of the lower right protruding portion 3283d) is not painted in black as described above. It is possible, but of course black paint may be applied. Further, the upper end edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 may also be coated with black paint.

The method for imparting light-shielding property to the lower end edge 3280a and the upper end edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is not limited to painting, and a sticker (sheet) having light-shielding property may be attached to provide light-shielding property. Another member (for example, a member such as the side shading plate 3150 shown in FIG. 154) may be arranged below the lower end edge 3280a or above the upper end edge 3280b.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a light emitting decorative portion is made to emit strong light by using a light collecting member provided with a light reflecting portion to enhance the decorative effect (see JP-A-2017-018631).

The present inventor may be able to improve the aesthetics of the gaming machine by devising the configuration of the light guide member in the process of diligently studying the gaming machine provided with such a light emitting means. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the aesthetic appearance of a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) A light emitting means (center LED3252) capable of emitting light, and
A light guide member (top lens 3280) capable of guiding light emitted from the light emitting means, and
A first member (top center panel 3290) arranged on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means with respect to the light guide member is provided.
The light guide member includes a light suppressing portion (black coating portion) that suppresses the progress of light emitted from the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In developing the gaming machine according to the present invention, the present inventor has a first member (top center) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) with respect to the light guide member (top lens 3280). When the panel 3290) is arranged, it is assumed that the light may leak from an unintended place. Then, the present inventor has come up with the idea that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine can be improved by taking measures capable of preventing such light leakage. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light guide member (top lens 3280) has a light suppression unit (black coating unit) that suppresses the progress of light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252). ) Is provided. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize light emission in a desired manner around the first member (top center panel 3290), whereby the present inventor can improve the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine. succeeded in.

A predetermined gap exists on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) with respect to the light suppressing portion (black painted portion), and the light suppressing portion (black painted portion) is tentatively formed. If it is not provided, there is a concern that the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) may leak to the outside of the gaming machine through the gap. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage due to the presence of the light suppressing portion (black coating portion). The predetermined gap is not particularly limited as long as it has a space through which light can pass, and is formed at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and another member (game machine component). Examples include a gap, a hole (for example, a screw hole) provided in the first member (top center panel 3290), and the like. Measures that can prevent light leakage are not limited to black coating (application of light-shielding paint), but may be a sticker (sheet) having light-shielding property, or another member having light-shielding property may be attached. It may be arranged.

(A-2) The gaming machine of the above (A-1).
A second member (top frame base 3210) arranged so as to substantially abut with the first member is provided.
The light suppression portion is provided at a first position (lower end edge 3280a) in the light guide member, and is provided.
The first position is a boundary portion between the first member and the second member rather than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted. Close to
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to substantially abut with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light suppression portion (black coating) is provided. The portion) is provided at the first position (lower end edge 3280a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the first position (lower end edge 3280a) is the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). Is closer to the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which light can pass. .. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) and reaching the first position (lower end edge 3280a) in the light guide member (top lens 3280) passes through the first position (lower end edge 3280a). Even if there is a slight gap at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210), the outside of the gaming machine can be seen through the gap. It is possible to prevent light from leaking out.

In particular, since the second member (top frame base 3210) has a black appearance, light leaks from the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). Then, due to the contrast with the black second member (top frame base 3210), the light leakage becomes conspicuous, and there is a concern that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is greatly spoiled. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

The position (first position) where the measures capable of preventing light leakage are taken is not particularly limited, but for example, the measures are appropriately taken at the end edge (end portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). It is possible. At this time, the end edge (end portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is positioned near the boundary portion between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) (boundary portion). It is possible to dispose the light guide member (top lens 3280) so as to be close to the light guide member (top lens 3280). Alternatively, the light guide member so that the end edge (end portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) faces the boundary portion between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). (Top lens 3280) may be arranged.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially in contact with each other at the boundary portion A and the boundary portion B, respectively, and the boundary portion B is in contact with the boundary portion A. It was explained that it has a complicated structure in comparison. Specifically, the boundary portion B is a portion (referred to as a first portion) in which the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protruding portion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. It is composed of a portion (referred to as a second portion) in which the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. Assuming that the first portion and the second portion are flat, the angle between the normal in the first portion and the normal in the second portion is about 90 °.

The above matters are expressed more generically as follows. When the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially in contact with each other at the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) and the second boundary portion (boundary portion B), respectively. , The angle (of each normal) between the normal closest to the predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) and the normal farthest from each normal at any point on the first boundary (boundary A). The maximum value of the angle to be formed) is θ ₁ , and of the normals at any point on the second boundary (boundary B), the normal closest to the predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) and the farthest normal. Let θ ₂ be the angle formed by the lines (the maximum value formed by each normal). For example, when the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is configured such that flat surfaces are substantially in contact with each other, θ ₁ = 0. Further, the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) extends in the second direction (for example, in the vertical direction) with the portion where the flat surfaces extending in the first direction (for example, the front-rear direction) substantially come into contact with each other. When composed of a portion where existing flat surfaces are substantially in contact with each other, θ ₂ is an angle (for example, the vertical direction) between the first direction (for example, the front-back direction) and the second direction (for example, the vertical direction). , 90 °).

In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are abbreviated at the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) and the second boundary portion (boundary portion B), respectively. When in contact, of the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the edge (end) near the first boundary (boundary A) is the light suppression portion (black painted portion). ), On the other hand, it is possible to configure the end edge (end portion) near the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) so as not to be a light suppression portion (black painted portion). Such a configuration may be adopted when θ ₂ has a value larger than θ ₁ . Further, when θ ₁ is α or less (for example, 30 ° or less, 15 ° or less, 5 ° or less, etc.), the edge (end) near the first boundary (boundary A) is the light suppression portion (for example). It may be a black painted part). Further, when θ ₂ is β or more (for example, 45 ° or more, 60 ° or more, 75 ° or more, etc.), the edge (end) near the second boundary (boundary B) is set as the light suppression unit (end). It may not be a black painted part).

Further, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a contact surface X on the first member side (for example, the first lower contact surface 3298a) and a contact surface Y on the first member side (for example, the lower surface of the upper end protruding portion 3297). 3297b) and the first member side contact surface Z (for example, the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protruding portion 3297), and the second member (top frame base 3210) has the second member side contact surface X (for example). , 1st lower contact surface 3227a), 2nd member side contact surface Y (for example, upper wall front side surface 3226), and 2nd member side contact surface Z (for example, upper contact surface 3228). The first member-side contact surface X, the first member-side contact surface Y, and the first member-side contact surface Z are the second member-side contact surface X and the second member-side contact surface, respectively. In the case where Y and the second member side contact surface Z are substantially in contact with each other, the substantially contact portion between the first member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface X is the first boundary. It is configured as a portion (boundary portion A), and is a substantially contact portion (first portion) between the first member-side contact surface Y and the second member-side contact surface Y, and the first member-side contact surface Z and the first. 2. The substantially contact portion (second portion) with the contact surface Z on the member side may be configured as the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). When all of these contact surfaces are substantially flat, the angle between the normal on the first member-side contact surface Y and the normal on the first member-side contact surface Z (at the second member-side contact surface Y). The angle between the normal and the normal on the second member-side contact surface Z) is θ ₂ . Further, the normal direction on the second member-side contact surface Y (normal direction on the first member-side contact surface Y) and the end edge close to the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) (for example, the upper end edge 3280b). The angle between the normal direction (the direction of light emission at the edge) is γ or less (for example, 45 ° or less, 30 ° or less, 15 ° or less, etc.), or 0 ° (that is, these normal directions are). It may be configured to be substantially parallel).

As used herein, the term "substantially abutting" is a concept that includes not only a state in which two members are completely in contact with each other but also a state in which the two members are in close contact with each other. "Proximity" refers to a state in which the distance (gap) between two members is sufficiently small with respect to the size of these members. For example, the distance between two members is 1/20 or less (or 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the size (for example, the length in the left-right direction) of one member (for example, the smaller member). ), It can be said that these members are in close proximity. Alternatively, when the distance between the two members is 5 mm or less (or 2 mm or less, 1 mm or less, 0.5 mm or less, etc.), it may be said that these members are close to each other.

(A-3) The gaming machine according to (A-1) or (A-2).
A second member (top frame base 3210) arranged so as to substantially abut with the first member is provided.
The first member and the second member are vertically overlapped in the vicinity of the end edge (upper end edge 3280b) in the vertical direction of the light guide member.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to substantially abut with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light guide member (top lens). The first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped with each other in the vicinity of the end edge (upper end edge 3280b) in the vertical direction of 3280). Here, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) reaches the end edge (upper end edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the light emission direction at the end edge (upper end edge 3280b). Is upward or downward. On the other hand, if there is a slight gap in the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped, the extending direction of the gap is , Front-back direction or left-right direction (direction different from vertical direction). Therefore, even if the light emitted from the edge (upper end edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) enters the gap, the traveling direction of the light and the forming direction of the gap are different, so that the light is the light. It is difficult to pass through the gap. This makes it possible to prevent light from leaking to the outside of the gaming machine through the gap.

In the seventh embodiment, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped is the upper end edge (upper end edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). ) It was explained that it is placed in the vicinity. This makes it possible to prevent light leakage in the upward direction. In this respect, the upward light leakage is difficult to see from the player sitting in front of the table, but may be seen by other customers. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, this is the case. Good appearance can be achieved for other customers as well.

However, in the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped is the lower end edge (lower end edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). 3280a) It may be arranged in the vicinity. Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the first member (top center panel 3290) is arranged above the second member (top frame base 3210). In the present invention, the second member (top frame base 3210) may be arranged above the first member (top center panel 3290).

In the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped may constitute the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). good. Further, in the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are located near the edge (left edge or right edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) in the left-right direction. And may be configured to overlap on the left and right. In this case, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap each other on the left and right may form the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). .. In the second boundary portion (boundary portion B), the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially equivalent to each other as compared with the first boundary portion (boundary portion A). It may be configured so that the area of the contacting portion becomes large.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are at the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) and the second boundary portion (boundary portion B), respectively. It was explained that they were in contact with each other. In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are of the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) and the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). , It may be possible to make a substantially contact only at one of the boundary portions. At this time, the one boundary portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially come into contact with each other may be the first boundary portion (boundary portion A). It may be a second boundary portion (boundary portion B).

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3).
The first member has a translucent property and has a translucent property.
A plurality of colors are provided as the colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
The appearance of the first member when the light emitting means emits light of the first color (orange) and when the light emitting means emits light of the second color (white). Different colors,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the light of the first color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) and the second color (center LED3252) is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252). The appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290) is different from that when the light (white) is emitted. Thereby, by switching the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) according to the situation of the game, it is possible to realize an attractive light emitting effect.

As the light emitting means in the present invention, it is desirable to use a full-color LED, but it is also possible to use a monochromatic LED.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4).
The first member has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b).
The first region (first left front side convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member can be visually recognized through the first opening.
The second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member is visible through the second opening.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b). The first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is visible through the first opening (first left opening 3294a), and the second opening (first opening) (second opening). 2 The second region (second left front side convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is visible through the left side opening 3294b). As a result, the first region (first left front side convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) via the first opening (first left side opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left side opening 3294b). And the irradiation mode in the second region (second left front side convex portion 3284b) can be shown to the player, and a novel light emission effect can be realized. Further, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) are each configured as a part of one light guide member (top lens 3280). However, it is not necessary to fit the light guide member (lens) in each of the first opening (first left side opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left side opening 3294b) (light guide member (lens) for each opening). (It is sufficient to arrange one light guide member (top lens 3280) as a whole), so that the burden on the manufacturing process can be reduced. Further, when a light guide member (lens) is fitted in each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b), the number of parts increases, and the number of parts is managed accordingly. It is considered that the burden on the surface also increases, but according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, such a burden can be reduced.

As the first opening and the second opening in the present invention, a plurality of openings (central opening 3291a, first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, third) formed in the first member (top center panel 3290). Any two openings of the left side opening 3294c, the first right side opening 3295a, the second right side opening 3295b, the third right side opening 3295c, the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e) can be adopted. Further, as the first region and the second region in the present invention, a plurality of convex portions (center front convex portion 3281a, first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front side) formed on the light guide member (top lens 3280). Convex portion 3284b, third left front convex portion 3284c, first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, third right front convex portion 3285c, lower left front convex portion 3482e, and lower right front convex portion 3283e. ), It is possible to adopt two convex portions corresponding to the two openings in the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5).
The first member has openings (left side opening 3294 and right side opening 3295).
A specific region of the light guide member (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) can be visually recognized through the opening.
As the light emitting means, it is possible to emit light to a first light emitting means (center LED3252c and center LED3252e) capable of emitting light to the specific region and a region other than the specific region in the light guide member. A possible second light emitting means (center LED3252b and center LED3252d) is provided.
A partition member (left arrow eye reflector 3270L and right arrow eye reflector 3270R) for partitioning a passage path of light emitted from the first light emitting means and a passage path of light emitted from the second light emitting means is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has an opening (left side opening 3294 and right side opening 3295), and the opening (left side opening 3294 and right side opening). 3295), a specific region (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be visually recognized. Further, as the light emitting means (center LED3252), a first light emitting means (center LED3252c and center LED3252e) capable of emitting light to a specific area (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) and a light guide. A second light emitting means (center LED3252b and center LED3252d) capable of emitting light to a region other than a specific region (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) in the member (top lens 3280) is provided. The light passing path emitted from the first light emitting means (center LED3252c and center LED3252e) and the light passing path emitted from the second light emitting means (center LED3252b and center LED3252d) are separated from each other by a partition member (left arrow eye). It is partitioned by a reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R). As a result, using the first light emitting means (center LED3252c and center LED3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED3252b and center LED3252d), a specific region (left front side convex portion 3284 and right front side) in the light guide member (top lens 3280) is used. Since it is possible to irradiate the convex portion 3285) and the other regions individually, the first light emitting means (center LED3252c and center LED3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED3252b and center LED3252d) are used depending on the situation of the game. By switching each of the light emission modes of)), it is possible to realize a light emission effect rich in variation.

As the opening in the present invention, it is also possible to adopt the central opening 3291a. In this case, the central front convex portion 3281a is adopted as the specific area, the center LED 3252a is adopted as the first light emitting means, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252d are adopted as the second light emitting means, and the top reflector 3260 is adopted as the partition member. It is possible to adopt.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6).
A partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) for partitioning a region through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can pass is provided.
The tip end portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member is formed to be thinner than other portions of the partition member.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the region through which the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) can pass is partitioned by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270), and the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is partitioned. ) The tip portion (front side portion 3272) is formed to be thinner than other portions in the partition member. As a result, shadows due to the presence of the partition member (arrow-eye reflector 3270) are less likely to occur, and it is possible to realize a good-looking light-emitting effect.

In particular, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the tip end portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is substantially in contact with the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the partition member (top lens 3280) is substantially in contact with the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270). The arrangement is such that shadows are likely to occur due to the presence of the arrow-eye reflector 3270). If the tip portion (front side portion 3272) has the same thickness as the other portion (base portion 3271), it is considered that the possibility of such a shadow is increased. In this regard, in the seventh embodiment, the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) is made smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271) (tapered shape), whereby the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270). ) And the light guide member (top lens 3280) substantially abut on each other to reduce the area of the portion. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of such shadows.

In the seventh embodiment, in order to make the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271), it has been described that a step portion is provided between them. In the present invention, another shape can be adopted as long as the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) is smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271). For example, a partition member (arrow eye reflector) can be adopted. The wall surface (outer wall surface or inner wall surface) of 3270) may be configured to have a tapered shape.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7).
A partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) for partitioning a region through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can pass is provided.
The region partitioned by the partition member (the region surrounded by the peripheral wall portion of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) is emitted from the light emitting means rather than the third position as compared with the third position (the position closer to the light source). The fourth position (the position far from the light source) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the emitted light is larger.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the region through which the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) can pass is partitioned by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270), and the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is partitioned. The area partitioned by () (the area surrounded by the peripheral wall portion of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) is a light emitting means rather than the third position (position close to the light source) as compared with the third position (position close to the light source). The fourth position (position far from the light source) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from (center LED3252) is larger. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) can be advanced while being diffused, and a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be illuminated, and the partition member (arrow eye reflector) can be illuminated. Shadows due to the presence of 3270) can also be made less likely to occur.

As described above, the arrow-eye reflector 3270 has an inclination that spreads toward the downstream side (forward) in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252), and the inclination is tentatively the arrow eye. When the reflector 3270 and the top reflector 3260 are integrally molded, the inclination is opposite to the inclination of the tapered surface of the mold (the inclination for removing the resin part from the mold). Therefore, it is preferable to mold the arrow-eye reflector 3270 as a separate part from the top reflector 3260.

When an LED is used as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of LED is not particularly limited, and a so-called surface mount type LED may be adopted, or a so-called bullet type LED may be adopted. As the surface mount type LED, one in which a light emitting element is placed in a concave storage portion and the light emitting element is filled with a resin can be used. As the bullet-shaped LED, one in which the shape of the resin constituting the outer surface is formed into a bullet-shaped can be used. Since the bullet-shaped LED includes a bullet-shaped sealing resin, it generally has directivity and a narrow irradiation range as compared with the surface mount type LED.

As described above, it is desirable to use a surface mount type LED from the viewpoint of advancing the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) while diffusing it. This makes it possible to illuminate a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290). Further, since the amount of light contained in each unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the position of the light source. In this regard, there is a concern that the appearance will be poor if the position of the light source (LED particles) is completely visible to the player, but if a wide-angle type LED is used, such LED particles will be conspicuous. It is difficult and good design can be ensured.

Further, even if the light guide member (top lens 3280) is not arranged, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) is directly incident on the first member (top center panel 3290) to form a seventh. Although it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as in the embodiment, by disposing the light guide member (top lens 3280), the LED particles can be made less noticeable. Further, from the viewpoint of making the LED particles inconspicuous, the light guide member (top lens 3280) is made to have a predetermined color (top lens 3280) by mixing a pigment or a dye with the resin material before molding the light guide member (top lens 3280). For example, it may be colored milky white). Similarly, by mixing a pigment or a dye with a resin material before molding the first member (top center panel 3290), the first member (top center panel 3290) is colored into a predetermined color (for example, milky white). May be good. As a result, the entire light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) can be illuminated evenly and vaguely.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8).
The first member has translucency and has a metal surface formed on the outer surface.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a translucent property, and a metal surface is formed on the outer surface thereof. As a result, even in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252), the first member (top center panel 3290) has a metallic luster, so that an appearance excellent in design can be realized. can. Further, in a situation where light is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252), it is possible to change the appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290), and it is possible to change the appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290). The member (top center panel 3290) can be shown to the player.

As described above, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a half mirror provided with a metal surface. The half mirror is not limited to the one having a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror having an arbitrary transmittance can be appropriately adopted. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30% (for example, 20%) or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of tin, indium, silver, aluminum, etc. to be deposited. The thicker the metal surface, the lower the transmittance and the stronger the metallic luster. The method for forming the metal surface is not particularly limited, and the metal surface may be coated by plating, for example, in addition to metal vapor deposition. The color of the metal surface is not particularly limited, and any color can be adopted depending on the type of metal used.

The place where the metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290) is not particularly limited, and the metal surface is formed on an arbitrary place on the outer surface (surface visible from the outside) of the first member (top center panel 3290). It is possible to form. For example, in addition to the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290, a metal surface may be formed on the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297. Of course, no metal surface may be formed on the outer surface of the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9).
The first member has a translucent property and has a first region (front surface 3290a) and a second region (groove portion 3296) having a higher light transmittance than the first region.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has translucency, and the second region (groove portion 3296) is from the first region (front surface 3290a). The light transmittance is also high. As a result, the second region (groove portion 3296) is easier to pass the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) than the first region (front surface 3290a), and the region can be made to shine relatively strongly. can. In this way, an attractive light emission effect can be realized by providing a contrast in the light intensity between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296).

In the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed as a recess, and the thickness of the first member (top center panel 3290) in the front-rear direction is smaller than that of the first region (front surface 3290a). It has become. As a result, the second region (groove portion 3296) is relatively easy to pass the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252). In addition, the second region (grooved portion 3296) has a small amount of metal deposited and the metal film is relatively thin due to its shape (grooved). As a result, the difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296) is further increased. The second region (groove 3296) may be configured so that no metal film is formed. The method for causing a difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296) is not particularly limited, and other than the above, for example, the second region (groove portion 3296). The color of the above may be configured to be a color that allows light to pass through more easily than the color of the first region (front surface 3290a).

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed (linearly) so as to extend over a predetermined length. As a result, even in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252), the second region (groove portion 3296) can be shown as a line formed for the purpose of design, which gives a sense of discomfort. There is no. From such a viewpoint, it is desirable that the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed as a predetermined pattern. The shape of the pattern is not particularly limited, and may be formed in a line (straight line or curved line) shape, may be a geometric pattern, or may be composed of characters, figures, symbols, or a combination thereof. It may have been done.

As described above, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a member having decorativeness (decorative member). Further, the second member (top frame base 3210) can also be configured as a decorative member.

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10).
The light suppression portion is a portion of the light guide member that has been painted.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light suppression portion (black painted portion) is a painted portion of the light guide member (top lens 3280). As a result, even if the part where the progress of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED3252) should be suppressed has a complicated or fine structure, by applying the coating to the part, it is easy and low cost. , Can take measures that can prevent light leakage.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the light suppression portion (black coating portion) is formed by applying the black light-shielding paint. As the light-shielding paint, a conventionally known paint having a property of absorbing light can be appropriately adopted. For example, the light-shielding paint can be configured to include a resin material and a colorant, and any paint (acrylic resin paint, water-based acrylic resin paint, urethane-based paint, etc.) can be used as the resin material. Is. As the colorant, any pigment (for example, carbon black) or dye can be used. The color of the light suppression portion is not limited to black, and may be gray, for example. By changing the type and proportion of the pigment or dye contained in the light-shielding paint, it is possible to configure the light suppression portion in any color. The colorant may contain a plurality of types of pigments or dyes (black, white, red, yellow, blue, etc.).

In order to make the light leakage less noticeable, the edge of the first member (top center panel 3290) (the edge arranged near the light suppression portion (black paint portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280)). ) May also be coated with a light-shielding paint. However, if a metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290), the metal film may be peeled off during the painting work, so such a first member (top center panel 3290). It is desirable not to dare to paint on).

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for a game is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor may be able to enhance the power of video expression by devising the arrangement structure around the screen in the process of diligently studying a gaming machine equipped with such a projector. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the power of video expression.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Screen (center screen 3010) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
With a predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen.
The predetermined member is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector with respect to the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (center screen 3010) have the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) incident on the back side of the screen (center screen 3010). A predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) with respect to the screen (center screen 3010). With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the power of video expression using a screen (center screen 3010) can be enhanced. In this respect, by arranging a predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050), the screen (center screen 3010) is reinforced as compared with the case where the screen (center screen 3010) is provided alone, and the player This makes it possible to protect the screen (center screen 3010) even when an external force is applied. It was also considered to arrange such a predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). However, in this case, since the predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) exists on the front side of the screen (center screen 3010), the player sees the image through the predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050). become. Therefore, it is feared that the player is given the impression that the image is slightly in the back, and the player's immersive feeling for the image is reduced. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, such an impression can be dispelled, the power of the image expression can be enhanced, and the player's immersive feeling in the image can be enhanced. ..

(B-2) The gaming machine of the above (B-1).
The predetermined member protects the screen from the back side of the screen.
The screen constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) protects the screen (center screen 3010) from the back side of the screen (center screen 3010), and the screen (center). The screen 3010) constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1). As a result, it is possible to enhance the screen (center screen 3010), and since there is no member between the player and the screen (center screen 3010), it is displayed on the screen (center screen 3010). The image can be directly put into the eyes of the player, and the power and presence of the image expression can be further enhanced.

Further, for example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the translucent plate 1045 is arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1046. When such an aspect is adopted, the light in the game store (pachi-slot machine 1) is arranged. There is also a concern that the appearance of the image may be deteriorated due to the reflection of the light (light existing outside the screen) by the translucent plate 1045. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since the predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) exists on the back side of the screen (center screen 3010), it is possible to prevent such reflection. Therefore, the appearance of the image can be improved. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the presence of the translucent plate 1045 is particularly conspicuous when the pachi-slot machine 1 is viewed from the side, so that the pachi-slot machine 1 itself (not only the appearance of the image) itself. There is a concern that the appearance of the product will also deteriorate. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since no other member is present on the outside of the screen (center screen 3010), a sophisticated appearance can be realized.

(B-3) The gaming machine according to (B-1) or (B-2).
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape in the vicinity of at least one end portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape in the vicinity of at least one end portion. By displaying the image on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the displayed image, and it is possible to realize a highly realistic image expression.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that curved surface portions (left curved portion 3012L and right curved portion 3012R) are provided in the vicinity of the left end portion and the right end portion of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the position and the number of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) are not particularly limited. For example, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided only in the vicinity of one of the left end portion and the right end portion of the screen (center screen 3010), and the vicinity of the other end portion may be formed flat. .. Further, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction on the screen (center screen 3010). Further, the entire screen (center screen 3010) may be configured as a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012).

(B-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3).
A staging execution means (sub-control circuit 200) capable of executing a staging by controlling the projector is provided.
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature.
The effect executing means can display an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion in a visual manner such that a curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature exists on the curved surface portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature, and the curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature is a curved surface portion (curved portion). It is possible to display an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) in a visual mode as existing in the curved surface portion 3012). As a result, it is possible to realize a realistic image expression as if an object having the curved surface actually exists on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (center screen 3010).

The curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of bending of a curve or curved surface, but the degree of local bending can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the radius of curvature of the circumference of radius r is 1 / r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be expressed by the radius of the arc, while if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature is expressed by a predetermined function indicating the degree of bending of the curve. Can be done.

(B-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4).
Equipped with a three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape.
The three-dimensional decorative portion is arranged so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the curved surface portion in the front view.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and at least a part of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) is viewed from the front. ), A three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) are combined. , A three-dimensional sense of unity can be created between the image and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110).

Here, assuming that a translucent member (a member such as the translucent plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is arranged on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the screen (central screen 3010) and three-dimensional decoration are provided. Since the translucent member is interposed between the portion (side decorative portion 3110), the image (pillar image) displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) have a sense of unity. There is a concern that the screen will collapse and a sense of discomfort will occur. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since other members do not intervene between the screen (center screen 3010) and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110), such a sense of incongruity is eliminated. It is possible to enhance the above-mentioned sense of unity. Furthermore, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between these and the left side speaker unit 3400L and the right side speaker unit 3400R, and the appearance of the entire pachi-slot machine 1 can be refined.

In the seventh embodiment, the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110) is arranged so as to cover the rear side portion of the screen (center screen 3010), and a part of the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110) in front view. Was described as overlapping with a part of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). In the present invention, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be appropriately arranged in the vicinity of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). It does not have to cover 3012) at all. For example, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is arranged so as to be adjacent to the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the surface of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the surface of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) are arranged. It may form a substantially continuous surface.

(B-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5).
Equipped with a three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and also has a facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) facing the three-dimensional decorative portion corresponding to the shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion.
The three-dimensional decorative portion is arranged along the curved surface portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and a three-dimensional decorative portion along the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). (Side decoration portion 3110) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) are combined. , A three-dimensional sense of unity can be created between the image and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110). Further, the screen (center screen 3010) has a facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) facing the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110) corresponding to the shape of the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110). Therefore, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be arranged so as to be fitted to the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020). As a result, the relative positional relationship between the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) can be made appropriate, and the above-mentioned sense of unity can be reliably achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is formed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the forming position of the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is not particularly limited, and for example, the facing portion (side uneven portion 3013) is opposed to the portion continuous with the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) (for example, the rear side uneven portion 3013). 3020) may be formed. Further, the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) may be formed so as to straddle the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) and the portion (for example, the rear side portion 3013). The three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) may be arranged along the portion (for example, the rear side portion 3013). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is composed of both a concave portion (recessed portion 3021a, concave portion 3022a, and concave portion 3023a) and a convex portion (projection 3021b, protrusion 3022b, and protrusion 3023b). I explained it as a thing. The facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) in the present invention may be composed of only concave portions or may be composed of only convex portions. Further, the number of facing portions (side uneven portions 3020) is not limited, of course, and any number of facing portions (side uneven portions 3020) can be appropriately formed.

(B-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6).
A light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) arranged so as to prevent light projected by the projector from passing through the predetermined member and leaking is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, by disposing the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150), the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is a predetermined member (rear side light-transmitting plate 3050). It is possible to prevent leakage through the light. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) leaks from a part other than the screen (center screen 3010), the part will shine unnaturally and the appearance will be deteriorated. ) Can prevent such a situation from occurring.

(B-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7).
Light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) capable of emitting light, and
A light guide member (side light lens 3140) that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means, and
A light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) arranged so as to prevent the light projected by the projector from reaching the light guide member is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is transmitted to the light guide member (side light lens 3140) by disposing the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150). It is possible to suppress the arrival. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the light guide member (side light lens 3140), the light emitted from the light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). As a result of mixing with and, there is a concern that it will not be possible to produce the intended light emission, but the presence of the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) prevents such a situation from occurring. Can be done.

In the seventh embodiment, the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) is arranged so as to close the portion (gap) of the predetermined member (rear side light-transmitting plate 3050) that is not covered by the screen (center screen 3010). explained. The arrangement position of the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to block the light from passing through the gap and traveling ahead. Specifically, the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) may be arranged on the outer side of the pachi-slot machine 1 with respect to the predetermined member (rear-side light-transmitting plate 3050), or the predetermined member (rear-side light-transmitting plate). It may be arranged on the inner side of the pachi-slot machine 1 rather than 3050).

(B-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8).
A light reflecting unit (image reflecting surface 3216) arranged in the vicinity of the screen is provided, and the light reflecting unit can reflect at least a part of the image displayed on the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, a light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is arranged in the vicinity of the screen (center screen 3010), and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is a screen. It is possible to reflect at least a part of the image displayed on (center screen 3010). As a result, the image displayed on the screen (center screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) by being reflected by the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) are combined. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel image expression that cannot be perceived by the player only with the screen (center screen 3010).

Here, assuming that a translucent member (a member such as the translucent plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is arranged on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010). The translucent member is present between the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216). Therefore, due to the presence of the translucent member, the appearance of the image reflected on the reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) deteriorates (in particular, the display surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflection). There is a concern that the sense of unity of the image will be lost due to the inclusion of something like a streak in the boundary portion with the surface 3216). On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since there is no other member between the display surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216), the reflecting portion (center screen 3010) The image reflected on the image reflecting surface 3216) can be made clear, and the image displayed on the screen (center screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) can be shown integrally.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is configured by applying the reflective paint. The light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured as a mirror, may be configured by depositing a metal film, or may reflect light. It may be configured by attaching a sheet, or may be configured by performing mirror surface processing (reducing the surface roughness by polishing or cutting). Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the image reflecting surface 3216 is formed as the light reflecting portion, but in addition to the image reflecting surface 3216, the decorative surface 3217 may also be configured as the light reflecting portion. Further, as the light reflecting portion, it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that bulges forward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge (upper end, lower end, left end, right end, etc.) of the screen (center screen 3010). If the entire second member (top frame base 3210) has a reflection performance, the second member (top frame base 3210) after molding is not specially processed to form the light reflecting portion. ) (For example, the lower surface 3215 of the lower surface wall 3214) may be used as the light reflecting portion as it is.

(B-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9).
Protruding portions (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017) projecting from the surface of the screen are formed along at least a part of the peripheral edge of the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the protrusions (front upper end portion 3015 and front end portion 3015) projecting from the surface of the screen (central screen 3010) along at least a part of the peripheral edge of the screen (central screen 3010). The lower end portion 3017) is formed. As a result, when there is a gap between the surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and other members, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter through the gap, the protruding portion (front upper end portion) 3015 and the front lower end portion 3017) can be an obstacle to prevent the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto act from being performed through the gap. Further, the presence of the protruding portions (front upper end portion 3015 and front lower end portion 3017) makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the screen (center screen 3010), and even when a force is applied during assembly work or the like, the screen (front upper end portion 3015 and front lower end portion 3017) can be increased in rigidity. It is possible to prevent the central screen 3010) from being distorted.

In the seventh embodiment, the front upper end portion 3015, the front lower end portion 3017, the rear upper end portion 3019, and the rear lower end portion 3020 are provided as the protrusions of the screen (center screen 3010), and among these protrusions, the front end portion 3020 is provided. It has been described that the presence of the upper end portion 3015 and the front lower end portion 3017 can prevent the goto action. Similarly, the rear upper end portion 3019 and the rear lower end portion 3020 may be configured to have a function of preventing the wire-shaped instrument from invading, thereby preventing a rattling action. ..

(B-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10).
Through holes (through holes 3016L and through holes 3016R) are formed in the screen.
The predetermined member is fixed by screw fastening using the through hole.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) is formed with through holes (through holes 3016L and through holes 3016R), and the predetermined member (rear side light transmitting plate 3050) is formed. , Is fixed by screw fastening using the through holes (through holes 3016L and through holes 3016R). Thereby, the screen (center screen 3010) can be arranged at an appropriate position through the fixing of the predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050).

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen) is fastened by screwing via a predetermined member (rear side translucent plate 3050) or the top frame base 3210 without performing such pressing. 3010) is fixed. As a result, parts such as the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are unnecessary, and the cost can be reduced. Since the screen sheet 1046 in the fifth embodiment is a flexible thin sheet-like screen, expansion and contraction is likely to occur due to a change in humidity. Therefore, if it is fixed so as to be in close contact with other members by screwing, there is a concern that it will be damaged due to expansion and contraction, and it is desirable to perform the above-mentioned pressing. On the other hand, the screen (center screen 3010) in the seventh embodiment has rigidity with a certain thickness (for example, 2 mm), and expansion and contraction does not occur so much even if the humidity changes. Therefore, even if the screws are fastened, the damage is unlikely to occur, and it is possible to adopt the above configuration. The thickness of the screen (center screen 3010) is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 1 mm to 5 mm (or about 1.5 mm to 3 mm, or about 1.8 mm to 2.5 mm). Thinning the screen (center screen 3010) increases the resolution of the image, but it increases the possibility of damage when it is removed from the mold. The thickness of the screen (center screen 3010) can be appropriately determined in consideration of this point.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment also applies to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment is limited to, for example, "in the first embodiment" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment". Even if it is described above, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the eighth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, even if the description is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments, the pachi-slot according to the eighth embodiment is not deviated from the purpose of the eighth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to seventh embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eighth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachi-slot machine 1 has the same shape and the same processing as those of the first to seventh embodiments, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Rock production>
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “1”. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “2”. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “3”. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “4”. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “5”. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a specific mode of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6”.

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect of stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period (invalidating the player's game operation for a predetermined period). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the reel effect or the pseudo game can be executed during the execution of the lock effect.

As described in the first embodiment, the reel effect rotates or stops each reel 3L, 3C, 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated. (Temporary stop) is used to produce the effect. Further, the pseudo-game pseudo-accepts the player's game operation during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The production is done by doing something like that.

In the lock effect (reel effect or pseudo game), the combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed, but the player may be given a privilege based on the stop display of the combination of the symbols. do not have. For example, even if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the reel effect or the simulated game matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14), the combination of the symbols corresponds to the combination of the symbols. No medals will be paid out.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the reel effect or the pseudo game, the AT state may be entered. In a state where it has already been decided to shift to the AT state, it is notified (suggested) that it has been decided to shift to the AT state via a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment). It is not determined to shift to the AT state in response to the stop display of a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment).

In the present embodiment, as such a lock effect, a lock effect (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect numbers “1” to “6”) as shown in FIG. 243 is provided. The lock effects corresponding to the lock effect numbers "1" to "6" are one of the following lock effects (i) to (iv), or two locks of these lock effects, respectively. It is composed of a combination of staging.

(I) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the reel production (ii) "Red 7" symbols are not aligned in the reel production (iii) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the simulated game (iv) "Red 7" is aligned in the simulated game The patterns are not aligned

In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", the effect of (i) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2", the effect of (ii) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3", the effect of the above (iii) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4", the effect of the above (iv) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", the effect (i) is performed after the effect (iv) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6", the effect of the above (iii) is performed after the effect of the above (iii) is performed.

In this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment is used, and the "red 7" is arranged at the symbol position "0". In FIGS. 244 to 249, numbers indicating the symbol positions corresponding to the symbols to be stopped and displayed are also shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “1”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts (see FIG. 244 (a)), the player The rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically) regardless of the stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 244 (b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 244 (c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 244 (d)). ..

As shown in FIG. 245, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “2”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts (see FIG. 245 (a)), the player stops the reel. Then, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically), and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 245 (b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 245 (c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1"" is displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L. ) Is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 245 (d)).

As shown in FIG. 246, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “3”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has started (see FIG. 246 (a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 246 (b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 246 (c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 246 (d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “4”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has started (see FIG. 247 (a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 247 (b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 247 (c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 247 (d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “5”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has started (see FIG. 248 (a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 248 (b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 248 (c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 248 (d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging. After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see FIG. 248 (e)), the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and " "Red 7" is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 248 (f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6”, after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts (see FIG. 249 (a)), the player stops the reel. Then, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically), and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 249 (b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 249 (c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1"" is displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L. ) Is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 249 (d)). After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see FIG. 249 (e)), the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 249 (f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C do not swing. After "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C may swing at a predetermined timing as in the case of the left reel 3L.

<Rock production decision processing>
FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process (state control process at the start of the game) in step S6 of FIG. 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1001). As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and the advantageous section is an effect section ( An advantageous section / normal game) and an increase section (advantageous section / pseudo-bonus) are provided (see FIG. 5). The effect section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is the same as the non-advantageous section in that the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, but the mode transition is It differs from the non-advantageous section in that it is done. The increased section is an AT state (a gaming state advantageous to the player).

When it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress (step S1002). As described in the first embodiment, the pseudo bonus is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress by referring to the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

If it is determined that the pseudo-bonus is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game has shifted to the pseudo-bonus this time (step S1003). As described in the first embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), when the advantageous section is won as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination. A subflag (see FIG. 7A) is determined. Then, in the production section (advantageous section / normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7 (c)) is referred to, and the lottery based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is performed. By doing so, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery. As "winning", "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided.

When the "winning (current game)" is determined, for example, in step S106 of the game start processing (see FIG. 28) during the advantageous section in the current game (game in which the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is performed). The bit corresponding to the "pseudo-bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when the "winning (this game)" is decided, the game shifts from this game to a pseudo bonus. Similarly, when the "winning (next game)" is determined, for example, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section in the next game (the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus transition lottery is performed) (FIG. 28). In step S106 of (see), the bit corresponding to the "pseudo-bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when the "winning (next game)" is decided, the pseudo bonus is transferred from the next game.

When it is determined that it is not the game this time that the pseudo bonus has been transferred, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1G continuous lottery has been won (step S1004). As described in the first embodiment, in the pseudo-bonus, the 1G continuous lottery table (see FIG. 7D) is referred to, and the lottery (1G continuous lottery) based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is performed. As a result, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined as a result of the 1G continuous lottery. As the "winning prize", "winning prize (1G ream + 1)" is provided.

When "winning (1G consecutive +1)" is determined, for example, one right (1G consecutive stock) to generate 1G consecutive is granted in step S103 of the game start processing (see FIG. 28) during the advantageous section. (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). If the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock) at the end of the pseudo bonus, one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter is used). 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the game has shifted to the pseudo-bonus this time, or if it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G continuous lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 has lock effect numbers "1" and "6" ( (See FIG. 243) is selected by lottery (step S1005). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1006), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is performed. The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is an effect corresponding to the "red 7-matched" effect described in the first embodiment. In addition, when the 1G consecutive lottery is won, a lock effect different from the lock effect (“red 7 set” effect) performed when shifting to the pseudo bonus (for example, the special bonus medium effect described in the first embodiment). ) May be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the pseudo-bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special lock effect generation condition is satisfied (step S1007). As described in the first embodiment, in the special lock effect, a “fixed combination” (see FIG. 7 (a)) is determined as a sub-flag when the advantageous section is won, and a mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8 (f)) is determined. This is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when it is decided to shift to the heaven C mode (see FIG. 6). That is, as for the special lock effect generation condition, a "fixed combination" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the heaven C mode by the mode transition lottery, and the special lock effect that can be won with a predetermined probability is determined. It is to win the occurrence lottery.

If the "fixed combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the "winning (next game)" is always determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see Fig. 7 (c)), and the pseudo-bonus. The transition to is confirmed. In addition, the heaven C mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to continue. When the pseudo-bonus starts, the ceiling shortening lottery table (see FIG. 8E) is referred to, and a lottery based on random values (ceiling shortening lottery) is performed, so that the ceiling shortening lottery results in "winning" or "winning". "Non-win" is decided. If the "win" is determined, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. The heaven C mode is a mode in which the ceiling shortening lottery can be won (heaven mode), and the heaven mode is easily maintained (a mode advantageous for the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G continuous lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect generation condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect lottery (step S1008). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines "winning" or "non-winning" by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect lottery has been won (step S1009). If it is determined that the lock effect lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1010). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1011), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" (so-called "gase effect") is performed.

When it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect generation condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1012). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is performed.

The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is an effect corresponding to the special lock effect described in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the special lock effect can be configured not to be executed when the degree of progress of the game (game history) in the advantageous section satisfies a predetermined condition. As such a game history, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. (values referred to in the limit processing) are used. Can be adopted. An upper limit (limiter) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues, and the limit process is a process for terminating the advantageous section by reaching the limiter (see FIG. 16).

In the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250, a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is performed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery or the 1G continuous lottery is won (lock effect number "3"). And the lock effect corresponding to "5" is not performed). However, in the present embodiment, the lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" may be performed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery or the 1G continuous lottery is won. As described in the first embodiment, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the 1G continuous lottery is not executed (see FIG. 16). Further, when the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo-bonus transition lottery and the 1G continuous lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004, and step S1007 of FIG. 250 are all "NO", and the lock effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, for example, the variables in the advantageous section (value of advantageous section game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous section payout number counter, value of control payout number counter, or When the value (value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, etc.) becomes a predetermined value or more, the lock effect (pseudo game as a special lock effect) is not executed. It is possible.

<Lock effect execution process>
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in the simulated game.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is a process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see step S1006, step S1011, and step S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1021). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the lock command generation / storage process (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the reel lock has been started, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data corresponding to various lock effects. As a result, for example, when the lock effect corresponding to any one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), "7" shown in FIG. 252. The effect image 1100 is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is a stop operation in the order of "right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L" and at the timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is an image suggesting that the above is performed. By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible to have the player operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R in the suggested order, and as a result, the player is allowed to participate in the simulated game. Can be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to off (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect acceleration process (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is requested, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled by the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is started. Then, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and then is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained. The rotation mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R until the constant speed is reached is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation), and reel actions such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, and a combination thereof can be performed. It may be included. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed without maintaining the rotational state at a constant speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), the main CPU 101 rotates each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in the manner shown in FIGS. 244 to 249 by switching the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time. Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled so as to stop. When accelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the exciting phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the exciting phase is excited based on the constant speed excitation pattern. When decelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the exciting phase is excited based on the deceleration excitation pattern. When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in the stopped state, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the exciting phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When swinging the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the exciting phase is excited based on the swinging excitation pattern. Each excitation pattern is retained for a predetermined time. The time is managed by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). The excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, 1-2-phase excitation, or the like can be appropriately adopted. Further, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R may be PM type stepping motors or HB type stepping motors. The drive system may be a bipolar system or a unipolar system.

After executing the process of step S1024, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-game in-game flag is set to ON (step S1025). The pseudo-game in-game flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo-game is being executed. Although not shown, when the lock effect corresponding to any one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game in-game flag to ON in the process of step S1024. Perform processing at the same time. Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6” is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 249 (d)) for maintaining the left reel 3L in the stopped state in the reel effect. At this time (when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the pseudo-game in-game flag is set to ON.

If it is determined that the pseudo-game in-game flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo-game in-game process (step S1026). The processing during the simulated game will be described later with reference to FIG. 253.

If it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-gaming flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect end flag is set to ON. (Step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “1” or “2” is selected, the main CPU 101 controls to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state (FIGS. 244 (d) and FIG. When starting (see 245 (d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the lock effect end flag is set to ON. Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 controls to swing the left reel 3L (see FIGS. 246 (d) and 247 (d)). (When all the stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in the pseudo game are completed), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1073 in FIG. 254). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “5” is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 248 (f)) to swing the left reel 3L stopped after the re-rotation (see FIG. 248 (f)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the re-rotation of the left reel 3L), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1084 in FIG. 255). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6” is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 249 (f)) to swing the left reel 3L stopped after the re-rotation (see FIG. 249 (f)). When the stop operation for the left reel 3L in the simulated game after the re-rotation is completed), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1112 in FIG. 256).

If it is determined that the lock effect end flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect end flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to on (step S1028), and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used for performing random delay processing. As described in the first embodiment, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after the lock effect, and then starting the rotation. This is done to prevent the player from easily performing "pushing" as a result of the production. The details of the random delay processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 258.

<Processing during pseudo-game>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game in-game process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 253 is a process performed in step S1026 of FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number “6” (step S1041).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not the lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 normally executes the pseudo-game in-game process (step S1042). The normal pseudo-game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 254. After executing the process of step S1042, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo-game in-game process after the reel effect (step S1043). The processing during the simulated game after the reel production will be described later with reference to FIG. 256. After executing the process of step S1043, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during normal pseudo-game>
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is a process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-game process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the normal pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1061 to S1068, and these processes are basically the same as the processes of steps S111 to S120 of FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). It is the same process.

Here, in the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254, the process corresponding to step S116 and step S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding pieces (see step S117) is not determined, and in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 is predetermined as a position where the symbol finally stops regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). The position is determined and stored as the planned stop position. As a result, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped in the manners shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to (d), 247 (b) to (d), and 248 (b) to (d). do. In the simulated game, the predetermined symbol may be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, or the reel stop control process (in the main game) shown in FIG. 29. Similarly, control to stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be performed based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols are not aligned. It will be. When each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the simulated game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game. It may be larger than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or may be smaller than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Further, in step S111 of FIG. 29, 80 rotations / minute has been described as an example of the speed (constant speed rotation speed) when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating at a constant speed. The constant speed rotation speed in the simulated game may be the same as the constant speed rotation speed in the main game (for example, 80 rotations / minute), or is faster than the constant speed rotation speed in the main game (for example, 90 to 1 minute). It may be 180 rotations / minute or 120 to 160 rotations / minute, or slower than the constant speed rotation speed in the main game (for example, 10 to 60 rotations / minute, or 30 to 45 rotations / minute). 1 minute) may be used. Further, in the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254, in the pseudo-game, as in the main game, each stop button 8L waits for the rotation speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R to reach the constant speed rotation speed. , 8C, 8R are to be enabled (see step S1062). However, in the simulated game, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R may be activated before the rotation speeds of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reach the constant speed rotation speed.

After executing the process of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the controlled reel (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control for decelerating the rotation of the reel to be controlled has been completed. When the holding time of the deceleration excitation pattern has expired (when the time required to stop the rotation of the controlled reel has elapsed), the main CPU 101 has finished the control of decelerating the rotation of the controlled reel (control). It can be recognized that the target reel has stopped).

If it is determined that the reel to be controlled is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the reel to be controlled (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the swinging excitation pattern for swinging the controlled reel. As a result, the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the reel to be controlled is driven and controlled, and the reel to be controlled swings in a predetermined mode. The excitation pattern for rocking is not particularly limited, but it is possible to adopt a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so as to repeat the excitation pattern I and the excitation pattern II as described below.

Although not shown, four exciting phases (A phase, B phase, C phase, and D phase) are sequentially arranged clockwise in each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and the 1-2 phase excitation is performed. Eight excitation patterns (A phase-B phase, B phase, B phase-C phase, C phase, C phase-D phase, D phase, D phase-A phase, and A phase) are provided as patterns. There is. For example, the excitation pattern (for example, B-phase to C-phase) having an offset value of 2 from the reference excitation pattern as the excitation pattern I is held for time T ₁ (for example, 30 interruption time), and the above-mentioned excitation pattern I is performed. As the excitation pattern II, a configuration is adopted in which the excitation pattern (for example, A phase-B phase) in which the offset value from the reference excitation pattern is 0 is held for time T ₂ (for example, 300 interruption time). It is possible to do. It is desirable that T ₂ is less than 500 ms, and the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ is also preferably less than 500 ms. For example, T ₁ is set to a time of about 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms). , T ₂ can be set to a time of about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). Further, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the excitation pattern for rocking is performed is larger than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the excitation pattern for stopping is performed. It may be configured to be about the same as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the constant speed excitation pattern is performed. For example, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the excitation pattern for rocking is performed is the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for acceleration or the excitation pattern for deceleration. It may be about 60% (for example, about 40 to 80% or about 50 to 70%).

By driving and controlling the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be swung up and down (FIGS. 246 (b) to (d), FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), and FIGS. 248. (B)-(d)). The swing mode of the reel 3 is not particularly limited as long as the reel 3 is moving to the extent that the player can recognize it. However, since "vibration" is a slight vibration and can be called "temporary stop", the width of the vibration is one symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol), 1 It is desirable not to exceed / 8 symbols or 1/16 symbols). Note that "swing" is a concept that includes not only the case where the reel 3 operates at a constant cycle but also the case where the reel 3 operates aperiodically. Further, when the period in which the reel 3 is substantially completely stopped is included in the "swing", the period is less than 500 ms (for example, 100 to 490 ms or 200 to 450 ms). Is desirable. That is, when the reel 3 performs some operation within a range of less than 500 ms, it can be called "swing".

After executing the process of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button 8L, 8C, 8R exists (step S1071). This process is the same as the process of step S121 of FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R exist, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1063. On the other hand, when it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R do not exist, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". (Step S1072).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to on (step S1073), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes the post-pseudo-game reel effect process (step S1074). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 255. After executing the process of step S1074, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Reel production processing after pseudo game>
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a simulated post-game reel effect process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game post-reel effect process shown in FIG. 255 is a process performed in step S1074 of FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-game in-process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the post-pseudo-game reel effect processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes a reacceleration process (step S1081). This process is the same as the process of step S1024 of FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process). In the process of step S1024, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, but in the process of step S1081, the main CPU 3031 requests only the start of rotation of the left reel 3L. Other points are as described in step S1024. By executing the process of step S1081, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 248 (e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is the same as the process in step S1069 of FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-game processing). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the rerotation of the left reel 3L.

If it is determined that the left reel 3L has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes a control to swing the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-game processing). As a result, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 248 (f)).

After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084), and ends this subroutine.

<Processing during pseudo-game after reel production>
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing a process during pseudo-game after reeling performed in the main control circuit.

The post-reel effect pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256 is a process performed in step S1043 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-game process) in the main control circuit 100. As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6” is selected, a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see step S1024 in FIG. 251) has started. Occasionally, the pseudo-playing flag is set to on. As a result, the determination result of step S1025 in FIG. 251 becomes “YES”, and the process during the simulated game after the reel effect shown in FIG. 256 is started.

In the process during the pseudo-game after reel effect, first, the main CPU 101 executes the process of generating and storing the pseudo-game start command after reel effect (step S1101). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data after reel effect, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data after reel effect in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The post-reel effect pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the reel effect of the above (iii) is completed and the pseudo game of the above (iii) is started (see FIG. 243), and various effects can be obtained. It is possible to determine the timing and the like to execute. Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo game start command data after the reel effect, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data corresponding to the end of the reel effect and the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image having the content of "striking the lever" ("striking the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the reacceleration process (step S1103). This process is the same as the process of step S1081 of FIG. 255 (pseudo-game reel effect process). As a result, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 249 (e)). As described above, in the post-reel effect pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256, it is described that the left reel 3L is rerotated on condition that the start lever 7 is operated after the reel effect is completed. However, the re-rotation of the left reel 3L may be automatically performed after the end of the reel effect (when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has stopped in the reel effect). good.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant speed rotation speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant speed rotation speed in the simulated game may be different from the constant speed rotation speed (80 rotations / minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in FIG. 254). When it is determined that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant speed rotation speed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1104 again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant speed rotation speed, the main CPU 101 permits the stop of the left reel 3L (step S1105). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21). As a result, the left stop button 8L is activated. As described above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotation speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant speed rotation speed (see step S1062 in FIG. 254).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1106 to S1111. These processes are basically the same as the processes of steps S1063 to S1070 of FIG. 254. In the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled. In the processing, the left reel 3L is the control target reel. By executing the process of step S1111, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 249 (f)). After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112), and ends this subroutine.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit.

The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 257 is a process performed in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the reel rotation start processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the random delay flag (see step S1028 in FIG. 251) is set to ON (step S1121).

When it is determined that the random delay flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the random delay flag was set to on (after the lock effect is completed). Step S1122). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1122 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes random delay processing (step S1123). As described above, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after the lock effect, and then starting the rotation. The details of the random delay processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the process of step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to off (step S1124), and ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the normal acceleration process (step S1125). This process is as described in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process). In the process of step S1125, unlike the random delay process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at the same time. As a result, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is started and accelerated at the same time, and the constant speed is reached at the same time. After executing the process of step S1125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In the reel rotation start processing shown in FIG. 257, it is described that when the lock effect is completed, the random delay processing is automatically executed without requiring an operation by the player. However, after the lock effect is completed, the random delay process may be executed on condition that the player operates (for example, the start lever 7 operation). In this case, for example, when the determination result in step S1122 is "YES", the above-mentioned "slap the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure the random delay process (process of step S1123) to start at the timing when the start lever 7 is operated. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "slap the lever" image is displayed, the random delay processing may be started at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed.

<Random delay processing>
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing a random delay process performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay process shown in FIG. 258 is a process performed in step S1123 of FIG. 257 (reel rotation start process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the random delay processing, first, the main CPU 101 acquires a random value for the left reel, a random value for the middle reel, and a random value for the right reel (step S1141). The left reel random value, the middle reel random value, and the right reel random value are random values for randomly determining the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. In the process of step S1141, the main CPU 101 acquires a numerical value of 1 out of 0 to 20 as a random number value for the left reel, acquires a numerical value of 1 out of 0 to 20 as a random number value for the middle reel, and right reel. A numerical value of 1 out of 0 to 20 is acquired as a random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the values corresponding to the left reel random value, the middle reel random value, and the right reel random value to the left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel, respectively. It is set in the acceleration timer (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value obtained by multiplying the left reel random value by a predetermined number (for example, 32) in the left reel acceleration timer, and sets the middle reel random value to a predetermined number (for example, 32). Is set in the middle reel acceleration timer, and the value obtained by multiplying the right reel random value by a predetermined number (for example, 32) is set in the right reel acceleration timer. For example, if the random value for the left reel is 5, "160" is set in the timer for accelerating the left reel, and if the random value for the middle reel is 10, "320" is set in the timer for accelerating the left reel. If the random value for the right reel is 15, "480" is set in the timer for accelerating the right reel. The left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer are each decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel 3L has been accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag (see step S1146) is set to ON. When it is determined that the left reel 3L has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). If it is determined that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes the left reel acceleration process (step S1145). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as that used when accelerating the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1146).

If it is determined in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after the process of step S1146 is executed, the main CPU 101 uses the middle reel. It is determined whether or not 3C has been accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated when the middle reel accelerated flag (see step S1150) is set to ON. When it is determined that the middle reel 3C has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the middle reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). If it is determined that the middle reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes the middle reel acceleration process (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase to be excited based on the same excitation pattern as that used when accelerating the middle reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the middle reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1150).

If it is determined in step S1147 that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1148 that the middle reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after the process of step S1150 is executed, the main CPU 101 uses the right reel. It is determined whether or not the 3R has been accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has been accelerated when the right reel accelerated flag (see step S1154) is set to ON. When it is determined that the right reel 3R has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). If it is determined that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes the right reel acceleration process (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as that used when accelerating the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the right reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1154).

If it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after the process of step S1154 is executed, the main CPU 101 performs all of the operations. It is determined whether or not the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 recognizes that all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag, the middle reel accelerated flag, and the right reel accelerated flag are all set to ON. can do. If it is determined that at least one reel 3 has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1143. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have been accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is randomly determined, and in this respect, the random delay processing (acceleration processing of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R when the lock effect is performed) is usually performed. It is different from the time acceleration process (acceleration process of reels 3L, 3C, 3R when the lock effect is not performed). However, the behavior of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after rotation (the time from the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R to the constant speed) is different from the case where the lock effect is performed and the lock effect. It is the same as when it was not done.

<Reel control state in simulated game>
FIGS. 259 to 261 are diagrams showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed.

259 and 260 show the relationship between the operation by the player and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “3” (see FIG. 243) is performed. FIG. 261 shows the relationship between the operation by the player and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6” (see FIG. 243) is performed. In the figure, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is the acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is the constant speed control state, and "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is the reel control state. "Stop" indicates that the deceleration control state is in the deceleration control state, "stop" indicates that the reel control state is in the stop control state, and "swing" indicates that the reel control state is in the swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration, and the constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed, and deceleration control is performed. The state is a state in which the exciting phase is excited based on the deceleration excitation pattern, the stop control state is the state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the stop excitation pattern, and the swing control state is. It is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for rocking. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in the reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 recognizes the current reel control state by referring to the reel control state flag storage area, and in the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), based on the excitation pattern corresponding to the reel control state. Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled so that the excitation phase is excited.

In the example shown in FIG. 259, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R Is in a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the first stop reel is changed to the deceleration control state. When the rotation of the first stop reel is stopped, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (second stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the second stop is performed. When the rotation of the reel is stopped, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the third stop is performed. When the rotation of the reel is stopped, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. Then, when the random delay processing is performed after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the swing control state, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R accelerates at a random timing. After that, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes a constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R Is in a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the first stop reel is changed to the deceleration control state. When the rotation of the first stop reel is stopped, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (second stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the second stop is performed. When the rotation of the reel is stopped, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the third stop is performed. When the rotation of the reel is stopped, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the swing control state, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the stop control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled at a constant speed. It becomes a state.

As described above, when the random delay processing is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 259, the swing control state is directly shifted to the acceleration control state, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 260, the swing control state is performed. It is decided to shift to the stop control state once, and then shift from the stop control state to the acceleration control state. In the present embodiment, the stop control state may or may not be interposed between the swing control state and the acceleration control state. When the stop control state is intervened, the timing of shifting from the swing control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes “YES”, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be shifted from the swing control state to the stop control state. Further, when shifting from the pseudo game to the main game (for example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes “YES”), the above-mentioned “slap the lever” image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256). May be displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be changed from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swing of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R ends at the same time when the stop control state is entered. The timing may be before the start of the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) or after the start of the random delay process. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing may be terminated at different timings for each reel 3 (in the order in which the stop operations are performed). For example, for each reel 3, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel control state shifts to the swing control state (after the rotation stops), the swing control state shifts to the stop control state. May be good.

In the example shown in FIG. 261, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R Is in a constant speed control state. After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) becomes the stop control state via the deceleration control state regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). .. Similarly, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically), the reel control state for the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) becomes the stop control state via the deceleration control state. Similarly, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically), the reel control state for the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) becomes the stop control state via the deceleration control state. After that, the above-mentioned "slap the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, reel control for the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is performed. The state becomes the constant speed control state through the acceleration control state. Then, when the stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stop reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation is the deceleration control state. When the rotation of the third stop reel is stopped, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes the acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled at a constant speed. It becomes a state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 261, the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped. The reel control state does not become the swing control state after the stop. As described above, in the present embodiment, when one reel 3 is stopped regardless of the player's stop operation, it is possible to configure the reel 3 so as not to swing. For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped, the third stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped according to the player's stop operation. When the rotation of the left reel 3L) is stopped, when the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung. When the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped, the reel 3 may be swung. In this case, as in the example shown in FIG. 261, the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is automatically stopped once, and the third stop reel is stopped again in response to the stop operation performed after the re-rotation. Alternatively, the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) may be stopped automatically in response to the stop operation (from the beginning without going through the re-rotation) without automatically stopping the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L). The reel 3L) may be stopped. Similarly, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is automatically stopped, the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are made according to the player's stop operation. For example, when the rotation of the left reel 3L) is stopped, the reel 3 is not swung when the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is stopped, while the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and When the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped, these reels 3 may be swung. In the above, it has been described that the reel 3 to be stopped first is automatically stopped, and the reel 3 to be stopped later is stopped according to the stop operation of the player, but conversely, it is stopped first. The reel 3 may be stopped in response to the player's stop operation, and the reel 3 to be stopped later may be automatically stopped.

In this embodiment, even if one reel 3 is stopped regardless of the player's stop operation, the reel 3 can be configured to swing. For example, when the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is automatically stopped in the manner shown in FIG. 261, the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is automatically stopped. , The first stop reel (eg, right reel 3R) is swung when the right reel 3R) is stopped, and the second stop reel (eg, middle reel 3C) is shaken when the second stop reel (eg, middle reel 3C) is stopped. The reel 3C) may be swung to swing the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) when the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped.

In FIGS. 259 to 261, the player operates one stop button 8 and the stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an on state to an off state, that is, an off edge. After that, the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 is shown as a swing control state. In the present embodiment, when the stop button 8 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (off-edge), the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may start swinging, or the stop button 8 may start swinging. When the non-operating state is changed to the operating state (the stop switch 8S is changed from the off state to the on state, that is, it is on the edge), the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may be started to swing. .. For example, when the first stop operation is on-edge (no swing of the first stop reel) → when the first stop operation is off-edge (start of swing of the first stop reel) → when the second stop operation is on-edge (second stop reel) No swing) → Off-edge of the second stop operation (start of swing of the second stop reel) → On-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → Off-edge of the third stop operation ( It may be configured so as to start swinging of the third stop reel).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped according to the stop operation of the player (FIGS. 259 and FIGS. When the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung, and the third stop reel (for example, left reel) is not shaken. All reels 3 may be swung when 3L) is stopped. For example, when the off edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is detected, all the reels 3 may be swung. Alternatively, at this time, the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are not swung, and only the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is swung. It may be that. For example, when the first stop operation is on-edge (no swing of the first stop reel) → when the first stop operation is off-edge (no swing of the first stop reel) → when the second stop operation is on-edge (second stop reel) No swing) → Off-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → On-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → Off-edge of the third stop operation (no swing) It may be configured so that the swing of all reels starts).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a lottery for winning combination and a sub reel for directing is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214500). The sub reels are formed to be larger than the main reels, are arranged in a prominent position, and are arranged in an arrangement in which symbols that are easy for the player to identify are easy to identify. This makes the sub-reel look like a central reel to the player.

In a gaming machine provided with such a sub-reel, the player performs a stop operation to rotate the sub-reel and then stop it in a mode (for example, reverse rotation, frame advance, etc.) that is difficult to execute on the main reel. Reel production may be performed.

On the other hand, even in a gaming machine equipped with only a main reel, an effect using such a reel (a game medium (medal) according to a display mode of a stopped reel, although the reel is stopped by a player performing a stop operation). Etc.)) is desired to be executed. However, when such an effect (pseudo game) is performed on the main reel, the player may mistakenly recognize it as the main game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from misidentifying as a main game even if a pseudo game is performed on the main reel. The purpose is to provide.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) Multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that have multiple symbols and can be driven to rotate,
A stop operation detecting means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, and
A reel control means for controlling the reel (main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S203 in FIG. 32) is provided.
The reel control means can execute stop operation after the stop operation to stop the rotating reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means.
When the reel is stopped by the stop operation after the stop operation, the game medium (medal) or the game medium data corresponding to the design aspects of the plurality of reels can be given to the main game, and the stop operation after the stop operation is used to control the game. When the reels are stopped, it is possible to execute a game medium or a pseudo game in which the game medium data is not added according to the symbol mode of the plurality of reels.
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254, the process of step S1083 of FIG. 255, the process of step S1111 of FIG. 256, and the like) uses the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The post-stop motion control (swing control) to be operated can be executed, and the post-stop motion control is executed when a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the simulated game. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the game medium (medal) or the game according to the design mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). A main game to which medium (medal) data can be added, and a game medium (medal) or game according to the design mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to perform a pseudo game without adding medium (medal) data. Then, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) to operate the stopped reel by the stop operation post-stop control, and a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the simulated game. It is configured to execute operation control (swing control) after stopping when it is satisfied. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game currently being performed is a pseudo game through motion control (swing control) after stopping, and the player misidentifies the game as the main game. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the pseudo game can be executed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) to the 1G continuous lottery (AT addition lottery) is won. The conditions for generating a pseudo game are not limited to winning a pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) or a 1G continuous lottery (AT addition lottery), and are advantageous to the player (for example, advantageous to the player). When it is decided to grant a game state (right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state), it is possible to generate a pseudo game as appropriate. For example, a pseudo game may be generated when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or a pseudo game may be generated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As a specific role, for example, a role in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed or a role (rare role) in which the transition to the advantageous state can be won with a high probability can be adopted. As the specific symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed or a symbol combination in which the transition to the advantageous state can be won with high probability can be adopted. As the advantageous state, the gaming state as described in the first embodiment can be appropriately adopted, and in addition to the pseudo bonus (AT state), for example, a bonus state can be mentioned. Further, when the advantageous section is adopted as an advantageous state and it is decided to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (when the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won), the pseudo game may be executed.

In addition, when it is decided to grant the above right in one unit game (the period from the start to the end of one main process (see FIG. 23)) (for example, when the AT lottery is won). , The pseudo game may be executed in the unit game (winning game), or may be executed in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the unit game (winning game). For example, when it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the result of an internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 7, the pseudo game may be executed immediately after the decision, or the decision is made. The pseudo-game may be executed triggered by the operation of the start lever 7 in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the unit game (winning game). In addition, when it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the fact that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the start lever 7 operation in the next unit game of the unit game (winning game) in which the decision is made is performed. The pseudo game may be executed as an opportunity, or the pseudo game is triggered by the operation of the start lever 7 in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) after the unit game (winning game) in which the decision is made. You may do it. In these cases, the pseudo game may be executed even if the start lever 7 is not operated. When the pseudo game is not executed in the winning game and the pseudo game is executed in the unit game after the winning game, a precursory effect suggesting a transition to an advantageous state is suggested before the pseudo game is executed after the winning game. (For example, the AT precursor effect described in the first embodiment) may be executed. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is determined to generate a pseudo game based on the fact that a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed, the pseudo game is immediately performed. It is possible to have variations in the start timing of the pseudo-game, such as when the pseudo-game is performed after one game, when the pseudo-game is performed after two games, or when the pseudo-game is performed after three games. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when it will be held.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the pseudo game is executed when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed). The timing for executing the pseudo game is not particularly limited, and may be when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed) or when the first stop operation is performed (second stop operation). It may be when the stop operation is performed), when the second stop operation is performed (before the third stop operation is performed), or when the third stop operation is performed (before the third stop operation is performed). It may be before the start lever 7 operation in the next unit game is performed). Further, it is also possible to shift to the pseudo game on condition that the stop button 8 is operated after the start lever 7 is operated and before the rotation speeds of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reach the constant speed rotation speed. good. That is, if the stop button 8 is operated before the rotation speeds of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reach the constant speed rotation speed, the operation of the stop button 8 is treated as the first stop operation for simulated games. If the stop button 8 is operated after the rotation speeds of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R reach the constant speed rotation speed, the operation of the stop button 8 is treated as the first stop operation for the main game. May be good.

In the above, it has been described that a pseudo game is generated when it is decided to grant the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state, but a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a pseudo game (pseudo). A game generation lottery) may be performed, and when the pseudo game generation lottery is won, the pseudo game may be generated and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In this case, for example, instead of the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery (AT lottery), a pseudo-game generation lottery may be performed. For example, it is possible to configure the result of the pseudo-game generation lottery (winning or non-winning) to be determined based on the above-mentioned advantageous section winning sub-flag or advantageous section winning sub-flag.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the motion control (swing control) after the stop is executed when a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the simulated game. As the post-stop operation control (swing control), it is possible to adopt the excitation control based on the above-mentioned excitation pattern I. The post-stop operation control (swing control) is not particularly limited as long as it is a control that causes the reel 3 to perform some operation within a range of less than 500 ms, and any predetermined condition can be appropriately adopted as a predetermined condition. be. That is, whenever the excitation phase is excited based on the swinging excitation pattern, it switches to another excitation pattern before the retention time of one excitation pattern reaches 500 ms (the retention time of one excitation pattern is less than 500 ms). ) Is desirable. The switching of the excitation pattern (change of the phase signal) is a control for physically changing the speed of the rotating cylinder. Even when the excitation pattern is switched, if the switching is not used to physically change the speed of the cylinder, or if the physical speed change of the cylinder due to the switching is performed. If it is found to be artificially obstructed, it should be treated as if the switching had not been performed. When the exciting phase is excited based on the exciting pattern for rocking, the reel 3 is slightly moving. However, in the present specification, the state of the reel 3 at this time is referred to as "temporary stop" to "stop". May be expressed.

When a game is played using physical medals in the pachislot machine 1, the main game depends on the symbol mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game in which a game medium (medal) can be given, and a pseudo game is a game medium corresponding to a design mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when a reel is stopped by a stop control after a stop operation. It is a game that does not give (medals). On the other hand, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is a design of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game in which game medium (medal) data can be added according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a design mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that does not give the corresponding game medium (medal) data. The game medium (medal) data is data corresponding to the game value possessed by the player, and as described in the first embodiment, electromagnetically (or in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). It is managed.

(C-2) The gaming machine of the above (C-1).
It is possible to execute a reeling effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation.
The reel control means can execute the post-stop motion control in the pseudo game, while the reel control means does not execute the post-stop motion control in the spinning cylinder effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation (even if the player does not detect the stop operation) is performed. It is feasible and is configured not to execute motion control (swing control) after stopping in the spinning cylinder effect (reel effect). In the spinning reel effect (reel effect), the reel is stopped even if the player does not perform the stop operation, so there is a possibility that the player may mistake the reel effect (reel effect) as the main game. It is relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a spinning effect (reel effect), it is possible to make the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the simulated game stand out. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the reeling effect (reel effect) is such that the reel is stopped even if the player does not perform the stop operation. As the trigger for stopping the reel in the reeling effect (reel effect), it is possible to appropriately adopt an opportunity other than the stop operation by the player. For example, the reel may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel, or the operation unit (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for the stop operation in the main game. ) May be triggered to stop the reel by operating an operation unit (for example, a start lever 7 or a bet button). The effect of stopping the reel in such an manner (without going through the stop button 8) can be called a spinning reel effect (reel effect). In the spinning effect (reel effect), it is desirable not to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control), but the post-stop operation control (swing control) may be executed.

(C-3) The gaming machine according to (C-1) or (C-2).
The reel control means can execute swing control for swinging the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation at a predetermined cycle as the operation control after the stop.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as post-stop operation control (swing control), swing control for swinging a reel stopped by stop control after a stop operation at a predetermined cycle can be executed. It is configured in. Through such swing control, it is possible to realize a novel effect that focuses the player on the swing cycle, and effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game. can do.

The swing cycle is not particularly limited, and for example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which swing control is executed such that a predetermined swing pattern is repeated with the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ described above as one cycle. It is possible. However, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not limited to the control of operating the reel periodically, and may be the control of operating the reel aperiodically. For example, when the first time elapses after the first post-stop operation control (swing control) is performed, the second post-stop operation control (swing control) is performed, and the second post-stop operation control is performed. When performing the third post-stop operation control (swing control) when the second time elapses after the (swing control) is performed, make sure that the first time and the second time are different. May be good. For example, the excitation pattern I is held for time T ₁ (eg, 3 interruption time), the excitation pattern II is held for time T ₂ (eg, 300 interruption time), and then the excitation pattern I (eg, 300 interruption time). Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the excitation pattern III) different from the excitation pattern I and the excitation pattern II is held for a time T ₃ (for example, 5 interruption time). After time T ₃ (eg, 5 interruption time) has elapsed, excitation pattern II may be retained for time T ₂ (eg, 300 interruption time), or excitation pattern II (or excitation pattern). I, the excitation pattern II, and the excitation pattern IV different from the excitation pattern III) may be retained for time T4 ₍ eg, 200 interruption time).

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3).
By executing the operation control after the stop, the reel control means can repeatedly generate a state in which the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation operates and a state in which the operation is interrupted. ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a state in which the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation is operated and a state in which the operation is interrupted by executing the operation control (swing control) after the stop operation. Is configured to be able to occur repeatedly. This makes it possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game through the operation of the reel, and by providing a period during which the operation is interrupted, the reel is stopped (temporarily stopped). It is possible to make the player clearly recognize what has been done and avoid causing confusion to the player because it is not known whether or not the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped).

The state in which the operation of the reel is interrupted can be generated by holding one excitation pattern for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period can be, for example, a time of about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). However, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not limited to the one that causes the reel operation to be interrupted, and may be the one that continues the reel operation (for example, slight vibration).

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4).
The reel control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 258) is
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo game, the rotation of the reel of one of the plurality of reels is started for the main game, and further, the rotation start timing of the one reel is set. It is possible to start the rotation of the other reels at a later timing,
After starting the rotation of the one reel, it is possible to continue the operation control after the stop for the other reel until the rotation of the other reel is started.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the simulated game, a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are used for the main game. It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and further start the rotation of the other reel at a timing later than the rotation start timing of the one reel. Then, after starting the rotation of the one reel, the operation control (swing control) after stopping for the other reel can be continued until the rotation of the other reel is started. ing. As a result, even after the rotation of the one reel is started, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pseudo game has been performed, and the player misidentifies the pseudo game as the main game. It can be effectively prevented.

However, as described in the eighth embodiment, after the rotation of one reel is started and the rotation of the other reel is started, the operation control (swing control) after stopping for the other reel is performed. You may not do it. For example, among a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), all at the timing when the rotation of any one reel is started by the random delay processing (when the first reel starts the rotation). The operation control (swing control) after stopping for the reel may be terminated. In the random delay processing, the order in which the rotation of each reel is started is not particularly limited and may be randomly determined, or may be determined in a predetermined order (for example, left reel 3L → middle reel 3C → right reel). The rotation may be started at 3R). To start the rotation of each reel in a predetermined order, for example, first set the left reel acceleration timer, and when the left reel acceleration timer becomes 0, start the rotation of the left reel 3L. After that, the middle reel acceleration timer is set, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is started when the middle reel acceleration timer becomes 0, then the right reel acceleration timer is set, and the right reel acceleration timer is set. When it becomes 0, the rotation of the right reel 3R may be started.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5).
The reel control means
It is possible to stop the reel of one of the plurality of reels without the stop control after the stop operation, while stopping the other reels of the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation. And
It is possible to execute the post-stop operation control for the one reel while not executing the post-stop operation control for the other reels.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, while the plurality of reels (reels 3L) are stopped. , 3C, 3R) can be stopped by stop control after the stop operation. Then, while the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed for the one reel, the post-stop operation control (swing control) can be executed for the other reels. It is configured. When the reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, the stop operation is not performed when the reel is stopped, so there is a possibility that the player may mistake the stop of the reel as the main game. It is relatively low. In such a case, by not executing the post-stop operation control (swing control), the post-stop operation control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the post-stop operation stop control should be emphasized. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

Any timing may be preceded by the timing at which the one reel is stopped and the timing at which the other reel is stopped. That is, after stopping one reel of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) without a stop control after a stop operation, the other of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped. The reels may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, or one reel of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and then the plurality of reels (reels). The other reels of 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation. Further, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation and the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation are not particularly limited. For example, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be 1, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be 2, or the reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels to be stopped may be set to 2 and the number of reels to be stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 1.

For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped, the third stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped according to the player's stop operation. , Right reel 3R), when the first stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung, while the rotation of these reels 3 is not performed. When the third stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is stopped, the reel 3 may be swung. Further, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, the right reel) are stopped. When the rotation of the 3R) is automatically stopped, the reel 3 is swung when the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped, while the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the first stop reel are oscillated. When the three stop reels (for example, the right reel 3R) are stopped, these reels 3 may not be swung.

When the reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger other than the stop operation by the player as the trigger for stopping the reel. For example, the reel may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel, or the operation unit (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for the stop operation in the main game. ) May be triggered to stop the reel by operating an operation unit (for example, a start lever 7 or a bet button). When the reels are stopped in such an manner (without going through the stop button 8), it is desirable not to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control), but the post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed. You may do it.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6).
Pseudo-game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 250) capable of determining to execute the pseudo-game, and
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous section) (value of advantageous section game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous section payout number counter, for control A predetermined period termination means capable of terminating the predetermined period when a specific condition (limiter operating condition) is satisfied (value of the payout counter) is provided.
While the pseudo-game determining means can determine that the pseudo-game is to be executed in the predetermined period, the pseudo-game determination means has a specific period (quasi-limit processing (number of games) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) Or the period after the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a predetermined variable (value of the advantageous section game number counter, control game number counter) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous section). When a specific condition (limiter operating condition) is satisfied (value, value of advantageous section payout number counter, value of control payout number counter), a predetermined period (advantageous section) can be terminated. Then, while it is possible to determine that the pseudo game is to be executed in a predetermined period (advantageous section), a predetermined variable (value of the advantageous section game number counter, value of the control game number counter, advantageous section payout number counter). In a specific period (the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated) before the specific condition is satisfied (the value of, the value of the payout number counter for control), the pseudo game is executed. It is configured not to decide to do so. When a simulated game is executed, it is considered that the player has a sense of expectation, but in a specific period (the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated). By not executing the pseudo-game, it is possible to prevent the expectation from being excessively agitated.

The specific period is not limited to the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, and the pseudo game is executed in any period before the predetermined period (advantageous section) ends. It is possible to configure it so that it does not decide to do so. The specific period includes, for example, a period in which the value of the advantageous section game number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 1200) or more, a period in which the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 1920) or more, and the like. May be adopted. As a result, when the number of remaining games until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, or when the number of remaining payouts until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) is less than or equal to the predetermined number. Can prevent the pseudo-game from being executed. Alternatively, when the MY described in the first embodiment becomes a predetermined number or more, the pseudo game may not be executed. The predetermined period is not limited to the advantageous section and may be a non-advantageous section. Further, when the predetermined period is an advantageous section, the advantageous section may be an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) or an increase section (advantageous section / pseudo bonus). Further, any mode in the production section (advantageous section / normal game) may be adopted as a predetermined period.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7).
A predetermined operation detecting means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) by the player, and a predetermined operation detecting means.
A display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (“striking a lever” image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation is provided.
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detecting means, the pseudo game can be started.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to display an image (“slap the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation), and it is possible to display a predetermined operation. It is configured so that a pseudo game can be started when an operation (operation of the start lever 7) is detected. As a result, it is possible for the player to participate in the pseudo-game at his / her own will, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the pseudo-game.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6") in which the pseudo game is performed after the reel effect is performed, a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed after the reel effect is completed. It was explained that the transition to the pseudo-game (the rotation for the pseudo-game is started) is triggered by the fact that the game was played. In this way, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) can be adopted as an opportunity to shift from the reel effect to the pseudo game. However, the scene of shifting to the pseudo game by the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) is not limited to this example. For example, in the case where the pseudo game is performed again after the pseudo game is performed (the pseudo game is repeated a plurality of times), the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is triggered to the next pseudo game. It may be migrated.

As a case where the pseudo game is repeated a plurality of times, for example, a case where an effect related to extension (addition) of the AT state is performed can be mentioned. For example, in a situation where it is decided that the AT state is added by 200 games, an image showing that the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and the AT state is added by 100 games is displayed in the first pseudo game, and 2 In the third pseudo game, the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and an image showing that the AT state has been added by 100 games (200 games in total) is displayed, and in the third pseudo game, the "Red 7" symbols are not aligned and AT. It is possible to adopt an effect of displaying an image indicating that the addition of the state has not occurred any more (the number of addition games has ended in 200 games). In this effect, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed (for example, "Red 7" symbols are aligned) in one pseudo game, the AT state is added to a predetermined number of games (or 1G continuous stock is added). While notifying (suggesting) that a predetermined number has been assigned) and making it possible to move to the next pseudo game, a specific symbol combination was not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game (for example, the "red 7" symbol was displayed. In the case of (not complete), it is notified (suggested) that the AT state was not added any more (or no more 1G continuous stock was given), and the game does not move to the next pseudo game. It can be configured to (end the effect). This makes it possible to notify (suggest) the number of additional games (or the number of 1G continuous stocks) acquired to the player through the simulated game. In the above, it has been described that the pseudo game is repeated a plurality of times, but instead of at least one of the pseudo games of the plurality of times, a spinning body effect (reel effect) may be performed. ..

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, what is the normal start lever 7 operation (see step S50 in FIG. 25)? Reels 3L, 3C, 3R are automatically started (acceleration processing for lock effect (see step S1024 in FIG. 251)) without requiring a separate predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation). The rotation of is started). However, as described in the ninth embodiment, even in this case, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is adopted as a condition for starting the pseudo game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is adopted. The pseudo game may be started when the operation) is performed. It is also possible to adopt such a scene as a scene of shifting to the pseudo game by the above-mentioned predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7).

If the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) for shifting to the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game may be shifted to the pseudo game when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed, or the pseudo game may be performed in the first place. It may not be transferred to the game. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and an operation of an arbitrary operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately adopted.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8).
It is possible to execute a reeling effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation.
The reel control means
As the spinning reel effect, the reel control means for the reeling effect capable of stopping the plurality of reels without the stop control after the stop operation, and the reel control means for the reeling effect.
As the pseudo game, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the reel control means for rotating cylinder effect, the at least one reel is stopped by the stop operation and then stop control. A pseudo-game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 256) that can be stopped is provided.
The post-stop operation control is not executed for the plurality of reels stopped by the spinning reel control means, while the at least one reel stopped by the pseudo-game reel control means is not executed. It is possible to execute the operation control after the stop.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a plurality of reels (even if the player does not detect the stop operation) without relying on the stop control after the stop operation as the reel effect (reel effect). Reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be stopped, and as a pseudo game, at least one of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel effect (reel effect). After starting the rotation of the reels, it is possible to stop the at least one reel by the stop operation and then the stop control. Then, while the operation control (swing control) is not executed after the stop for the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel effect (reel effect), at least one stopped in the simulated game. It is configured to be able to execute operation control (swing control) after stopping for the reels of. In the spinning reel effect (reel effect), the reel is stopped even if the player does not perform the stop operation, so there is a possibility that the player may mistake the reel effect (reel effect) as the main game. It is relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a spinning effect (reel effect), it is possible to make the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the simulated game stand out. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect in which the pseudo game is performed after the reel effect is performed (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6"), in the pseudo game, a plurality of stops in the reel effect (reel effect). Of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), it has been described that after starting the rotation of one reel, the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the simulated game is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). In the present specification, the "pseudo game" is not limited to the lock effect in which all reels can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, but the lock effect in which at least one reel that can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation exists. Is widely called "pseudo-game". In the simulated game, the number of rotating reels and the number of reels that can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be the same or different. For example, a lock effect in which only one reel rotates and the one reel can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation can be called a pseudo game, and all the reels rotate and at least one reel. A lock effect in which the reels can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation can also be called a pseudo game. In the simulated game, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one lap), or may be rotation for several symbols (for example, frame advance). In this way, when the pseudo game is performed after the spinning body effect (reel effect) is performed, it is desirable not to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) in the spinning body effect (reel effect). Operation control (swing control) may be executed after stopping. When the pseudo game is performed after the spinning effect is performed, the spinning effect may include the reel effect or may not include the reel effect (simply freeze). ..

(C-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9).
It is possible to execute a reeling effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation.
The reel control means
As the pseudo-game, a pseudo-game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 254) capable of stopping the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation, and
As the turning effect, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo-game reel control means, the at least one reel is set to stop control after the stop operation. It is equipped with a reel control means for rotating cylinder effect (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 255) that can be stopped without depending.
The post-stop operation control is executed for the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo-game reel control means, and the stop is also performed for the at least one reel stopped by the reel control means for rotating cylinder effect. It is possible to execute post-motion control,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as a pseudo game, it is possible to stop a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) by a stop control after a stop operation, and a spinning reel effect (reels). As an effect), after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the simulated game, the at least one reel is stopped regardless of the stop operation and then the stop control. It is possible to stop the reel (even if the player does not detect the stop operation). Then, the operation control (swing control) after stopping is executed for the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the simulated game, and at least one reel stopped in the reeling effect (reel effect). It is configured to be able to execute operation control (swing control) after stopping. In the reel effect, the reel is stopped even if the player does not perform the stop operation, so there is a relative possibility that the player will mistake the reel effect as the main game. Although it may be considered to be low, when the spinning body effect (reel effect) is performed following the simulated game, the spinning body effect (reel effect) is integrated with the simulated game, and the player plays the main game. It can be said that there is a possibility of misidentifying it. By executing the motion control (swing control) after stopping in such a spinning effect (reel effect), it is effective that the player mistakenly recognizes the rotating body effect (reel effect) as the main game. Can be prevented.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect in which the reel effect is performed after the pseudo game is performed (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5"), in the spinning cylinder effect (reel effect), a plurality of stops in the pseudo game. Of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), it has been described that after starting the rotation of one reel, the one reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the spinning reel effect (reel effect) is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). May be good. In the present specification, the "reel effect" is not limited to the lock effect in which all reels can be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, and at least one reel can be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation. The existing rock production is widely called "reel production". In the reel effect, the number of rotating reels and the number of reels that can be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation are the same. That is, a lock effect in which all the rotating reels can be stopped without stopping control after the stop operation can be called a reel effect. On the other hand, a lock effect in which at least one of the rotating reels can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation can be called a pseudo game. In the reel production, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one turn), or may be rotation for several symbols (for example, frame advance). In this way, when the post-reel effect (reel effect) in which the pseudo game is performed is performed, it is desirable to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) in the reel effect (reel effect). It may be decided not to execute the operation control (swing control) after the stop.

(C-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-10).
An image for encouraging the player to perform the stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) can be stopped and displayed as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels (“7 aim” effect image 1100). ) Is provided with a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying.
In the specific symbol combination, the symbol in the reel of one of the plurality of reels is a specific symbol (“red 7” symbol).
The reel control means executes the post-stop operation control so that when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game, the specific symbol can be displayed on the one reel. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a stop operation is performed so that a specific symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) can be stopped and displayed as a symbol mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). It is possible to display an image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100) to encourage the player to do so, and a specific symbol combination (“Red 7” symbol alignment) can be created on multiple reels (reel 3L,). The symbol on one of the reels (3C, 3R) is a specific symbol (“red 7” symbol). Then, in the simulated game, when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the operation control after the stop (swing control) so that the specific symbol (“red 7” symbol) can be displayed on the one reel. ) Is configured to be possible. This prevents the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game through the motion control (swing control) after stopping, and at the same time, a specific symbol (“Red 7” symbol) (specific symbol combination (“Red”). It is possible to show the player the symbols that make up 7 "matching of symbols"), and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation through the specific symbol (the "red 7" symbol).

As described in the eighth embodiment, by executing the operation control (vibration control) after stopping, one reel can be oscillated (vibrated) or stopped almost completely. As a result, the symbol existing at a predetermined position (on the effective line) in the state where the reel is located at the center of vibration or when the reel is almost completely stopped is controlled by the stop operation after the reel is stopped. It is assumed to be the same symbol (for example, "Red 7" symbol) existing at a predetermined position (on the effective line) when stopped (for example, see step S1069 in FIG. 254) (see, for example, FIG. 246 (d)). It is possible. During the period when the operation control (swing control) after stopping is executed, the other symbols are in the predetermined position (effective) while the symbol (for example, the "red 7" symbol) is in the predetermined position (on the effective line). It is longer than the time that exists on the line). In the eighth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the effective line is only one "center line". As the specific symbol combination, any symbol combination can be appropriately adopted, and in addition to the "red 7" symbol alignment, for example, the "BAR" symbol alignment described in the ninth embodiment may be used. good. Further, the specific symbol combination is not limited to the same symbol combination, and may include different symbols. Further, as the specific symbol, in addition to the "red 7" symbol, any symbol such as the "BAR" symbol can be appropriately adopted.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, as the AT state, for example, a pseudo BB (big bonus) and a pseudo RB (regular bonus) can be adopted. Then, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo BB, the first symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and it is decided to shift to the pseudo RB. In the pseudo game, the second symbol combination (for example, "BAR" symbol alignment) may be stopped and displayed. At that time, if it is decided to shift to the pseudo BB, the above-mentioned "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is displayed, and if it is decided to shift to the pseudo RB, in the ninth embodiment. It is also possible to display the effect image "Aim at BAR" to be explained.

Furthermore, when the "Red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, a pseudo BB effect is performed, and when the "BAR" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, a pseudo RB effect is performed. You may. In the pseudo BB effect, a pseudo BB suggestion image (an image suggesting that it is decided to shift to the pseudo BB) is displayed on the main display device 210, and in the pseudo RB effect, the pseudo RB suggestion image (shift to the pseudo RB) is displayed. An image suggesting that this has been determined) is displayed on the main display device 210. The sub control circuit 200 performs a pseudo BB effect and a pseudo RB effect by transmitting information (stop position information) indicating a symbol displayed as a stop in the simulated game from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Can be done.

Further, as described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, as in the main game, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. .. In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols will not be aligned. If the "Red 7" symbol is not displayed as a stop because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate for at least one reel, then the reel effect is performed on the reel to perform the "red" effect. The "7" symbol may be stopped and displayed so that the "red 7" symbol is aligned on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R).

In the pseudo game, the stop operation after the stop operation when the "Red 7" symbol is not displayed may be the same stop control after the stop operation as the stop control after the stop operation in the main game, or the stop operation in the main game. The post-stop control may be different from the post-stop control. For example, it is assumed that a red 7 role (for example, a red 7 replay) is provided as an internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the red 7 role is "red 7-red 7-red 7". When the red 7 combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the "red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop control is performed after the stop operation so that the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, the red 7 combination is not determined as the internal winning combination. , In the main game, the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. It is possible to perform stop control after the stop operation so that the stop is displayed. The same post-stop operation stop control as the post-stop operation stop control in the main game may be performed in the pseudo game as well. As a result, for example, an image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100) for urging the player to perform a stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) can be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the player performs a stop operation aiming at the "Red 7" symbol in the order of right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L in the production ("Aim for red 7" production), the middle stage of the right reel 3R. "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the area, "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. It may be controlled.

Further, as described in the eighth embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the simulated game may be larger than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game (for example, "4"). For example, in the simulated game, 20-frame control may be performed (after the stop operation is performed, the reels may be rotated by a maximum of 20 symbols and then stopped). In this case, the symbol that is stopped and displayed when the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game may be the same as the symbol that is stopped and displayed when the small winning combination is missed in the main game. For example, as described in the first embodiment, a specific combination (for example, a watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific combination may be a stop operation mode (stop operation timing) of the player. However, the number of medals awarded may vary depending on the push order or a combination thereof (for example, 8 medals if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer)). If the payout is inappropriate (incorrect answer), one payout or no payout). When the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer) in the main game, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel. While the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of 3C and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect answer) (watermelon was dropped). In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. Will be done. If the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, it will stop with the same combination of symbols as the combination of symbols displayed when the small combination is dropped in such a main game (small combination spilled eyes). It may be displayed. The spilled eyes of such a small role are not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately adopt a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a small role such as a bell is dropped, in addition to a watermelon.

Further, as described above, in the present invention, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate (continue) a pseudo game is performed (pseudo game generation lottery), and when the pseudo game generation lottery is won, a pseudo game is generated. In addition to generating (continuing) the game, the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In addition, when the pseudo game is performed again after the pseudo game is performed (the pseudo game is repeated a plurality of times), the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is triggered by the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation), and the next pseudo game is started. It may be shifted, and as a case where the pseudo game is repeated a plurality of times, for example, a case where an effect related to extension (addition) of the AT state is performed can be mentioned. It is also possible to combine these configurations as follows.

For example, when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is triggered to shift to a pseudo game and a specific symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, the AT state is extended (added). It is performed (displays an image showing the number of additional games), and then an image (“slap the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is displayed, and the predetermined operation (“slap the lever” image) is displayed. The start lever 7 operation) is used as an opportunity to shift to a pseudo game. It is possible to configure the simulated game to be repeated in such an embodiment. Here, when a specific symbol combination (“Red 7” symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, it is possible to shift to the next pseudo game (as a result of the one pseudo game). The AT state is extended (added).) On the other hand, if a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol alignment) is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, the pseudo game ends (the one pseudo). As a result of the game, it is decided that the AT state is not extended (added), and whether or not the next pseudo game is performed after one pseudo game is performed (specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol). A lottery (pseudo game generation lottery) is performed to determine (whether or not the alignment) is stopped and displayed, and when the pseudo game generation lottery is won, a specific symbol combination (“Red 7”) is performed in one pseudo game. It may be configured so that the "symbol alignment") is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the next pseudo game is possible. As a result, as long as the pseudo-game generation lottery (pseudo-game continuation lottery) is won, the pseudo-game is repeated and the AT state is extended (added). As described above, the game period in the AT state is managed by the game number management, the set number management, the payout number management, the difference number management, the navigation number management, etc., and the AT state is extended (added) correspondingly. In), the number of games, the number of sets, the number of payouts, the management of the number of differences, the number of navigations, etc. are added.

The condition for extending (adding) the AT state is not limited to the stop display of a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol alignment) in the pseudo game, and any condition is satisfied in the pseudo game. In some cases, it is possible to configure the AT state to be extended (added). For example, it is assumed that the pseudo game is performed five times as one set, and in each pseudo game, the correct push order is set as the order of the stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Similar to the pseudo-game progress stop button described in the ninth embodiment, the pressing order of the correct answer can be determined by lottery in each pseudo-game. When one set of pseudo-games is started, the player performs five pseudo-games with the aim of performing the stop operation in the correct push order. While the simulated game is performed 5 times, the AT state is extended (added) every time the stop operation is performed in the correct push order (up to 5 times). Then, after the pseudo game is performed five times, the pseudo game is ended and the game shifts to the main game. Such a configuration can be adopted.

In addition, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at least once in one set of pseudo games (five pseudo games), the transition to the next set of pseudo games (five pseudo games) is performed. (As a result of the pseudo game of the one set, the AT state is extended (added)), while the correct answer is pushed once in the pseudo game of one set (five pseudo games). If the stop operation is not performed in, the game ends with the pseudo game (five pseudo games) of the set (as a result of the pseudo game of the one set, the AT state is not extended (added)). ) May be done. Alternatively, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order in one of the five pseudo games while the five pseudo games constituting one set are performed, the next pseudo game is performed. It is possible to shift to a game (as a result of the one pseudo game, the AT state is extended (added)), while the stop operation is not performed in the correct push order in one pseudo game. Ends with the pseudo-game (at that point, even if all five pseudo-games have not been digested) (as a result of the one pseudo-game, the AT state is not extended (added)). You may do it. In addition, when the AT state is extended (added) by performing the stop operation in the correct push order, basically a predetermined number of games are added, but in two pseudo games in succession. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer, the number of games may be added more than the predetermined number of games. Further, as the number of consecutive pseudo-games in which the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer (the number of consecutive successes) increases, the number of additional games may be configured to increase stepwise.

When adopting a mode in which the AT state is extended (added) by performing the stop operation in the correct push order as described above (push order hit), such push order hit is to be performed in the main game. Then, it is necessary to create new data for the symbol combination for the correct push order answer, the symbol combination for the incorrect push order answer, the symbol combination for the wrong push order, etc., and the reel arrangement for these symbol combinations. It is necessary to create new data for reel stop control, etc., and the amount of data increases. In this regard, when such push order hitting is performed in a pseudo game, any symbol combination can be freely stopped without being limited to the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination as in the main game. Since it is possible, it is possible to realize push ordering without increasing the amount of data. In addition, it is possible to create room for adding new playability and enhancing the interest by using the saved data capacity.

The extension (addition) of the AT state as described above can be performed when the pseudo game is performed in the AT state. Hereinafter, such an AT state will be described with reference to specific examples.

In this example, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly classified into an AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and a normal game, which is a normal game state which is relatively disadvantageous to the AT game. The transition from normal games to AT games is that the number of games after the end of AT games has reached the number of ceiling games (the number of ceiling games has been exhausted), that the winning combination has been won (fixed winning combination), and that the number of games has been specified in the main CZ state. It will be done when the reel action is decided (CZ success).

The “fixed combination” means a combination in which it is confirmed that the AT game will be started, and here, it means “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip”, and “strong bell”. When shifting from a normal game to an AT game by winning a fixed combination, first, based on winning the fixed combination, the basic number of continuations of the AT game is given (150 is added to the AT management difference number counter). .. After that, a reel action (special reel action) is determined from among a plurality of types of reel actions according to the type of fixed combination, and the number of continuous additions of AT games according to the determined reel action is given (AT management difference). 300, 400 or 500 will be added to the number counter). The reel action is the rotating cylinder effect (reel effect) described above.

Also, in a normal game, if a "strong chance lip" (rare role) is determined as an internal winning role and a prize is awarded to either "special lip A1-6" or "special lip B" (strong chance lip is established), the main game is played. Under the control of the CPU 101, the staging game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and becomes the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the staging game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the subsequent "main CZ state 2", when a specific reel action is determined and executed, the CZ is successful, and the normal game is changed to the AT game. It is supposed to be migrated.

When the game shifts to the AT game, the stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs is exhausted), and the game is stopped according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the number of medals. Specifically, during AT, when the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right middle left bell" and "right middle left bell" are determined as internal winning roles, The order of stop operations at which seven medals will be paid out will be notified.

Here, as a state during the AT game, a pseudo probability variation state is provided in which the number of ATs (value of the difference number counter for AT management) can be added. Specifically, in the AT game, when any one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination and the transition lottery of the pseudo probability change state is won, a specific reel action is executed and the pseudo probability change is controlled by the control of the main CPU 101. Move to the state. In this pseudo-probability change state, the number of pseudo-games when the lock at the start of the game is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo-games can be performed. When determining the number of pseudo games, the number of pseudo games can be determined a plurality of times.

Here, in the pseudo game, an operation (pseudo input operation) to the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) locked at the start of the game and an operation to the start lever (start lever 7) (pseudo start operation) are performed. , The progress is controlled by determining the pseudo-internal winning combination and operating the stop buttons (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) (pseudo-stop operation), as if it were a normal game (main game). It is possible to impress the player as if the game is in progress. It should be noted that the determination of the pseudo-internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo-start operation, as in the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game.

Then, in the pseudo-probability change state, the number of ATs (value of the difference number counter for AT management) is added to the lottery based on the determined internal winning combination, and the number of ATs (AT number) based on the determined pseudo-internal winning combination ( An additional lottery (value of the AT management difference number counter) will be performed. The determination of the pseudo-internal winning combination is not limited to the mode performed based on the pseudo start operation, and is performed, for example, based on the pseudo input operation or the pseudo stop operation (particularly, the pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). May be. Along with this, the timing at which the additional lottery for the number of ATs is performed is not limited to the timing at which the pseudo start operation is performed, and the pseudo input operation or the pseudo stop operation (particularly, the pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation) is performed. It may be the timing of the lottery. Further, at the timing when all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped (pseudo-stop) in the pseudo game (the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the pseudo-internal winning combination is stopped and displayed), the lottery for adding the number of ATs may be performed. good. In this case, the lottery may be performed by adding the number of ATs based on the symbol combination (pseudo symbol combination) displayed by the pseudo stop. When the additional lottery is performed, the lottery result (AT number of times) is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter.

Further, in the pseudo-probability change state, a relatively larger number of pseudo-games is determined than in the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode) and the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode). There is a "probability change state 2" (second mode), and based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning a high probability transition lottery), the "pseudo probability change state 1" (first mode) is changed to "probability change state 2". It will shift to the "pseudo-probability state 2" (second mode). In this "pseudo-probability change state 2" (second mode), when the pseudo-game is executed, the number of pseudo-games of two or more times is always determined, so that the number of ATs based on the pseudo-internal winning combination is determined. It is possible to enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery multiple times, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player, which is the pseudo-probability change state.

Further, the transition from the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (second mode) to the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times the pseudo-game is actually performed (the number of high-securing obstacle games). Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the opportunity of additional lottery for the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the "pseudo probability change state 2" (second mode). The transition to the pseudo-probability change state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, the AT game or the transition lottery to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and the AT game or the transition lottery to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Should be done.

As described above, the pseudo-probability change state is a state in which a plurality of pseudo-games can be executed in one unit game. The plurality of pseudo games can be performed, for example, in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process). Then, since the AT state is extended (added) based on the result of the pseudo game, the pseudo probability variation state plays the role of the addition specialized zone in the AT state. Here, as described above, the "result of the pseudo game" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state may be a pseudo internal winning combination or a pseudo symbol combination.

When the pseudo internal winning combination is adopted as the "result of the pseudo game" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, it is possible to stay in the pseudo-probability state not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In addition, the pseudo-game is performed four times as one set, and if the pseudo-game continuous lottery (winning probability: 50%) is won, it is possible to move to the next set after one set is performed. It has become. As the pseudo-probability change state, three types of modes are provided: a pseudo-probability change state A (mode A), a pseudo-probability change state B (mode B), and a pseudo-probability change state C (mode C). The probability that a specific combination (rare combination) is determined as a pseudo-internal winning combination is in the order of pseudo-probability change state A (1/4) → pseudo-probability change state B (1/2) → pseudo-probability change state C (1/1). It gets higher. When a specific combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination, the AT state is extended (added). The pseudo internal winning combination may be the same as the normal internal winning combination, or an internal winning combination dedicated to the pseudo game may be provided. Further, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, it is promoted from one pseudo-probability change state to a pseudo-probability change state that is more advantageous than the pseudo-probability change state. Such promotion of the pseudo-probability change state may be performed in one step (pseudo-probability change state A → pseudo-probability change state B or pseudo-probability change state B → pseudo-probability change state C) depending on the type of the specific symbol combination. However, there may be two stages (pseudo-probability change state A → pseudo-probability change state C).

When the pseudo symbol combination is adopted as the "result of the pseudo game" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, the pseudo game is performed with 5 times as one set. Then, when a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol alignment) is displayed at least once as a pseudo symbol combination in one set of pseudo games (five pseudo games), the next set of pseudo games ("red 7" symbol alignment) is displayed. It is possible to shift to 5 pseudo-games (as a result of the pseudo-game of the one set, the AT state is extended (added)), while one set of pseudo-games (5 pseudo-games) is possible. ), If a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol alignment) is not displayed even once as a pseudo symbol combination, the game ends with the pseudo game (five pseudo games) of the set (the one set). As a result of the pseudo game of, the AT state is not extended (added)).

When the reel swings due to the execution of operation control (swing control) after stopping, the swing mode (pattern) may always be constant, or a plurality of swing patterns may be provided. May be. The plurality of swing patterns have different reel motion patterns in a state where the motion control (swing control) after stopping is executed. For example, a vibration pattern A, a vibration pattern B, and a vibration pattern C are provided as a plurality of vibration patterns having different cycles and / or amplitudes of micro-vibrations, and steps S1070 to 255 of FIG. 254 are provided. In the swing control in step S1083, it is possible to swing the reel with one swing pattern selected from these swing patterns. The timing for selecting the swing pattern is not particularly limited, and for example, one swing pattern may be selected by lottery each time the swing control is performed. Further, one swing pattern may be selected in the non-advantageous section, and the reel may be always swung with the one swing pattern in the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section. Then, when shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, one swing pattern may be selected again. Alternatively, when swing control is performed, one swing pattern may be selected based on a predetermined variable (value), and the value may be updated in a non-advantageous section. For example, each swing pattern is associated with a predetermined numerical range (for example, swing pattern A: 1 to 100, swing pattern B: 101 to 200, swing pattern C: 201 to 300). The swing pattern corresponding to the value updated by lottery (any of 1 to 300) during the non-advantageous section may be selected. Further, the variable may be the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, or the like. As a result, as the number of unit games performed in the advantageous section increases, the swing pattern can be changed such as swing pattern A → swing pattern B → swing pattern C. The variable or the information indicating the selected swing pattern can be stored in the RWM (or RAM) for managing the operation of the reel in the simulated game. The RWM does not affect the instruction function at all.

When a plurality of swing patterns are provided, the reel may be swung with a swing pattern according to the type of privilege given to the player. For example, when the privilege is a transition to an advantageous section (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won), the reel is swung by the swing pattern A, and the privilege is transferred to the pseudo bonus (AT state). In the case of transition (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won), the reel is swung by the swing pattern B, and the privilege is the extension of the pseudo bonus (extension of the number of games or addition of the number of sets) ( For example, in the case of winning a 1G continuous lottery), it is possible to configure the reel to swing with the swing pattern C. Swinging with a swing pattern according to the type of such privilege is limited to the third stop reel, and the first stop reel and the second stop reel are swing with a swing pattern common to various benefits. It may be that.

The pseudo game described above may be performed by a reel-shaped physical structure (sub reel) provided separately from the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), or may be performed by the main effect display unit 21 or the liquid crystal. This may be done by displaying a reel-like image (video reel) on the display device. The pseudo-game performed in such an embodiment can be adopted as an effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 200. However, it is desirable to clearly indicate the main reel controlled by the main control circuit 100 on the pachi-slot machine 1 so that the player does not mistake the effect as the main game. For example, in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, it is possible to configure the characters "rotary cylinder" to always be displayed on the panel or on a liquid crystal display device or the like. The display is displayed only when the game is being played, and the state where the game is not being played (demo screen is displayed) (during waiting for the game), the state where an error has occurred, and the setting change operation are performed. It may not be displayed in the state where it is performed.

Further, if a power failure occurs while the pseudo game is being performed, the pseudo game may be restarted when the power failure is restored. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 includes a power supply management circuit. The power supply management circuit manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board. The power management circuit is, for example, a microcomputer composed of a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). A reset signal is output to the microcomputer, and when a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the microcomputer. Then, when the power failure detection signal is output from the power supply management circuit, the main CPU 101 stores the information corresponding to the pseudo-game in-game flag (pseudo-game in-game information) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as backup data. The pseudo-game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo-game is being executed (see step S1025 in FIG. 251), is set to on when the pseudo-game starts, and when the pseudo-game ends (see step S1025 in FIG. 251). For example, the lock effect end flag (see step S1073 in FIG. 254 and step S1084 in FIG. 255) is set to off. When recovering from the power failure, the main CPU 101 can recognize that the pseudo game was performed at the time of the power failure based on the backup data, and can restart the pseudo game (FIG. 24). See step S29). At the time of recovery from the power failure, the pseudo game may be restarted from the beginning, or may be restarted from the situation of the pseudo game at the time when the power failure occurs (from the middle of the pseudo game). For example, if a power failure occurs while all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating, the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is restarted from the place where rotation is started (see step S1024 in FIG. 251). If a power failure occurs while at least one reel is stopped, the reel is stopped at the symbol position at the time of the power failure, and the reel that was rotating at the time of the power failure is stopped. The operation may be restarted from the place where the operation is accepted (see step S1063 in FIG. 254).

In addition, if a power failure occurs while a pseudo game is being performed and the set value is changed when recovering from the power failure, the pseudo game will not be restarted in the game after the set value is changed. May be. In this case, for example, the main CPU 101 may initialize the pseudo-game information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 when the set value is changed (see step S23 in FIG. 24). ). As a result, when a power failure occurs while a pseudo game is being performed, if the set value is not changed when recovering from the power failure, the pseudo game is restarted while the set value is changed. In that case, it is possible to configure the pseudo game so that it will not be restarted. Alternatively, if a power failure occurs while the pseudo game is being performed, the pseudo game may not be restarted regardless of whether the set value has been changed when recovering from the power failure. good.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, even when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination in one unit game in the AT state, when the pseudo game is performed in the unit game, the said game is concerned. During the simulated game, it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that the stop operation information is not notified. In this case, in the pseudo game, the symbol combination corresponding to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination unrelated to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of displaying the stop operation information on the instruction monitor in the unit game (main game), when the random delay process is started (for example, the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES". When) or at the timing when the first reel starts to rotate by the random delay process, it is possible to configure the display to start. Further, during the pseudo game, the instruction monitor may display a display (display for notifying that the game is a pseudo game) uniquely corresponding to the game being a pseudo game.

(C-12) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-11).
A start operation detecting means (start switch 7S) capable of detecting a start operation by a player, and
A combination determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S5 in FIG. 23) capable of determining a winning combination when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means.
In the main game, a game medium or a game medium data corresponding to the design aspects of the plurality of reels can be added (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S14 in FIG. 23).
It is equipped with a notification means (instruction monitor) capable of transmitting information that is advantageous to the player.
The granting means
In the main game, when a predetermined symbol mode (combination of symbols related to a small winning combination) is derived as a symbol mode of the plurality of reels by stopping the plurality of reels, the predetermined symbol mode is accommodated. It is possible to add a game medium or game medium data.
The reel control means
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo game, the rotation of the reel of one of the plurality of reels is started for the main game, and further, the rotation start timing of the one reel is set. A pseudo-game post-reel rotation start control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 258) that can start the rotation of the other reel at a late timing is provided.
When a predetermined combination (notification target combination) is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, the reel rotation start control means after the pseudo game starts the rotation of the reel, and then the predetermined stop operation is performed. When the operation (correct answer pressing order) is detected, it is possible to execute the stop control after the stop operation so that the predetermined symbol mode is derived as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels.
The notification means is
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, the information regarding the predetermined stop operation is not notified as the advantageous information in the pseudo game, and the reel rotation start control means after the pseudo game does not notify the information. After starting the rotation of the reel, it is possible to notify the information regarding the predetermined stop operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the simulated game, a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are used for the main game. It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and further start the rotation of the other reel at a timing later than the rotation start timing of the one reel. In addition, when a predetermined combination (notification target combination) is determined as a winning combination, and a predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) is detected as a stop operation after starting the rotation of the reel after the simulated game. , It is possible to execute the stop control after the stop operation so that a predetermined symbol mode (combination of symbols related to the small combination) is derived, and in the main game, the predetermined symbol mode (combination of symbols related to the small combination) can be executed. ) Is derived, it is possible to add a game medium or game medium data according to the predetermined symbol mode (combination of symbols related to a small winning combination). Then, when a predetermined combination (notification target combination) is determined as the winning combination, the information regarding the predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) is not notified in the pseudo game, and after the reel rotation is started after the pseudo game. It is configured to be able to notify information about the predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order). This makes it possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) should be performed in the simulated game, and in combination with the post-stop operation control (swing control). , It is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

As the predetermined combination (notification target combination), a combination in which the number of medals awarded varies according to the player's stop operation mode (pushing order) (for example, the stop operation mode is appropriate), as in the case of the specific combination described above. If the answer is correct), eight payouts can be adopted, and if inappropriate (incorrect answer), one payout or no payout can be adopted. Information on a predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) is notified (display of information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor) after starting the rotation of the reel after the pseudo game, for example, the third stop operation (or the third stop operation in the main game). It may be configured to continue until the first stop operation or the second stop operation) is completed.

[9th Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the ninth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment also applies to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment is limited to, for example, "in the first embodiment" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment". Even if it is described above, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, even if the description is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to eighth embodiments, the pachi-slot according to the ninth embodiment is not deviated from the purpose of the ninth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to eighth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachi-slot machine 1 has the same shape and the same processing as those of the first to eighth embodiments, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Lock effect execution process>
FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game start process performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 is a process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100. In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process). In the present embodiment, as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) of FIG. 23 (main process), the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 may be performed, or FIG. 262. The lock effect execution process shown may be performed.

In the lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see step S1006, step S1011, and step S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1201). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game start process (step S1202). Here, a pseudo game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

In the pseudo game start process, first, in the main CPU 101, the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is any of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5". It is determined whether or not it is (step S1221). If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is none of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the selected lock effect number is any one of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 sets the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The corresponding value is set in the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game (step S1222). The lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is 0 (step S1223). If it is determined that the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. As a result, the lock at the start of the pseudo game is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The lock at the start of the pseudo game may be a reel effect and a lock effect (freeze) without the pseudo game, or a lock effect with a reel effect (reel action such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation). May be good. While the lock at the start of the pseudo game is being performed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is 0, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game start command generation / storage process (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing when the pseudo game starts, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Specifically, when the pseudo game start command data is received, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image having the content of "striking the lever" ("striking the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, has the predetermined time elapsed since the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game start command generation / storage process (after the "slap the lever" image is displayed)? It is determined whether or not (step S1226). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1225. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo game cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the pseudo game. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to off (step S1228), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo game start processing performed in step S1202 of FIG. 262 has been described with reference to FIG. 263. The explanation is returned to FIG. 262.

After executing the process of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo game cancel flag is set to ON (step S1203). When it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1204 to S1210, and these processes are the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 of FIG. 251. Since the processing is the same, the description here is omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when the lock effect corresponding to any one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), the lock at the start of the pseudo game is performed. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are started for the simulated game, the simulated game is performed (see steps S1206 and S1208 in FIG. 262), and random delay processing (see step S1206 and step S1208 in FIG. 262) is performed. (See step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "slap the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game) is not performed. After the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

As described above, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262, it has been described that the pseudo game is started on condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, as described in the eighth embodiment, the conditions for starting the pseudo game are not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, and any operation unit (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1). The operation of the bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. Further, the condition for canceling the pseudo game (the pseudo game cancel flag is set to ON) is not limited to the passage of a predetermined time, and any operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, It is possible to appropriately adopt the operation of the 1-bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.).

<Processing during normal pseudo-game>
FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing a normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a swing control process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game end process performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 264 is a process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-game process) in the main control circuit 100. In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is performed as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process). In the present embodiment, as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (process during pseudo-game), the process during normal pseudo-game shown in FIG. 254 may be performed, or the process during normal pseudo-game shown in FIG. 264 may be performed. It may be done.

In the normal pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1241 and S1242, but since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S1061 and S1062 of FIG. 254, here. The explanation of is omitted.

After executing the process of step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes the stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation acceptance process will be described with reference to FIG. 265.

In the stop button operation acceptance process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1261). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag set when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the pseudo game (see step S1264). When it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated (step S1262). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 of FIG. 254. The main CPU 101 can recognize the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

When it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S is in the ON state.

When it is determined that the MAX bet button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag indicating that all the remaining stop button operations are omitted. After executing the process of step S1264, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the MAX bet button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 (step S1265). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag indicating that the stop button operation is omitted this time. After executing the process of step S1266, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the stop button operation acceptance process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 has been described with reference to FIG. 265. The explanation is returned to FIG. 264.

After executing the process of step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (step S1244), and determines the control target reel (step S1245). In these processes, when neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the process of step S1064 and step S1065 of FIG. 254. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the stop button 8 located on the leftmost of the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R is operated. As the operation stop button storage area is updated, the reel to be controlled is determined.

For example, when all the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same manner as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Bit 4 is updated to "0", and the left reel 3L is determined as the control target reel. Further, when the middle stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 1 of the operation stop button storage area in the same manner as when the middle stop button 8C is operated. Bit 5 is updated to "0", and the middle reel 3C is determined as the control target reel. Further, when the left stop button 8L and the middle stop button 8C are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same manner as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Bit 4 is updated to "0", and the left reel 3L is determined as the control target reel. Further, when only the right stop button 8R is valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit 2 of the operation stop button storage area and sets the bit 6 to "", as when the right stop button 8R is operated. It is updated to "0" and the right reel 3R is determined as the control target reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1246 to S1249, and these processes are basically the same as the processes of steps S1066 to S1069 of FIG. 254. In the process of step S1246, as in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined position as the position where the symbol finally stops, as the scheduled stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). And store. As a result, regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, FIGS. 246 (b) to (d), FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), and FIGS. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped in the manner shown in 248 (b) to (d).

Here, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the control is compared with the case where the stop button operation cancel flag and the stop button operation omission flag are not set to on. The rotation mode until the target reel stops may be different. For example, when the stop button operation cancel flag is set to on (when the MAX bet button 6a is operated), neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to on. Compared with (when the stop button 8 is operated), the time from the operation of the button to the stop of the controlled reel may be longer (for example, one extra control target reel). It may be rotated and then stopped). However, even if there is a difference in the rotation mode, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed will be the same symbol regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on. There is.

When it is determined in step S1249 that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the swing control process (step S1250). Here, the swing control process will be described with reference to FIG. 266.

In the swing control process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1281). When it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation omission flag is set to on (step S1282). When it is determined that the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to off (step S1283).

When it is determined in step S1281 that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, or after the process of step S1283 is executed, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the controlled reel (step S1284). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data corresponding to the stop excitation pattern for stopping the controlled reel. As a result, the controlled reels are maintained in a stopped state in the manners shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to (d), 247 (b) to (d), and 248 (b) to (d). (Unlike the figure, no rocking occurs).

If it is determined in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1285). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254. As a result, the reels to be controlled swing in the manners shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to (d), 247 (b) to (d), and 248 (b) to (d).

After executing the process of step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the swing control process performed in step S1250 of FIG. 264 has been described with reference to FIG. 266. The explanation is returned to FIG. 264.

After executing the process of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button 8L, 8C, 8R exists (step S1251). This process is the same as the process of step S1071 of FIG. 254. If it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R do not exist, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game end process (step S1252). Here, the pseudo game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 267.

In the pseudo game end process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number “3” (step S1301). When it is determined that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 outputs an AT equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As described in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to a data display or a hall computer outside the pachi-slot machine 1, and even in these devices, the insertion status of medals and the game in the pachi-slot machine 1. The state transition status can be recognized.

The AT equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the end of the AT state. In the process of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. Similarly, although not shown, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255. As a result, the data display and the hall computer recognize that the AT state has started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is completed (when the "red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed), the AT equivalent signal is turned on. It is configured to be. Further, as described in the first embodiment, a plurality of AT states (a predetermined AT state and a specific AT state) may be provided, and each AT state may have different advantages for the player. As such an AT state, for example, the pseudo BB (big bonus) and the pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted. Then, in both the case where it is decided to shift to the pseudo BB and the case where it is decided to shift to the pseudo RB, the same symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game. You may do so. Further, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo BB, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and when it is decided to shift to the pseudo RB. The same AT equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game. As a result, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, it is decided which of the pseudo BB and the pseudo RB is to be transferred to the pseudo bonus. It is possible to get rid of it, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. The timing at which the pseudo BB or the pseudo RB actually starts is not particularly limited, but after the specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game (the pseudo game is performed). It is possible to make a unit game or a unit game performed after a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, the pseudo BB was started when the "Red 7" symbol alignment was stopped and displayed along the valid line in the main game, and the "BAR" symbol alignment was stopped and displayed along the valid line in the main game. The pseudo RB may be started at the same time.

In the above, it has been described that the AT equivalent signal is turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed (before the random delay processing is started) in the simulated game. Similarly, the AT equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed (before the random delay processing is started) in the reel effect. .. Further, the AT equivalent signal may be turned on at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually starts (for example, step S106 in FIG. 28). Further, the timing for turning off the AT equivalent signal is not particularly limited, but it is possible to turn off the AT equivalent signal at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually ends (for example, step S155 in FIG. 31). As described in the first embodiment, the external signal 1 (the AT equivalent signal) is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first first set, and the second and subsequent sets are set. The external signal 2 may be turned on each time it is started. From this point of view, the pseudo game may be performed only when it is decided to shift to the AT state of the first set (for example, it is not performed when the 1G continuous lottery is won). Further, when the AT equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is in a lit state.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or when it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5" (that is, the lock effect number "4"), the main CPU 101 is the external centralized terminal. A medal insertion signal is output via the plate 55 (step S1304).

As described in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when a medal is inserted (see steps S42 and S46 in FIG. 25). That is, the medal insertion signal is output each time the main game is played, and the number of games played by the pachi-slot machine 1 can be recognized on the data display or the hall computer via the medal insertion signal. It has become. In the present embodiment, by outputting the medal insertion signal even in the simulated game, the number of times of the game is the number of times including the simulated game (the total number of times of the main game and the number of simulated games). As a result, the specifications are such that the number of games is counted up even when a pseudo game is performed. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs a medal insertion signal even after the process of step S1083 of FIG. 255 is executed.

The medal insertion signal can be output at the timing when the pseudo game starts or at the timing when the pseudo game ends. The timing for starting the simulated game is, for example, when the start lever 7 is operated (for example, when the determination result of step S1225 in FIG. 263 is “YES”), or when the reels 3L, 3C for the simulated game are started. The time when the rotation of the 3R starts (for example, the timing at which the process of step S1206 of FIG. 262 is performed) can be mentioned. The timing at which the simulated game ends is, for example, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the simulated game is stopped (for example, the timing at which the processing of FIG. 267 is performed), or the reels 3L, 3C, for the main game. The time when the rotation of the 3R starts (for example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes “YES” or the timing when the first reel starts rotating due to the random delay process) can be mentioned. When the medal insertion signal is output in the pseudo game, the medal insertion signal may not be output when the medal is inserted in the unit game in which the pseudo game is performed.

After executing the process of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to on (step S1305), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo-game post-reel effect process (step S1306). Since the reel effect processing after the simulated game is as described with reference to FIG. 255, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1306, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo game end processing performed in step S1252 of FIG. 264 has been described with reference to FIG. 267. The explanation is returned to FIG. 264. After executing the process of step S1252, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo game challenge operation reception process>
FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 is a process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal process during pseudo-game) in the main control circuit 100. In the above, it has been described that the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo-game processing). In the present embodiment, as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal process during pseudo-game), the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 may be performed.

Specifically, when all the stop buttons 8 are valid (when none of the stop buttons 8 have been operated yet), that is, when the stop operation this time is the first stop operation, it is shown in FIG. 268. It is assumed that the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process is performed, and when an invalid stop button 8 exists (when at least one stop button 8 has been operated), that is, the current stop operation is the second stop operation or the third stop operation. In the case of a stop operation, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo-game challenge operation reception process, the main CPU 101 first determines the pseudo-game progress stop button (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the stop button 8 of one of the right stop buttons 8R as a pseudo game progress stop button by performing a lottery based on a random number value. decide.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start command generation / storage process (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing when the pseudo game starts, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Specifically, when the pseudo game start command data is received, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image having the content of "pseudo-game start with three correct answers of the stop button" is displayed on the main display device 210, and the player is urged to operate the stop button 8. Can be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated (step S1323). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 of FIG. 254. When it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button determined in step S1321 (step). S1324).

When it is determined that the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine and shifts the process to step S1244 of FIG. 264. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operated stop button 8 does not match the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag on (step S1325), and ends this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the pseudo game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 does not perform the processes of steps S1244 to S1252 of FIG. 264 after the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 is completed. The normal pseudo-game process shown in FIG. 264 is terminated, and the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 is terminated without performing the processes of step S1209 and step S1210 of FIG. 262.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1326 to S1329, and these processes are performed in steps S1263 to S1263 of FIG. 265. Since the processing is the same as the processing of S1266, the description here will be omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when the stop button for pseudo game progress (for example, the left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (when the correct answer is 3 choices of the stop button), the pseudo game continues and random delay processing is performed. (See step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, when the stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) other than the pseudo game progress stop button is operated as the first stop operation (when the three selections of the stop buttons fail), At that point, the pseudo game ends, and after the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game is started, the pseudo game is configured to proceed on condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated. Is possible. On the other hand, such an appropriate operation of the stop button 8 may be adopted as a condition for starting the pseudo game. For example, in FIG. 263, it has been described that the pseudo game is started on condition that the start lever 7 is operated, but instead of the operation of the start lever 7, an appropriate stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) is described. ) May be operated, and the pseudo game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game) may be started. Then, when an inappropriate stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo game is canceled (in the first place, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game). Will not be done).

<Determination of freeze type>
FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

FIG. 269 shows how the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of freezes (freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect that does not involve a reel effect or a pseudo game. Freeze B is a lock effect accompanied by a forward rotation reel effect. Freeze C is a lock effect accompanied by a reverse rotation reel effect. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze from Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C. The determined freeze will be executed, for example, as a lock at the start of a pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, FIG. 269 shows how the freeze A image 1201, the freeze B image 1202, the freeze C image 1203, and the arrow image 1204 are displayed as the freeze type determination screen. The arrow image 1204 is an image for showing which of the freeze A image 1201, the freeze B image 1202, and the freeze C image 1203 is selected. In the example shown in FIG. 269, the arrow image 1204 is displayed close to the side of the freeze A image 1201, indicating that the freeze A image 1201 is selected.

As described above, in the state where the freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selection state), the arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze A image 1201. Similarly, in the state where the freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selected state), the arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze B image 1202. In the state where the freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selected state), the arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze C image 1203.

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched by any of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, in the hall menu, one of these methods is set.
(A) Operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (b) Operation of MAX bet button 6a (c) Timer management

When the above (a) is set, the player operates the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 to position the arrow image 1204. Can be switched, and the type of freeze can be determined by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze A selected state, the freeze A is determined, and when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze B selected state, the freeze B is determined and the freeze C is determined. When the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state, freeze C is determined.

When the above (b) is set, the player switches the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX bet button 6a while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. Is possible, and the type of freeze can be determined by operating the start lever 7. Specifically, when the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selected state, the freeze A is determined, and when the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selected state, the freeze B is determined and the freeze C selected state. When the start lever 7 is operated in, freeze C is determined.

When the above (c) is set, one of the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state is displayed when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. From to another state (for example, freeze A selection state → freeze B selection state → freeze C selection state → freeze A selection state, etc.), and the state is switched at predetermined time intervals. At this time, the player can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze A selected state, the freeze A is determined, and when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze B selected state, the freeze B is determined and the freeze C is determined. When the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state, freeze C is determined. If the MAX bet button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, the type of freeze is determined according to the state when the time has elapsed. Alternatively, the freeze of the selected type may be determined by lottery.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited, but for example, when the combination of symbols related to BB is stopped and displayed along the valid line (BB wins), the freeze type determination is determined. It can be configured to display the screen. For example, when the BB wins a prize in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed. Alternatively, when the BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed until the start lever 7 operation in the next unit game is performed.

In the above, the case where the type of freeze is determined has been described, but the type of lock effect to be performed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won or the 1G continuous lottery is won is also determined by the same method. good. For example, on the same screen as in FIG. 269, the lock effect A (for example, the reel effect and the lock effect without pseudo game) and the lock effect B (for example, the reel effect) are performed by the methods (a) to (c) above. The lock effect of one of the lock effect (for example, the lock effect accompanied by a pseudo game) and the lock effect C (for example, the lock effect accompanied by a pseudo game) may be determined. In step S1005, step S1010, and step S1012 of FIG. 250, the lock effect thus determined may be selected. Further, the type of the swing pattern (for example, the swing pattern of one of the swing pattern A, the swing pattern B, and the swing pattern C described in the eighth embodiment) is determined by the same method. It may be configured so that it can be done. The effect determined in this way is not limited to the effect controlled by the main control circuit 100, and may be an effect controlled by the sub control circuit 200.

<Processing at the time of bonus winning>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing a bonus winning process performed in the main control circuit.

The bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) is executed. That is, the bonus winning process has shifted from the non-bonus state (neither the bonus state nor the carry-over state) to the carry-over state (between the flags) by determining the bonus winning combination as the internal winning combination. In the unit game), this is a process performed before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts.

In the bonus winning process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the BB is determined as the internal winning combination (whether or not the unit game this time is the BB winning game) (step S1341). If it is determined that the BB has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 is any of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" (see FIG. 243). Is selected by lottery (step S1342). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lock effect number corresponding to the pseudo game is selected, the effect image 1100 (see FIG. 252) “Aim at 7” is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 251). I explained it as a thing. Thereby, during the simulated game, the player can be urged to perform the stop operation at the timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the “Aim for 7” effect image 1100 may be displayed on the main display device 210, but here, the “Aim for BAR” effect image (not shown) is mainly displayed. It shall be displayed on the device 210. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to perform the stop operation at the timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R during the simulated game.

Further, here, after the BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB state is obtained when the "Red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed along the valid line in the main game (the "Red 7" symbol alignment is established). Is started, and after MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the MB state is started when the "BAR" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed along the valid line in the main game (the "BAR" symbol alignment is established). I will do it. In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), it can be said that the player should aim at the "red 7" symbol when operating each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R.

However, as described above, when the "Aim for BAR" effect image is displayed in the pseudo game, the "Aim for BAR" effect image is continuously displayed even after the pseudo game ends and the game shifts to the main game. If so, the player is made to aim at a symbol (“BAR” symbol) different from the symbol (“Red 7” symbol) that should be aimed originally. Then, there is a high possibility that the "Red 7" symbol alignment will not be stopped and displayed along the valid line (BB will not win).

In particular, when the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are arranged apart from each other in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, the probability is very high. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, in at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C), the symbol position (“0”) corresponding to the “red 7” symbol corresponds to the symbol position (“9”) corresponding to the “BAR” symbol. ) Does not exist within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols), the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "BAR" symbol is displayed on the effective line for the reel 3 (middle reel 3C). If it is, it will be impossible for BB to win a prize. In this sense, the "Aim for BAR" staging image is a suggestion for preventing the BB from winning a prize.

In any case, the "Aim for BAR" effect image displayed in the simulated game is at a predetermined timing so that the player can prevent the player from misidentifying the design (internal winning combination) that should be aimed at. It is desirable to end the display. The timing may be before the start of the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) or after the start of the random delay process. Specifically, the timing is, for example, between the time when the second stop reel is stopped and the time when the third stop reel is stopped in the simulated game (for example, the determination result of step S1262 in FIG. 265 is “YES” and the stop is concerned. When the operation of the button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the determination result of step S1265 in FIG. 265 becomes "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), and when all the remaining stop button operations are omitted. (For example, when the determination result of step S1263 in FIG. 265 is "YES"), from the time when the third stop reel is stopped until the third stop reel starts swinging (for example, the step of FIG. 264). When the determination result of S1249 is "YES" and the controlled reel is the third stop reel), the timing at which all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped in the simulated game (for example, the determination result of step S1251 in FIG. 264 is After "YES", before the processing of step S1252 is performed), when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the main game starts (for example, the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES". When it becomes, or when the first reel starts to rotate due to random delay processing), after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts for the main game, the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. It can be mentioned until the constant speed is reached.

Further, if another effect for pseudo-game (for example, swing control) is performed at the timing when the display of the "Aim for BAR" effect image is finished, the effect may be finished. Further, at the same timing, an effect corresponding to the determination of the BB as the internal winning combination (BB suggestion effect) is started (an image suggesting that the BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (for example, "Aim for 7"). "The effect image 1100) may be displayed). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the symbol (internal winning combination) to be aimed at, and to give a suggestion that the "Red 7" symbol should be aimed.

As described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, it is possible to configure the predetermined symbol to be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims at the "BAR" symbol when operating each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (the timing at which the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Even if the stop operation is performed with (), the "Red 7" symbol alignment may be established. This makes it possible to suggest that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination through the "Red 7" symbol alignment. If the "Red 7" symbol alignment is established in the simulated game, the BB suggestion effect may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, in the pseudo game, the "BAR" symbol alignment is established according to the timing at which the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (stop operation at an appropriate timing). If is not performed, the "BAR" symbol alignment may not be established). Further, in the pseudo game, the "BAR" symbol alignment may be established regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Alternatively, in the pseudo game, although the "BAR" symbol is tempted, the "BAR" symbol alignment may not be established (the remaining one "BAR" symbol may not be stopped and displayed). If the "Red 7" symbol alignment is not established in the simulated game, it is desirable to perform the above BB suggestion effect in the main game.

In this way, every time the "red 7" symbol to the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, swing control is performed for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see step S1285 in FIG. 266). ) Is performed. As described in the eighth embodiment, the swing control is performed in a state where the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are located at the center of vibration or a state in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are substantially completely stopped. In, the "red 7" symbol to the "BAR" symbol is positioned on the effective line.

As described above, when the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 may not be performed, and in addition to the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270, FIG. 250 shows. The lock effect determination process shown may also be performed. Further, although not shown, when the BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" (so-called "gase effect") may be performed.

<Rock effect determination process at the end of the game>
FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination process at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit.

The game end lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 271 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 of FIG. 31 (process at the end of the game in the advantageous section) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1361). This process is the same as the process of step S1001 of FIG. 250. When it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been won (step S1362). As described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the main game is stopped, the sub flag at the time of winning the advantageous section as secondary information (sub flag) according to the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (Fig. 7 (a)) is determined. Then, in the production section (advantageous section / normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7 (c)) is referred to, and the lottery based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is performed. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined. In addition, although "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided as "winning", these are not distinguished here.

If it is determined that the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 draws any one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" (see FIG. 243). (Step S1363). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1364), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed.

Although not shown, any one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" is used even when the 1G continuous lottery (see FIG. 7 (d)) is won. It may be selected (the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed). Further, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (and 1G continuous lottery) has not been won, one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" is selected (lock effect number "2" or "4"). A lock effect corresponding to the above may be performed).

<Lock effect execution process at the end of the game>
FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game performed in the main control circuit.

The game end lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 272 is a process performed in step S16 (main side effect control process at the end of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the game end lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 271) is set to ON (step S1381). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect start process at the end of the game (step S1382). Here, the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 273.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the replay has won a prize (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the effective line is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

When it is determined that the replay has won a prize, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect start command generation / storage process at the time of the replay winning (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates the lock effect start command data at the time of replay winning, and stores the generated lock effect start command data at the time of replay winning in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing when the replay wins and the lock effect is started, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock effect start command data at the time of winning the replay, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data corresponding to the replay winning and the lock effect being started. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image (bet request image) having the content of "please bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, and a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) is displayed to the player. It is possible to encourage the operation of 6b). When the replay wins, the operation of the bet button should not be necessary, but the bet request image can make the player feel unexpectedly.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S is in the ON state. When it is determined that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the MAX bet button 6a nor the 1-bet button 6b is operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When it is determined that the start lever 7 is not operated, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect start command generation / storage process at the time of replay winning (after the bet request image is displayed) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Is determined (step S1405).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1403. When it is determined in step S1404 that the start lever 7 has been operated, or when it is determined in step S1405 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to off (step S1407), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the replay has not won a prize, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect start command generation / storage process at the time of winning other than the replay (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock effect start command data at the time of winning other than replay, and stores the generated lock effect start command data at the time of winning other than replay in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock effect start command data at the time of winning other than the replay stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing when the winning combination other than the replay wins and the lock effect is started, and it is possible to determine the timing and the like for executing various effects. can.

Specifically, when the lock effect start command data at the time of winning other than the replay is received, the effect data corresponding to the winning of the winning combination other than the replay and the start of the lock effect is set in the sub-control circuit 200. To. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image having the content of "striking the lever" ("striking the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to. When a role other than the replay is won, the player should be surprised through the "hit the lever" image, where the bet button should be operated before the start lever 7 is operated.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start lever 7 is not operated, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect start command generation / storage process at the time of winning other than the replay (after the "slap the lever" image is displayed) for a predetermined time. It is determined whether or not (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S1410). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to off (step S1412), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game performed in step S1382 of FIG. 272 has been described with reference to FIG. 273. The explanation is returned to FIG. 272.

After executing the process of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON (step S1383). When it is determined that the lock effect cancel flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock effect cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1384 to S1390, and these processes are the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 of FIG. 251. Since the processing is the same, the description here is omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when it is determined that the lock effect is performed in the unit game in which the replay wins, the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated to perform the reel 3L for the lock effect. The rotation of 3C and 3R is started to perform a lock effect (see step S1386 and step S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, the reels 3L and 3C are subjected to random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257). , 3R rotation is the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, although it was decided that the lock effect would be performed in the unit game in which the replay won a prize, the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) was not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image was displayed. In this case, or when the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect) is not performed, and the normal acceleration process (FIG. 257) is performed in the next unit game. (Refer to step S1125), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game shown in FIG. 273, if the start lever 7 is operated without operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the next unit game is started. It is supposed to proceed. In this case, the operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. That is, when the determination result of step S1404 in FIG. 273 is "YES", the determination result of step S50 in FIG. 25 is "YES" without waiting for the start lever 7 to be operated in the next unit game. It may be configured to be. However, unlike the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game shown in FIG. 273, the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) may be configured so as not to proceed to the next unit game unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. .. Further, even if the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated or the next unit game is proceeded, the bet button (MAX) over a considerably long time (for example, 1 minute). It may be configured to proceed to the next unit game only when the bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b) is not operated.

Further, when it is determined that the lock effect is performed in the unit game in which a combination other than the replay is won, the start lever 7 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect. (See step S1386 and step S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated for the main game after undergoing random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257). It becomes a constant speed rotation of. On the other hand, if it is decided that the lock effect will be performed in the unit game in which a role other than the replay is won, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the start lever 7 is not operated. In the next unit game, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed through the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257) without performing the lock effect (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect). Is the constant speed rotation for the main game. It should be noted that the unit may be configured so as not to proceed to the next unit game unless the start lever 7 is operated, or the next unit is finally reached when the start lever 7 is not operated for a considerably long time (for example, 1 minute). It may be configured to proceed to the game.

<Stop button light emission control processing during simulated game>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, the stop button light emission control process during the simulated game is performed during the simulated game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1243 in FIG. 264, and then executes the stop button light emission control process during the simulated game. As a result, for example, the lighting mode of each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R changes. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

Each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has the same configuration, and has a stop button cover having a pressing portion that the player can contact, and a stop arranged at a position deeper than the stop button cover. It is equipped with an LED for a button. The stop button LED is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of types of colors including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED is transmitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the stop button cover and is visible to the player. It is possible.

In the present embodiment, the stop button LEDs of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are effective in the simulated game, are configured to emit light. Specifically, in step S1242 of FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 controls so that all the stop button LEDs of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are turned on. Further, in step S1244 of FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 turns off the stop button LED of the stop button 8 operated this time (or the stop button 8 whose stop button operation is omitted and is considered to have been operated). To control. Alternatively, when it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the stop button 8 operated this time (or the stop button 8 which is considered to have been operated because the stop button operation is omitted). The LED for the stop button may be controlled to be turned off.

Further, when the main CPU 101 turns on the stop button LED of the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, the main CPU 101 may control the emission color of the stop button LED to be a specific color (for example, red). good. Further, in the main CPU 101, the LED for the stop button of the stop button 8 operated this time (or the stop button 8 which is considered to have been operated because the stop button operation is omitted) emits light in a specific color (for example, red). It may be controlled to do so.

At this time, if it is decided to grant the privilege to the player (for example, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), it is not decided to grant the privilege. Compared with the case (for example, the case where the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the stop button LED may be controlled to emit light in a specific color (for example, red) with a high probability. .. Further, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), the emission color of the stop button LED is a predetermined color. It may be controlled so that the probability that the emission color of the stop button LED becomes a specific color (for example, red) is higher than the probability that the color becomes (for example, blue).

Thereby, the expected degree of the pseudo game can be suggested to the player through the emission color of the LED for the stop button. Such control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player is highly expected, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (for example, red). Can also be said to reduce the player's expectation relatively.

In the above, the effect of changing the lighting mode of each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R has been described, but the lighting mode of the start lever 7 and the bet button (MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b) may be changed. .. For example, the start lever 7, and the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided with a translucent cover and an LED, respectively, like the stop button 8. The cover of the start lever 7 can be a spherical portion that can be grasped by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be turned on when the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image is displayed on the main display device 210, or when the above-mentioned bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210. The LED of the MAX bet button 6a to the 1-bet button 6b may be turned on.

Further, at this time, the expected degree of the pseudo game may be suggested to the player through the emission color of the LED in the start lever 7 to the bet button. For example, when it is decided to give a privilege to a player (for example, when a pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), when it is not decided to give the privilege. Compared to (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the LED of the start lever 7 to the bet button is controlled to emit light in a specific color (for example, red) with a high probability. You may. Further, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), the emission color of the LED in the start lever 7 to the bet button is emitted. May be controlled so that the probability that the emission color of the LED in the start lever 7 to the bet button becomes a specific color (for example, red) is higher than the probability that the color becomes a predetermined color (for example, blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, and the 1-bet button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or may be controlled by the sub control circuit 200. May be good. When the LED is configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, the main CPU 101 generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode when the lighting mode of the LED is changed, and generates a command. The data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In the main game as well, the effect of changing the lighting mode of the LED may be performed as in the pseudo game.

<Backlight production>
As described in the first embodiment, a light source (reel lamp) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at least at a position where the design can be visually recognized from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, 3C, 3C is provided. When the 3Rs are rotating, the visibility of the design is ensured by illuminating them from the inside with a constant brightness.

In the present embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) using such a reel lamp (reel backlight) is performed. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs (LEDs for reel lighting) are arranged as reel backlights on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. These reel lighting LEDs are inside the reel body in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R so that the nine symbols stopped and displayed in the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated one by one. Is located in.

In the following, the reel lighting LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the left reel 3L is referred to as an upper left reel lighting LED, and the reel lighting LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the left reel 3L is referred to as a left middle reel lighting LED. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the lower area of the left reel 3L is called the lower left reel lighting LED, and the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the upper area of the middle reel 3C is called the middle upper reel lighting LED, and the middle reel 3C. The LED for reel lighting that can illuminate the middle area is called the LED for middle and middle reel lighting, and the LED for reel lighting that can illuminate the lower area of the middle reel 3C is called the LED for middle and lower reel lighting, and the upper part of the right reel 3R. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the area is called the upper right reel lighting LED, the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the middle area of the right reel 3R is called the right middle reel lighting LED, and the lower area of the right reel 3R is illuminated. A possible reel lighting LED will be referred to as a lower right reel lighting LED.

Upper left reel lighting LED, left middle reel lighting LED, lower left reel lighting LED, middle upper reel lighting LED, middle middle reel lighting LED, middle lower reel lighting LED, upper right reel lighting LED, right middle reel lighting A plurality of LEDs are provided as the LED for lighting and the LED for lighting the lower right reel, respectively, so that a backlight effect having a complicated lighting pattern can be realized in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It has become.

The backlight effect is performed by turning off the lighting LED for reel lighting as each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in the simulated game. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in the simulated game (see step S1206 in FIG. 262 and step S1386 in FIG. 272), the LED for the upper left reel illumination and the LED for the left middle reel illumination are used. LED, LED for lower left reel lighting, LED for middle upper reel lighting, LED for middle middle reel lighting, LED for middle lower reel lighting, LED for upper right reel lighting, LED for right middle reel lighting, and LED for lower right reel lighting Is controlled so that all lights are lit.

Then, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S1249 of FIG. 264 that the controlled reel has stopped, the reel lighting LED capable of illuminating the upper region of the controlled reel and the reel capable of illuminating the middle region of the controlled reel. Of the lighting LED and the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the lower region of the reel to be controlled, the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the region not located on the effective line is controlled to be turned off. For example, assume that the effective line is the center line and the controlled reel is the left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 controls so that the upper left reel lighting LED and the lower left reel lighting LED are turned off, while the left middle reel lighting LED is kept on. When turning off the LED for reel lighting that can illuminate the area not located on the effective line, all of the plurality of LEDs provided as the LED for reel lighting may be turned off, or one of the plurality of LEDs. The LED of the unit may be turned off.

As a result, the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area not located on the effective line is reduced, but the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area located on the effective line is ensured. For example, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “3” (see FIG. 243), in the state shown in FIG. 246 (b), the visibility of “BAR” and “replay” is lowered with respect to the right reel 3R, while the visibility is reduced. The visibility of "Red 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246 (c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 246 (b), and in the middle reel 3C, the visibility of the "watermelon" and the "yellow blank" is lowered, while the visibility is lowered. The visibility of "Red 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246 (d), the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C are the same as the state shown in FIG. 246 (c), and the visibility of the "white blank 1" and the "watermelon" is the same for the left reel 3L. On the other hand, the visibility of "Red 7" is ensured. Therefore, even if some of the reel lighting LEDs are turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the "Red 7" symbols are aligned.

When turning off the reel lighting LED that can illuminate an area not located on the effective line, the reel lighting LED is turned off so that the visibility of the design in the area located on the effective line does not deteriorate. It is desirable to configure. For example, a structure may be provided in which a partition plate or the like is provided between adjacent regions so that the visibility of the design in each region is not interfered with by the lighting mode of the reel lighting LED in the other regions.

Further, after turning off the reel lighting LED capable of illuminating a region not located on the effective line, the LED may be turned on or off again. At that time, the degree of expectation of the pseudo-game may be suggested to the player through the lighting pattern of the LED. For example, when it is decided to give a privilege to a player (for example, when a pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), when it is not decided to give the privilege. Compared with (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the LED may be controlled to light in a specific pattern with a high probability. In addition, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), the probability that the LED lights up in a predetermined pattern is used. However, it may be controlled so that the probability that the LED is turned on in a specific pattern is high.

The reel lighting LED may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or may be controlled by the sub control circuit 200. When the LED for reel lighting is configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the lighting mode of the LED for reel lighting is changed, the main CPU 101 generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode. , The generated command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In the main game as well, the effect of changing the lighting mode of the reel lighting LED may be performed as in the pseudo game.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274A to 274C. Note that FIG. 274A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 274B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 274C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 100, as shown in FIG. 274A, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the XCS decoding area are arranged from the head (0000H) side of the address. They are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 274B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, and the security setting area from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. In order, they are placed at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and various sub-control circuits 42 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) consisting of the program area and the data area is necessary for control processing (process related to game performance) related to the game performance actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-regulated area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing at the time of power failure and thumb check processing at power recovery, and fraud countermeasure programs. And the data required for it are stored in the non-standard area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 274C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of the predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a thumb check process, are executed using this non-standard RAM area.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are played in the main ROM 102. It is stored in the non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area for use. Further, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an out-of-specification RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rule. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Test firing test signal control processing (not specified)>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, a test firing test signal control process (outside the regulation) is performed in the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32). After executing the process of step S208 of FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 executes the test firing test signal control process (out of specification). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process for outputting various test signals to the tester via the first interface board 301 for the tester and the second interface board 302 for the tester (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area of the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-specified stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves the data of all the registers. Then, the main CPU 101 performs rotation control signals (drive signals) and bonuses (drive signals) of each reel as processing related to signals output to the tester via the first interface board 301 for the tester to the second interface board 302 for the tester. Processing is performed to output the ON / OFF signal (test signal) of the special prize), the control signal corresponding to the state of the condition device signal control flag, and the like. Then, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the data of all the saved registers, and sets the address of the saved stack area in the stack pointer (SP).

Such a test firing test signal control process (non-standard) is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 274C) of the main RAM 103. The test firing test signal control process (outside the regulation) is also performed at times other than the test firing test (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the game store). At this time, the main control board 71 is the first for the test machine. Since it is not connected to the testing machine via the 1 interface board 301 or the second interface board 302 for the testing machine, various test signals are not output even if they are generated.

Here, as described in the first embodiment, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) is configured to output a test signal (pseudo-game signal) so that the tester can recognize that the pseudo-game is being performed during the pseudo-game. It is possible. The control process for outputting the pseudo game signal may be performed in the test firing test signal control process (outside the regulation). In this case, the control process for outputting the pseudo game signal is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 274C) of the main RAM 103.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives the pseudo game signal, the main control is performed by outputting the signal for the pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71. The pseudo game may be promoted on the board 71 side (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with the pseudo game progress function). In this case, the pseudo game signal is input from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine, and the pseudo game signal is input from the second interface board 302 for the testing machine to the first interface board 301 for the testing machine. It may be configured. Then, by transmitting a signal (stop signal) for pseudo game progress control from the first interface board 301 for the test machine to the main control board 71, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped (pseudo stop) in the pseudo game. ) Can be configured to be. As a result, the test firing test can proceed smoothly.

Further, when the replay wins and the pseudo game is performed (see FIG. 273), a test signal (cancellation signal) is output so that the tester can recognize that the replay has won the prize. It is possible to configure it as such. In this case, a cancel signal (a signal to urge the operation of the bet button) is output from the main control board 71 to the testing machine via the first interface board 301 for the testing machine (second interface board 302 for the testing machine). Alternatively, after inputting a signal from the main control board 71 to the first interface board 301 for the testing machine (second interface board 302 for the testing machine) indicating that the replay wins and the pseudo game is performed, the signal is input. A cancellation signal may be output from the first interface board 301 for the testing machine (second interface board 302 for the testing machine) to the testing machine. After that, by outputting a signal (bet signal) corresponding to the bet made to the testing machine, it is possible to start the next game, and the test firing test can proceed smoothly. .. The control process for outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the test firing test signal control process (outside the regulation). In addition, when the replay wins and the pseudo game is performed, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R outside the effective line becomes "bell"-"bell"-"bell". However, it is possible to adopt a case where the winning combination is a replay.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a lottery for winning combination and a sub reel for directing is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214500). The sub reels are formed to be larger than the main reels, are arranged in a prominent position, and are arranged in an arrangement in which symbols that are easy for the player to identify are easy to identify. This makes the sub-reel look like a central reel to the player.

In a gaming machine provided with such a sub-reel, the player performs a stop operation to rotate the sub-reel and then stop it in a mode (for example, reverse rotation, frame advance, etc.) that is difficult to execute on the main reel. Reel production may be performed.

On the other hand, even in a gaming machine equipped with only the main reel, an effect using such a reel (a game medium (medal) according to the display mode of the stopped reel, although the reel is stopped by the player performing a stop operation). Etc.)) can be performed, but when such an effect (pseudo game) is performed on the main reel, the player can decide the operation related to the pseudo game. It is desirable to increase the degree of freedom of operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine in which the player himself / herself can determine an operation related to a pseudo game and can increase the degree of freedom of the operation. The purpose.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that have a plurality of symbols and can be driven to rotate,
A stop operation detecting means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, and
A reel control means for controlling the reel (main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S203 in FIG. 32) is provided.
The reel control means can execute stop operation after the stop operation to stop the rotating reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means.
When the reel is stopped by the stop operation after the stop operation, the game medium (medal) or the game medium data corresponding to the design aspects of the plurality of reels can be given to the main game, and the stop operation after the stop operation is used to control the game. When the reels are stopped, it is possible to execute a game medium or a pseudo game in which the game medium data is not added according to the symbol mode of the plurality of reels.
The operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the game medium (medal) or the game according to the design aspect of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). A main game to which medium (medal) data can be assigned, and a game medium (medal) or game according to the design mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to execute a pseudo game without adding medium (medal) data, and it is configured so that an operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted. As a result, the operation for advancing the simulated game can be canceled at the player's will, so that the player himself can decide the operation, and the degree of freedom of the operation can be increased. Further, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to omit the operation, and it is possible to reduce the operation load.

The operation for advancing the pseudo game includes an operation for advancing the pseudo game when the pseudo game is being performed (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation). In addition, operations for starting a pseudo game are also included. The operation for starting the pseudo game is the predetermined operation in the case where the pseudo game is configured to be started when the predetermined operation is detected. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and an arbitrary operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) is appropriately operated. It is possible to adopt.

As described in the eighth embodiment, when the game is played using physical medals in the pachislot machine 1, the main game is a plurality of reels (reel 3L) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. , 3C, 3R) is a game in which a game medium (medal) corresponding to a symbol mode can be given, and in a pseudo game, a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is a game in which a game medium (medal) corresponding to a symbol mode is not given. On the other hand, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is a design of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game in which game medium (medal) data can be added according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a design mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that does not give the corresponding game medium (medal) data. The game medium (medal) data is data corresponding to the game value possessed by the player, and as described in the first embodiment, electromagnetically (or in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). It is managed.

(D-2) The gaming machine of the above (D-1).
When the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, the reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) has the plurality of reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) by the stop operation after the stop operation in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop the plurality of reels so as to have the same symbol mode as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels when the reels of the above are stopped.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C,) are controlled by the stop operation after the stop operation in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) so that the symbol aspect of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is the same as that of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the 3R) is stopped. It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted, the same symbol mode as in the case where the operation is not omitted is derived as a result of the pseudo game, and therefore the intention to omit the operation. You can have the player make the decision with confidence.

However, in the pseudo game, the design aspect of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped. And, in the pseudo game, when a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the design aspect of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be different. There may be. For example, in a simulated game, when a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined symbol (for example, "red") 7 "symbol) is stopped and displayed, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the predetermined symbol (for example, the" red 7 "design) is not stopped and displayed, while the pseudo game is advanced in the pseudo game. When a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped, a predetermined symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) is always displayed as a stop. May be.

(D-3) The gaming machine according to (D-1) or (D-2).
A predetermined operation detecting means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is provided.
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) stops the rotating reel after a predetermined operation when the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game. Control is feasible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is detected in the simulated game, the stop control after the predetermined operation for stopping the rotating reel is performed. It is configured to be viable. As a result, as an operation for advancing the pseudo game, it is possible for the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (omission of the stop operation) at the player's will. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to perform an operation other than the stop operation in the game, and it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the operation in the simulated game.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in the simulated game, all the remaining stop button operations are omitted. The stop button operation omitted when the predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not limited to this example, and only the stop button operation this time may be omitted. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and an operation of an arbitrary operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. For example, when one operation unit (for example, MAX bet button 6a) is operated, all the remaining stop button operations are omitted, while the other operation unit (for example, 1 bet button 6b) is operated. In that case, it may be configured so that only the stop button operation this time is omitted.

The stop control after the predetermined operation may be the same control as the stop control after the stop operation, or may be a control different from the stop control after the stop operation. When the stop control after a predetermined operation is the same as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51). Data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as stop control after a predetermined operation (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). ). On the other hand, when the stop control after a predetermined operation is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51). Excitation data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as stop control after a predetermined operation (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are different controls (excitation). Data).

(D-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-3).
It is possible to execute a reeling effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation.
After the rotation effect is completed, the pseudo game can be executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, it is configured so that a pseudo game can be executed after the reeling effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation is completed. There is. As a result, it is possible to perform the effect in two stages of the spinning body effect (reel effect) and the simulated game, and the player can indicate that the simulated game is subsequently generated at the stage where the spinning body effect (reel effect) occurs. Can be expected.

As the spinning effect (reel effect), the lock at the start of the pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263) may be adopted, or the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “6” (see FIG. 243) is performed. A reel effect may be adopted.

(D-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-4).
A lock execution means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1223 in FIG. 263) capable of executing a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time is provided.
After the predetermined lock executed by the lock executing means is completed, the pseudo game can be executed.
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) can execute post-stop operation control (swing control) to operate the reel stopped by the stop operation post-stop control in the pseudo game. On the other hand, while the predetermined lock is being executed by the lock executing means, the operation control after the stop is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the pseudo game can be executed after the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time is completed. After the stop operation While it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) that operates the stopped reel by the stop control, the post-stop operation control (lock at the start of the pseudo game) is executed while the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) is executed. It is configured not to execute swing control). As a result, it is possible to perform the effect in two stages of a predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) and a pseudo game, and when the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) occurs, the pseudo game is subsequently generated. You can expect the player to do that. Further, in the pseudo game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being performed is a pseudo game through the motion control (swing control) after the stop, and the player can play the game as the main game. It is possible to prevent misidentification as. On the other hand, in the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game), the operation by the player is invalidated, and the possibility that the player misidentifies the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) as the main game is relative. It is low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game), it is possible to make the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo game stand out. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

As described in the ninth embodiment, even if the player performs some operation while the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) is being executed, the operation becomes invalid and the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) is locked. ) Is completed, the operation for pseudo-game is accepted (see step S1225 in FIG. 263 and steps S1262 and S1263 in FIG. 265). Further, as described in the ninth embodiment, the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) may be a lock effect without a reel effect or a lock effect with a reel effect. When the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) is accompanied by a reel effect, when the reel is stopped in the reel effect, the operation control after the stop (swing control) may be performed, or the operation control after the stop may be performed. (Swing control) may not be performed.

(D-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-5).
A predetermined operation detecting means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is provided.
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) is
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detecting means in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute the stop control after the predetermined operation to stop the rotating reel.
When the stop operation after the stop operation is executed, the reel is stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, while when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to stop the reel at a timing later than the predetermined timing after the detection of.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is detected in the simulated game, the stop control after the predetermined operation for stopping the rotating reel is performed. It is feasible. Then, when the stop control is executed after the stop operation, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, while when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the predetermined operation (MAX bet) is executed. It is configured so that the reel can be stopped at a timing later than a predetermined timing after the button 6a operation) is detected. As a result, as an operation for advancing the pseudo game, it is possible for the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (omission of the stop operation) at the player's will. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to perform an operation other than the stop operation in the game, and it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the operation in the simulated game. In addition, it is possible to provide a novel reel action to the player by delaying the reel stop timing when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed compared to when the stop operation is performed. Therefore, even if the stop operation is omitted, the player can enjoy the simulated game.

The reel action when the predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not particularly limited, and the reel may be stopped after being rotated more than when the stop operation is performed. The reel may be stopped after changing (slowering) the rotation speed (for example, frame-by-frame) as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed, or the rotation direction is changed (reverse rotation). You may want to stop the reels above. Such a reel action is realized by performing drive control of the stepping motor 51 based on an excitation pattern different from that when the stop operation is performed when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed. be able to.

It should be noted that such a reel action (extra rotation, change of rotation speed, change of rotation direction, etc.) may be executed even when a stop operation (stop button 8 operation) is performed in the simulated game. For example, for at least one of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), even after the stop operation for the reel is performed, the reel is not stopped immediately but is made to make one or more laps (the relevant reel). It may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop button 8 corresponding to the reel is operated. The one reel may be the first stop reel (the reel that is the target of the first stop operation) or the second stop reel (the reel that is the target of the second stop operation). However, it may be a third stop reel (a reel that is the target of the third stop operation). When the one reel is the first stop reel, the first stop reel may be stopped after the second stop reel to the third stop reel are stopped, and similarly, the one reel is In the case of the second stop reel, the second stop reel may be stopped after the third stop reel is stopped. Further, such a reel action may be performed for all reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Even if the reel action is performed, the point that the reel is stopped due to the stop operation is the same. Therefore, if the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the reel is stopped. It is desirable that the post-motion control (swing control) is executed.

(D-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-6).
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) controls the operation after the stop operation (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) to operate the stopped reel when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. (Swing control) can be executed, but when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game and the reel is stopped, the operation control after the stop is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a reel is stopped by the stop operation after the stop operation in the simulated game, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the stopped reel can be executed. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the reel is stopped, the operation control (swing control) after the stop is not executed. When the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the reel is stopped, it is highly likely that the player himself has made a decision to omit the operation, so the player plays the pseudo game. Is relatively unlikely to be mistaken for the main game. In such a case, by not executing the post-stop operation control (swing control), the post-stop operation control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the stop operation post-stop control should be emphasized. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misidentifying the pseudo game as the main game.

However, even when the operation for advancing the simulated game is omitted in the simulated game and the reel is stopped, the operation control (swing control) after the stop may be executed. If all the remaining stop button operations are omitted, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed, while if only the current stop button operation is omitted, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed. It may be configured to perform swing control). For example, when the reel is stopped by performing a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation), the operation control (swing control) is not executed after the stop, but the predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated. When the reel is stopped due to this, the operation control (swing control) may be executed after the stop.

(D-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-7).
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) transfers the rotating reel when a predetermined time elapses without the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detection means in the pseudo game. It is possible to execute automatic stop control to stop,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses without detecting a stop operation in the simulated game, the automatic stop control for stopping the rotating reel can be executed. There is. As a result, the stop operation can be omitted by waiting for a predetermined time at the player's will without performing the stop operation as an operation for advancing the pseudo game, and the stop operation can be omitted. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires the game, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operation in the simulated game.

In the ninth embodiment, when the predetermined time elapses without operating the stop button 8 in the simulated game, only the stop button operation this time is omitted. The stop button operation that is omitted when the predetermined time elapses without operating the stop button 8 is not limited to this example, and all the remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

The automatic stop control may be the same control as the stop control after the stop operation, or may be a control different from the stop control after the stop operation. When the automatic stop control is the same as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51). ) And the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). On the other hand, when the automatic stop control is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51). Data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are different controls (excitation data). ..

(D-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-8).
When a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) is rotating two or more reels among the plurality of reels in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop one of the two or more reels without the stop control after the stop operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied in the simulated game, the operation for advancing the simulated game can be omitted, and a plurality of operations for advancing the simulated game can be omitted. When a predetermined condition (elapsed of a predetermined time) is satisfied when two or more reels of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, one of the two or more reels It is configured so that the reel can be stopped without stopping control after the stop operation. As a result, it is possible to omit the stop operation for one reel by satisfying a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time), and it is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to omit the stop operation. At the same time, the degree of freedom of operation in the simulated game can be further increased.

In the ninth embodiment, an example in which the passage of a predetermined time is adopted as the predetermined condition has been described, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and any operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet) is described. It is possible to appropriately adopt the operations of the buttons 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9 and the like). For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in the simulated game, all the remaining stop button operations are omitted. In that case, only the stop button operation this time may be omitted.

(D-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-9).
When a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 264) is rotating two or more reels among the plurality of reels in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop all of the two or more reels without the stop control after the stop operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in the simulated game, the operation for advancing the simulated game can be omitted, and in the simulated game, the operation for advancing the simulated game can be omitted. If a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied when two or more reels of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, all the two or more reels are stopped. It is configured so that it can be stopped without using stop control after operation. As a result, it is possible to omit the stop operation for all the spinning reels by satisfying a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation), and the needs of the player who desires to omit the stop operation are met. It is possible to respond and further reduce the operational burden.

In the ninth embodiment, an example in which the MAX bet button 6a operation is adopted as the above-mentioned predetermined condition has been described, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and any operation unit (for example, the start lever 7, MAX) is described. The operation of the bet button 6a, the bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. Further, the passage of a predetermined time may be adopted as a predetermined condition. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the stop button 8 is not operated and a predetermined time elapses in the simulated game, only the stop button operation this time is omitted. , All the remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

(D-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-10).
Pseudo-game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the processes of FIGS. 250 and 271) capable of determining to execute the pseudo-game, and
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous section) (value of advantageous section game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous section payout number counter, for control A predetermined period termination means capable of terminating the predetermined period when a specific condition (limiter operating condition) is satisfied (value of the payout counter) is provided.
While the pseudo-game determining means can determine that the pseudo-game is to be executed in the predetermined period, the pseudo-game determination means has a specific period (quasi-limit processing (number of games) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) Or the period after the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a predetermined variable (value of the advantageous section game number counter, control game number counter) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous section). When a specific condition (limiter operating condition) is satisfied (value, value of advantageous section payout number counter, value of control payout number counter), a predetermined period (advantageous section) can be terminated. Then, while it is possible to determine that the pseudo game is to be executed in a predetermined period (advantageous section), a predetermined variable (value of the advantageous section game number counter, value of the control game number counter, advantageous section payout number counter). In a specific period (the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated) before the specific condition is satisfied (the value of, the value of the payout number counter for control), the pseudo game is executed. It is configured not to decide to do so. When a simulated game is executed, it is considered that the player has a sense of expectation, but in a specific period (the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated). By not executing the pseudo-game, it is possible to prevent the expectation from being excessively agitated.

As described in the eighth embodiment, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. The pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be a lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag (internal winning combination), or may be a lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag (combination of symbols displayed as stopped). As described in the eighth embodiment, the specific period is not limited to the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, and is a predetermined period (advantageous section). It is possible to configure the game so that it is not decided to execute the pseudo game in an arbitrary period before the end of the game.

(D-12) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-11).
A predetermined operation detecting means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) by the player, and a predetermined operation detecting means.
A display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (a "slap a lever" image or a bet request image) for prompting a player to perform the predetermined operation is provided.
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detecting means, the pseudo game can be started.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, an image (“slap the lever” image or bet request image) for urging the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is displayed. It is possible to start a pseudo game when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is detected. This makes it possible for the player to participate in the simulated game at his / her own will, and provides the player with an opportunity to flexibly decide whether or not to perform the simulated game according to the situation of the game. can.

In the ninth embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, a predetermined operation (start lever 7) is performed after the lock at the start of the pseudo game is performed. It was explained that the transition to the pseudo-game (the rotation for the pseudo-game is started) is triggered by the fact that the operation) is performed. In addition, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the unit game in which the replay wins, a predetermined operation (bet button operation) is performed. It was explained as shifting to a pseudo game (rotation for a pseudo game is started). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the unit game in which a combination other than the replay is won, a predetermined operation (start lever 7) is performed. It was explained that the transition to the pseudo-game (the rotation for the pseudo-game is started) is triggered by this. In this way, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is adopted as a condition for starting the simulated game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is performed. It may be possible to start a pseudo game with this as an opportunity.

If the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) for starting the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game may be shifted to the pseudo game when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed. However, when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the pseudo game may not be transferred (the pseudo game is canceled). The lock at the start of the pseudo game may be a lock that is performed over the predetermined waiting time. In this case, the lock at the start of the pseudo game may be configured to accept only a predetermined operation and invalidate the operation even if another game operation is performed. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and an arbitrary operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) is appropriately operated. It is possible to adopt.

[10th Embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the tenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment also applies to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment is limited to, for example, "in the first embodiment" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment". However, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the tenth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, even if the description is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to ninth embodiments, the pachi-slot according to the tenth embodiment is not deviated from the purpose of the tenth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to ninth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the tenth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachi-slot machine 1 has the same shape and the same processing as those of the first to ninth embodiments, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Setting suggestion effect execution process>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process for executing the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that can suggest a set value set for the pachi-slot machine 1. As described in the first embodiment, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game (setting 1 to setting 6 in 6 stages), and the lower the set value (the closer to the setting 1). ) The degree of the player's advantage is relatively low, and the higher the set value (closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of the player's advantage.

As the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect I, a setting suggestion effect II, a setting suggestion effect III, a setting suggestion effect IV, and a setting suggestion effect V are provided. The setting suggestion effect I is an effect that can occur only when the set value is any one of the settings 2 to 6 (it cannot occur when the set value is the setting 1). The setting suggestion effect II is an effect that can occur only when the set value is any of settings 3 to 6 (cannot occur when the set value is any of settings 1 and 2).

The setting suggestion effect III is an effect that can occur only when the set value is any of settings 4 to 6 (cannot occur when the set value is any of settings 1 to 3). The setting suggestion effect IV is an effect that can occur only when the set value is any of settings 5 and 6 (it cannot occur when the set value is any of settings 1 to 4). The setting suggestion effect V is an effect that can occur only when the set value is the setting 6 (it cannot occur when the set value is any of the settings 1 to 5).

That is, when the setting suggestion effect I occurs, it is determined that the set value is set 2 or more, and when the setting suggestion effect II occurs, it is determined that the set value is set 3 or more. When the setting suggestion effect III occurs, it is confirmed that the set value is set 4 or more, and when the setting suggestion effect IV occurs, it is confirmed that the set value is set 5 or more, and the setting suggestion is made. When the effect V is generated, it is confirmed that the set value is the setting 6. In this way, it is possible to suggest the set value by using the setting suggestion effects I to V.

In each setting suggestion effect, an image (character image) for suggesting a set value is displayed on the main display device 210. In the setting suggestion effect I, the character image I (predetermined character image) is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that the set value is set 2 or more. Further, in the setting suggestion effect II, the character image II (a character image different from the character image I) is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that the set value is set 3 or more.

Further, in the setting suggestion effect III, the character image III (a character image different from the character image I and the character image II) is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that the set value is set to 4 or more. To. In the setting suggestion effect IV, the character image IV (character image different from the character image I, the character image II, and the character image III) is displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the set value is set to 5 or more. Is suggested.

In the setting suggestion effect V, the character image V (character image different from the character image I, the character image II, the character image III, and the character image IV) is displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the set value is set. It is suggested that it is 6. The image data corresponding to the character image I, the character image II, the character image III, the character image IV, and the character image V are stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3), respectively.

Further, the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process performed in the sub-control circuit 200 when the AT state ends. Although not shown, when the AT state end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 generates AT state end command data and transmits the generated AT state end command data to the sub-control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the AT state has ended.

As described in the first embodiment, the game period in the AT state is managed by the game number management, the set number management, the payout number management, the difference number management, the navigation number management, and the like. The main CPU 101 updates these variables (counters) in step S151 of FIG. Then, when the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 101 transmits the AT state end command data to the sub-control circuit 200.

Even if the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, if the AT state is restarted from the next game (for example, if you have 1G continuous stock or if you win the ceiling shortening lottery). If), the main CPU 101 may not transmit the AT state end command data to the sub-control circuit 200. That is, when the predetermined AT state gaming period ends and the AT state is not extended, the AT state end command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. You may.

In the setting suggestion effect execution process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not a formal login has been performed (step S1501). As will be described later, formal login is performed by the player registering as a member and then entering the password. When an operation for formal login is performed, the sub CPU 201 sets the formal login flag to on. In the process of step S1501, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the formal login flag is set to ON. If it is determined that a formal login has not been performed, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a formal login has been performed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect setting is enabled (step S1502). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "valid" is set as the setting suggestion effect setting on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is not valid, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is valid, the sub CPU 201 specifies the setting suggestion effect period (step S1503). The period for setting suggestion effect is "period A", "period B", "period C", "period D", "period E", "period F", "period G", "period H", and "period". "I" and "Period J" are provided.

The "period A" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 1 or more and 1000 or less. The "period B" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 1001 or more and 2000 or less. The "period C" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 2001 or more and 3000 times or less. The "period D" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 3001 or more and 4000 or less. The "period E" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 4001 or more and 5000 or less. The "period F" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 5001 times or more and 6000 times or less. The "period G" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 6001 or more and 7000 or less. The "period H" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 7001 or more and 8000 or less. The "period I" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 8001 or more and 9000 or less. The "period J" is a period in which the number of games after the power is turned on is 9001 or more.

As will be described later, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281), “Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”. , "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J", the setting suggestion effect type can be set. As the setting suggestion effect type, "type A", "type B", and "type C" are provided. In the present embodiment, the type of setting suggestion effect to be generated may differ depending on which of the "type A", "type B", and "type C" setting suggestion effect types are set. It has become.

The number of games after the power is turned on is the number of unit games played by the pachi-slot machine 1 after the power is turned on, and is managed by the game number counter after the power is turned on. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the game count counter after turning on the power after executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 23. Information indicating the value of the game count counter after power-on is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, whereby the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize the number of games after power-on.

In the process of step S1503, the sub CPU 201 has 10 setting suggestion effect periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period F”. Of "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J"), one setting suggestion effect period to which the current number of games after the power is turned on belongs is specified. For example, if the current number of games after power-on is 100, the sub CPU 201 specifies "period A" as one setting suggestion effect period, and if the current number of games after power-on is 7777, the sub CPU 201 specifies. One setting suggestion “Period H” is specified as a production period.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the AT state has ended for the first time in the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 (step S1504). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the AT state end command data is received from the main control circuit 100 for the first time during the setting suggestion effect period. When it is determined that the AT state has not ended for the first time in the setting suggestion effect period, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT state is the first to end in the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is ". It is determined whether or not it is "type A" (step S1505). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type A", the sub CPU 201 executes the type A setting suggestion effect execution process (step S1506). The setting suggestion effect execution process for type A will be described later with reference to FIG. 276. After executing the process of step S1506, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1505 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "type A", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect period. It is determined whether or not the set suggestion effect type is "type B" (step S1507). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type B", the sub CPU 201 executes the type B setting suggestion effect execution process (step S1508). The setting suggestion effect execution process for type B will be described later with reference to FIG. 277. After executing the process of step S1508, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1507 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "type B", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect period. It is determined whether or not the set suggestion effect type is "type C" (step S1509). When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type C", the sub CPU 201 executes the type C setting suggestion effect execution process (step S1510). The setting suggestion effect execution process for type C will be described later with reference to FIG. 278. When it is determined in step S1509 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is not "type C", or after the process of step S1510 is executed, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine. do.

<Setting suggestion effect execution process for type A>
FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion effect execution process for type A performed in the sub-control circuit.

The type A setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 276 is a process performed in step S1506 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the type A setting suggestion effect execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1521). ).

When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 1 (any of setting 2 to setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 determines the setting suggestion effect I. Is executed (step S1522). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image I. As a result, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210.

When it is determined in step S1521 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), or after the processing of step S1522 is executed, the sub-CPU 201 uses this subroutine. To finish.

<Setting suggestion effect execution process for type B>
FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a type B setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

The type B setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 277 is a process performed in step S1508 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the type B setting suggestion effect execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1541). ). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 1 (any of the setting 2 to the setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 is the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of 1 is setting 2 among the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1542). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect I (step S1543). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image I. As a result, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1543, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1542 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 2 (any of setting 3 to setting 6) out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 3 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1544). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 3 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 draws one of setting suggestion effect I and setting suggestion effect II. (Step S1545). The probability that the setting suggestion effect I is selected and the probability that the setting suggestion effect II is selected can be arbitrarily designed, but here, it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (1/2 each). do.

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545 (step S1546). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image I or the image data corresponding to the character image II according to the type of the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545. As a result, any one of the character image I and the character image II is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1546, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1544 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 3 (any of the setting 4 to the setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1547). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 determines the setting suggestion effect I, the setting suggestion effect II, and the setting suggestion effect III. One of these is selected by lottery (step S1548). The probability that the setting suggestion effect I is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect II is selected, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect III is selected can be arbitrarily designed, but here, these probabilities. Are the same (1/3 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548 (step S1549). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has image data corresponding to the character image I, image data corresponding to the character image II, or image data corresponding to the character image III, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548. To set. As a result, any one of the character image I, the character image II, and the character image III is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1549, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1547 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 4 (either the setting 5 or the setting 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 5 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1550). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 5 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 determines the setting suggestion effect I, the setting suggestion effect II, the setting suggestion effect III, and the setting suggestion effect III. , Any one of the setting suggestion effect IV is selected by lottery (step S1551). The probability that the setting suggestion effect I is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect II is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect III is selected, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect IV is selected should be arbitrarily designed. However, here, it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (1/4 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1551 (step S1552). In this process, the sub CPU 201 receives image data corresponding to the character image I, image data corresponding to the character image II, image data corresponding to the character image III, or image data corresponding to the character image III, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1551. , Set the image data corresponding to the character image IV. As a result, any one of the character image I, the character image II, the character image III, and the character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1552, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1550 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 5 (setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 determines the setting suggestion effect I and the setting suggestion. One of the effect II, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, and the setting suggestion effect V is selected by lottery (step S1553). The probability that the setting suggestion effect I is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect II is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect III is selected, the probability that the setting suggestion effect IV is selected, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect V is selected are selected. The probabilities can be arbitrarily designed, but here, it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (1/5 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1553 (step S1554). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has image data corresponding to the character image I, image data corresponding to the character image II, image data corresponding to the character image III, and a character according to the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1553. The image data corresponding to the image IV or the image data corresponding to the character image V is set. As a result, any one of the character image I, the character image II, the character image III, the character image IV, and the character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1554, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Setting suggestion effect execution process for type C>
FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion effect execution process for type C performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device at the end of the AT state.

The type C setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 278 is a process performed in step S1510 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the type C setting suggestion effect execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1561). ). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 1 (any of the setting 2 to the setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 is the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of 1 is setting 2 among the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1562). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect I (step S1563). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image I. As a result, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1563, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1562 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 2 (any of setting 3 to setting 6) out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 3 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1564). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 3 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect II (step S1565). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image II. As a result, the character image II is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1565, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1564 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 3 (any of the setting 4 to the setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1566). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect III (step S1567). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image III. As a result, the character image III is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1567, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1566 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 4 (either the setting 5 or the setting 6) out of the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 uses the pachi-slot machine. It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is the setting 5 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1568). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 5 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect IV (step S1569). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image IV. As a result, the character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1569, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1568 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 5 (setting 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect V. (Step S1570). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image V. As a result, the character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1570, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

FIG. 279 shows how the AT end screen is displayed on the main display device 210. The AT end screen is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when the AT state ends. The AT end screen has an AT end display area 1251 at the center of the screen, a game result display area 1252 during the AT state at the upper part of the screen, and a setting suggestion image display area 1253 at the lower right of the screen. An image indicating that the AT state has ended is displayed in the AT end display area 1251. In the game result display area 1252 during the AT state, an image showing the result of the game played in the AT state (for example, the number of medals paid out) is displayed. In the setting suggestion image display area 1253, any one of the character images I to V is displayed as the setting suggestion image. In the example shown in FIG. 279, the character image V is displayed, and it is shown that the set value is confirmed to be the setting 6.

<Hall menu screen>
FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

As described in the first embodiment, when the administrator on the game store side is performing the setting confirmation operation or the setting change operation, the hall menu (hole menu screen) is displayed. The setting confirmation operation is an operation for confirming the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1. The setting change operation is an operation for changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The setting confirmation operation and the setting change operation are performed by using the setting key type switch 52, respectively. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the administrator of the game store inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it from the state where it is turned counterclockwise to the initial position. And turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off, if the setting key type switch 52 is turned on and then the power is turned on, the setting can be changed (setting change state), and the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on. When the setting key type switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation state).

When the setting confirmation state is reached in this way, the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 280 is displayed on the main display device 210. The same hall menu screen is displayed on the main display device 210 even when the setting is changed. When the setting confirmation state is reached, command data (setting confirmation start command data) indicating that is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Further, when the setting change state is reached, command data (setting change start command data) indicating that is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state has been reached.

As shown in FIG. 280, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1300 in the left side area of the screen, a button display area 1310 substantially in the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the screen, and a preview display area 1320 in the right side area of the screen. ..

A plurality of hall menu items are displayed in the hall menu item display area 1300. Hall menu items include time setting, total medal information, setting change / confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, stop setting, automatic settlement setting, and setting suggestion effect setting. ing. The time setting, total medal information, setting change / confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, stop setting, and automatic settlement setting are as described in the first embodiment. The setting suggestion effect setting will be described later with reference to FIG. 281.

In the button display area 1310, an image corresponding to the effect button group (see FIG. 3) is displayed. The effect button group has a decision button arranged in the center and a selection button (up selection button, bottom selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) arranged around the decision button. By operating each selection button, the manager on the game store side can select any one of a plurality of hall menu items. In FIG. 280, the currently selected hole menu item is shown by being surrounded by a solid line, and the unselected hole menu item is shown by being surrounded by a dotted line. By operating the enter button while one hall menu item is selected, the manager on the game store side can decide on the hall menu item. The screen in which "time setting" is selected as the hall menu item is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1320, a preview screen for one selected hall menu item among the plurality of hall menu items is displayed. FIG. 280 shows a state in which the time setting screen is preview-displayed in a state where "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item. When making a new setting (for example, time setting) for one hall menu item, the manager on the game store side operates the enter button with the hall menu item selected. As a result, when the hall menu item is determined, a screen for making the new setting (for example, a time setting screen) is displayed, and by operating the selection button and the enter button on the screen, the new setting is made. Can be set.

Further, in the minimum area at the lower right of the hall menu screen, the characters "settings are being confirmed" are displayed in the setting confirmation state, and the characters "settings are being changed" are displayed in the setting change state. As a result, the administrator on the game store side can grasp that the setting is in the confirmation confirmation state or the setting change state. The hall menu screen displayed in the setting confirmation state and the hall menu screen displayed in the setting change state differ only in the corresponding characters, and the hall menu item display area 1300, the button display area 1310, and the preview display area 1320. The contents of are the same.

It is possible to configure the display of the hall menu screen to end when the setting confirmation state or the setting change state ends. When the setting key type switch 52 is turned off in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, command data indicating that is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state has ended.

Alternatively, when the setting is changed in the setting change state, the hall menu screen may be displayed even after the setting change state is completed. On the hall menu screen displayed at this time, "end of hall menu" may be displayed in addition to the hall menu items shown in FIG. 280. When the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed, but the administrator of the game store can select and decide "End menu" by operating the selection button and the enter button. , This makes it possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and shift to the game screen. On the other hand, since the game cannot be played in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by operating the selection button and the enter button.

As described in the first embodiment, the setting change can be performed by operating the reset switch 53 in the setting change state. When the setting is changed, the initialization command data (see step S27 in FIG. 24) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, and the setting change is made in the initialization command data. Contains information that indicates what has been done. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting has been changed.

<Setting suggestion effect setting screen>
FIGS. 281 to 283 are diagrams showing an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281 is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when "setting suggestion effect setting" is selected / determined as a hall menu item on the hall menu screen. The manager on the game store side can set the setting suggestion effect type for each setting suggestion effect period by performing an operation using the selection button and the decision button on the setting suggestion effect setting screen.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen is a setting suggestion arranged below the operation item display area 1330 at the upper part of the screen, the enable / invalid setting area 1340 arranged below the operation item display area 1330, and the enable / invalid setting area 1340. It has an effect type setting area 1350 and.

In the operation item display area 1330, "return", "decision", "setting history", "password", and "initialization" are displayed as items that can be operated by the administrator on the game store side. The administrator on the game store side selects one of "Back", "Enter", "Setting history", "Password", and "Initialize" by operating the select button and enter button. Can be decided. In the enable / invalid setting area 1340, "invalid" and "valid" are displayed as selection items for invalidating or enabling the setting suggestion effect setting. The manager on the game store side can select and determine either "invalid" or "valid" by operating the selection button and the enter button.

Setting suggestion effect type In the setting area 1350, there are 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods ("period A", "period B", "period C", "period D", "period E", "period F", and "period F". Period G ”,“ Period H ”,“ Period I ”, and“ Period J ”) are displayed, and next to each setting suggestion effect period,“ None ”and“ Type A ”are set suggestion effect types. , "Type B", and "Type C" are displayed. By operating the selection button and the enter button, the manager on the game store side can perform "None", "Type A", "Type B", and "Type C" for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion staging periods. You can select and decide any of the above.

As described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 278, the "type A" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling the character image I to always appear among the displayable character images (setting suggestion images). .. "Type B" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling the displayable character image (setting suggestion image) to appear evenly. The "type C" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling the appearance of the best (possible to give the most advantageous suggestion) character image among the displayable character images (setting suggestion images). "None" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling so that the character image does not appear. The displayable character image is the character image I when the set value is the setting 2, the character image I and the character image II when the set value is the setting 3, and the set value is the setting 4. In some cases, it is a character image I, a character image II, and a character image III, and when the set value is set 5, it is a character image I, a character image II, a character image III, and a character image IV. When the set value is setting 6, it is a character image I, a character image II, a character image III, a character image IV, and a character image V.

The manager on the game store side can set the setting suggestion effect type by the following procedures (i) to (iv).
(I) In the enable / disable setting area 1340, "valid" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button.
(Ii) Setting suggestion effect type In the setting area 1350, by operating the selection button and the enter button, the setting suggestion effect type for "period A" includes "none", "type A", "type B", and Select and determine one of "Type C".
(Iii) About "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J" , The same operation as in (ii) above is repeated.
(Iv) In the operation item display area 1330, "determine" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button.

As a result, the setting suggestion effect type is set for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods, and according to the currently set setting value and the contents selected / determined in the above (ii) and (iii). Then, when the AT state ends, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect is performed (see FIGS. 275 to 278).

Here, although not shown, when the above operation (iv) is performed, the message "Do you want to register this setting suggestion effect setting?" Is displayed. On the other hand, when "YES" is selected / determined by operating the selection button and the enter button, the contents selected / determined in the above (ii) and (iii) are registered. The registered contents are referred to as setting suggestion effect setting presets. The setting suggestion effect setting preset shows the correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected / determined for the setting suggestion effect period. When registering a preset for setting suggestion effect setting, a name (for example, "custom for event day", "custom for collection date", etc.) is given to the preset for setting suggestion effect setting by performing a predetermined operation. It is possible to attach it. The name (name for setting suggestion effect setting) is saved together with the preset for setting suggestion effect setting. That is, the sub CPU 201 stores the preset for setting suggestion effect setting and the name for setting suggestion effect setting in the sub RAM 203 in association with each other.

Further, when the above operation (iv) is performed, the password is displayed (issued). The password is referred to as a setting suggestion effect setting password. The setting suggestion effect setting password is the content selected / determined in the above (ii) and (iii) (the setting suggestion effect type selected / determined for each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect period). Correspondence relationship) is encrypted. The sub CPU 201 generates a setting suggestion effect setting password by converting the information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols (including characters and numbers). The generated setting suggestion effect setting password is displayed on the main display device 210. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a structure such as a table for converting information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string, and can determine a setting suggestion effect setting password. Since the technique related to password generation is a conventionally well-known technique in the field of gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139591), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the preset for setting the above setting suggestion effect is registered, the administrator on the game store side suggests the setting by the following steps (v) to (viii) instead of the above steps (i) to (iv). You can also set the production type.
(V) In the operation item display area 1330, the "setting history" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button.
(Vi) The screen is switched by the above (v), and the presets for setting suggestion effect settings (names for setting suggestion effect settings) that have been registered are displayed in a list.
(Vi) By operating the selection button and the enter button, any one of the setting suggestion effect setting names displayed by (vi) above is selected and determined.
(Viii) Returning to the setting suggestion effect setting screen by the above (vii), "decision" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button in the operation item display area 1330.

On the setting suggestion effect setting screen of the above (viii), the setting suggestion effect setting preset corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting name selected / determined in the above (vii) has the same correspondence relationship with each setting suggestion effect setting period. The setting suggestion effect type has been selected and determined. This makes it possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same contents as the setting suggestion effect setting preset.

Further, the manager on the game store side can set the setting suggestion effect type by the following procedures (ix) to (xii) instead of the above procedures (i) to (iv).
(Ix) In the operation item display area 1330, the "password" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button.
(X) The screen is switched by the above (ix), and a password input screen (a screen in which a plurality of symbols are arranged) is displayed.
(Xi) On the password input screen, by operating the selection button and the enter button, the symbol string (password for setting suggestion effect setting) grasped in advance is input.
(Xii) By returning to the setting suggestion effect setting screen by the above (xi) and operating the selection button and the decision button in the operation item display area 1330, "decision" is selected and decided.

On the setting suggestion effect setting screen of the above (xii), the same correspondence as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password (correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type) entered in the above (xi). In relation to this, the setting suggestion effect type is selected and determined for each setting suggestion effect period. The sub CPU 201 decodes the information encrypted by the setting suggestion effect setting password input in the above (xi), and reflects the decoded contents in the setting suggestion effect setting screen of the above (xii). The pachi-slot machine 1 has a structure such as a table for specifying the encrypted information, and can decipher the information. Since the technique related to password decryption is a conventionally well-known technique in the field of gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-081521), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a result, by recording the setting suggestion effect setting password issued in the past and entering the setting suggestion effect setting password, the setting suggestion has the same content as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password. It is possible to set the effect type. Further, even in a gaming machine other than the pachi-slot machine 1, the setting suggestion effect type can be set with the same contents as the pachi-slot machine 1 by inputting the setting suggestion effect setting password.

When the "initialization" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the enter button in the operation item display area 1330, the currently set setting suggestion effect setting is canceled. As a result, "None" is set as the setting suggestion effect type for all the setting suggestion effect periods. That is, the setting suggestion effect setting is initialized. Such initialization is performed only when "initialization" is selected / determined on the setting suggestion effect setting screen, and even if the set value is changed, the setting suggestion effect setting is not initialized. Further, in the operation item display area 1330, when "return" is selected and decided by operating the selection button and the decision button, the screen is switched from the setting suggestion effect setting screen to the hall menu screen.

As described above, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281, 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, and “period F” are displayed. , "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J").

On the other hand, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 282, eight types of AT end times (“AT end 1 time”, “AT end 2 to 9 times”, “AT end 10 times”, “AT end 11 to” Set the setting suggestion effect type for each of "19 times", "AT end 20 times", "AT end 21-29 times", "AT end 30 times", and "AT end 31 times"). Is supposed to be possible. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the AT state ends.

"AT end once" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the first AT state is completed after the power is turned on. "AT end 2 to 9 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when any of the AT states of the 2nd to 9th times after the power is turned on is completed. "AT end 10 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the 10th AT state is completed after the power is turned on. "AT end 11 to 19 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when any of the 11th to 19th AT states after the power is turned on is completed. "AT end 20 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the 20th AT state is completed after the power is turned on. "AT end 21 to 29 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when any of the 21st to 29th AT states after the power is turned on is completed. "AT end 30 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the 30th AT state is completed after the power is turned on. "AT end 31 times" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the AT state after the 31st time after the power is turned on ends.

By the same procedure as the procedure described with reference to FIG. 281, the setting suggestion effect type can be set for the number of AT end times. As a result, when the AT state ends, one of the setting suggestion effects I to V is set according to the currently set value and the number of times the AT state is the AT state after the power is turned on. Suggestive staging can be performed. For example, when setting 6 is set as a setting value and "type C" is set for "AT end once", it can be displayed when the AT state ends for the first time after the power is turned on. The highest character image among the character images (that is, the character image V) can be made to appear.

Further, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 283, eight types of time ranges (“10 o'clock to 11 o'clock”, “11 o'clock to 12 o'clock”, “12 o'clock to 14 o'clock”, “14 o'clock to 16 o'clock” , "16:00 to 18:00", "18:00 to 20:00", "20:00 to 22:00", and "22:00 to 23:00")) can be set as a setting suggestion effect type. It is supposed to be. The setting suggestion effect type can be set for such a time range by the same procedure as the procedure described with reference to FIG. 281. As a result, when the AT state ends, any one of the setting suggestion effects I to V can be performed according to the currently set value and the time when the AT state ends. For example, when setting 6 is set as a setting value and "type C" is set for "10 o'clock to 11 o'clock", it can be displayed when the AT state ends at 10:50. The highest character image among the character images (that is, the character image V) can be made to appear.

<Login>
FIG. 284 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the main display device. FIG. 284 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the menu screen. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for character customization. FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a game history screen. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a gaming system.

When the decision button of the effect button group is operated in the situation where the game is not performed, the sub control circuit 200 calls the menu screen shown in FIG. 284 (A) and displays it on the main display device 210. As described above, the effect button group includes the cross key (up selection button, down selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) and the enter button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor is moved. When the player moves in the operated direction and operates the enter button, the item pointed to by the selection cursor is selected (determined).

As shown in FIG. 284 (B), the menu screen is provided with "custom game", "volume adjustment", "game data", "payout / arrangement", and "dedicated site" as the main menu, and some main menus have. More detailed submenus are provided. For example, the main menu "custom game" is provided with submenus "character selection", "easy start", "enter password", "view intermediate recording", "record and end", and "member registration". The submenu "Character selection" is a menu for customizing characters used for the effect performed on the main display device 210.

The submenus "Easy Start" to "Membership Registration" are menus used for the registered games of the players. In recent pachislot machines, by registering a player who plays a game, a privilege that does not affect the payout may be given as compared with a player who does not register. Specifically, when the player is registered, the sub-control circuit 200 is executed in addition to the game history after the registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the winning probability of the small winning combination). (Including the production history of the production) is managed, and certain benefits are given based on this history. The history of this game can include not only the one related to this game but also the one related to the previous game. Specifically, the game history of each player is managed on the server, and when the game is played, the server notifies the game machine of the game history via a mobile phone or the like to notify the game machine of the previous game. You can take over the history and play the game.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu that is operated to accumulate the history of the current game without inheriting the history of the previous game, that is, to perform a simple login. Further, the submenu "Enter password" is a menu operated when the history of the previous game is inherited and the history of the current game is further accumulated, that is, for a formal login. Here, simple login is completed only by operating the submenu "Easy Start", while formal login is performed by registering as a member and then entering the password in the pachislot machine 1. Will be. Therefore, when comparing a simple login and a formal login, it can be said that a simple login is a simpler registration procedure than a formal login, and conversely, a formal login is a more complicated registration than a simple login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The submenu "View midway record" is a menu operated when checking the midway record of the game history accumulated up to that point when logging in (simple or official). The submenu "Record and end" is a menu operated when the history of games accumulated up to that point is recorded on the server when logging in (simple or formal). When these submenus "view intermediate recording" and "record and end" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the pachi-slot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or server. Further, the submenu "member registration" is a menu operated for initial registration of a player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 285 is provided with a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessory" selection field, and each selection field has a plurality of selectable icons. It will be provided. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the decision icon is operated.

The "character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control circuit 200 determines one character selected in the "character" selection field from a plurality of types of characters. In addition, the "costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "accessory" selection field is used to select the character's accessories. Used to do. The "costume" selection field to the "accessory" selection field are used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessory) of the character. The sub-control circuit 200 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection fields.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by performing a button operation using the effect button group. When the character is customized, the sub-control circuit 200 selects the costume selected in the "costume" selection field and the character selected in the "character" selection field wearing the accessory selected in the "accessory" selection field. The pose selected in the "pause" selection field is displayed on the main display device 210.

In the custom game, the effect using the character according to the content of the customization is performed. The custom game starts when the enter icon is operated (custom start operation is performed), and ends when the end icon (not shown) is operated (custom end operation is performed).

FIG. 286 (A) is the first page of the game history called from the submenu “Game history 1”, and FIG. 286 (B) is the second page of the game history called from the submenu “Game history 2”. be. As shown in FIG. 286 (A), the total number of games, the current number of games, the number of bonuses, the number of CZs, the number of ARTs, the number of addition zones 1 and 2, and the number of addition zones 3 are displayed on the first page of the game history. Will be done. In this way, on the first page of the game history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player such as a bonus or ART is performed is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 286 (A), the "Next page" icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this "Next Page" icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called. Although the first page of the game history can be displayed by all players, the second page of the game history can be displayed only by the player who has officially logged in, and non-logged-in players and players. Players with simple login cannot display. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 200 makes it impossible to hide or select the "Next Page" icon when the login is not performed or only the simple login is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 286 (B), on the second page of the game history, the number of times the watermelon (“F_watermelon”) is determined as the internal winning combination (the number of winnings) and the chance eye A (“F_”) The number of wins for the chance role 1), the number of wins for the chance role B (“F_chance role 2”), the number of wins for the weak cherry (“F_weak cherry”), the number of wins for the strong cherry (“F_strong cherry”), And the number of winnings of the confirmed cherry (“F_confirmed cherry”) is displayed. That is, on the second page of the game history, the number of winnings of the so-called rare role is displayed.

By displaying the number of winnings of the rare role only for the player who has made a formal login in this way, the pachislot machine 1 will directly play the game for the player who has taken the trouble to register by following the formal procedure. It is possible to give a privilege that does not affect (display of the number of winnings of the rare role). As a result, it is possible to encourage the player who wants to display the number of winnings of the rare role to use the formal registration, and as a result, the player can be attached to the game machine and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history, which displays the number of winnings of the rare role, for the player who logged in with a simple procedure, so a simple login procedure is used. By logging in only, it is possible to prevent the act of snooping on the result of the other person's game after the other person has played the game.

Hereinafter, formal login will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 287. The game system 1500 includes a pachi-slot machine 1, a management server 1510, and a mobile terminal machine 1520. The mobile terminal 1520 and the management server 1510 can exchange data with each other by communicating via the Internet.

Prior to starting the game, the player receives a password issued from the management server 1510 in a state where a predetermined application is started on the mobile terminal 1520 owned by the player. The password is an encrypted history of the games played up to the last time. The management server 1510 stores game history information indicating the history of games played up to the previous time, and the management server 1510 uses the management server 1510 as a symbol composed of a plurality of symbols (including letters and numbers). Convert to a column. The password is a symbol string corresponding to such a game history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 1520 by performing a predetermined operation.

After that, when starting the game, the player operates the effect button group on the pachi-slot machine 1 to display the menu screen (see FIG. 284 (A)) on the main display device 210, and the main menu on the menu screen. Select "Custom Game". As a result, one of "Character selection", "Easy start", "Enter password", "View intermediate record", "Record and end", and "Member registration" can be selected as the submenu screen. A screen for selection (see FIG. 284 (B)) is displayed on the main display device 210.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. As a result, a screen for inputting a password (password input screen) is displayed on the main display device 210. The player can perform a formal login by performing a button operation using the effect button group on the password input screen and inputting the password issued from the management server 1510. As a result, the history of the games played this time is accumulated while inheriting the history of the games played up to the previous time.

The game history (game history) includes the total number of games, the number of occurrences of a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of wins and the probability of winning each role, and the game. In addition to the number of media input and the number of payouts, the history of executed effects (effect history) is included. The effect history includes the history of custom games (character customization) as well as the number of occurrences of various effects. Examples of the history related to the custom game include the number of times various characters are selected and the game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). As the game history for each type of selected character, the number of games played with various characters customized (for example, the number of games played with character A selected, and the character The number of times a specific game state (for example, bonus, ART, etc.) has occurred while B has been selected (for example, the number of games played while various characters have been customized) (for example, character A has been selected). The number of times the specific gaming state has occurred in the state, the number of times the specific gaming state has occurred in the state in which the character B has been selected), and the like can be mentioned.

In the management server 1510, such a game history is managed in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 1510 stores the number of games played by one player with the character A selected and the number of games played with the character B selected, and the other players store the games. The number of games played with the character A selected and the number of games played with the character B selected are also stored. As a result, the management server 1510 can compare the game history of each player. The password also includes an encrypted comparison result (rank determined by a predetermined method) of the game history of each player.

To end the game, the player selects the submenu "Record and end" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210. The two-dimensional code is a code of the address information of the management server 1510 and the game history information accumulated in the pachi-slot machine 1. The player can image the two-dimensional code with the camera included in the mobile terminal 1520. The portable terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates the address information of the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. Further, the game history information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510. As a result, the game history will be managed by the management server 1510.

In addition, in order to log in for the first time, it is necessary to register as a member. In registering as a member, the player selects the submenu "Membership registration" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210. The two-dimensional code is a code of the address information of the management server 1510 and the information related to the member registration. The player can image the two-dimensional code with the camera included in the mobile terminal 1520. The portable terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates the address information of the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. In addition, information related to member registration is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510. As a result, the ID for the player is set in the management server 1510.

Here, in FIG. 275, it has been described that the setting suggestion effect is performed when the formal login is performed (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not performed unless the member is registered). As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to perform a formal login (member registration). However, the conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be performed not only when a formal login is performed but also when a simple login is performed. Further, even if a formal login is not performed and a simple login is not performed (regardless of whether or not the login is performed), the setting suggestion effect may be performed. .. Alternatively, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen, it is configured so that it is possible to set whether or not to link the setting suggestion effect and login (“valid” or “invalid”), and when “valid” is set. On the condition that a login has been performed (similar to the above, a formal login may be required, or a simple login may be sufficient), and a setting suggestion effect will be performed. When "invalid" is set, the setting suggestion effect may be performed regardless of the presence or absence of login.

Further, although it has been described above that the screens shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 are displayed on the main display device 210, these screens are displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal display separately provided from the main display device 210. It may be that. As a result, the player can perform operations on the menu screen even during the game (when the effect is being performed on the main display device 210).

Further, the character may be customized by operating the portable terminal 1520 owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member displays a character customization screen (similar to FIG. 285) on the mobile terminal 1520 in a state where a predetermined application is started on the mobile terminal, and the character customization screen is displayed. In, the character may be customized by performing a touch operation or a button operation on the mobile terminal 1520. In this case, the content of the customization may be configured so that it can be transmitted to the pachi-slot machine 1 via the management server 1510, or from the mobile terminal mobile terminal 1520 by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured so that it can be directly transmitted to the pachi-slot machine 1.

<Variations of setting suggestion effects>
288 to 298 are diagrams showing an example of the setting suggestion effect.

Although the setting suggestion effect has been described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect different from the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect described below may be performed in place of the setting suggestion effect described above, or may be performed separately from the setting suggestion effect described above (in one pachi-slot machine 1, the setting suggestion effect described above and the setting suggestion effect described below will be described. Both setting suggestion effects may be performed). As the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect described below, any one of the above-mentioned character images I to V may be adopted.

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 288 (a), when the number of remaining games until the end of the AT state becomes a predetermined number of times (100 times) or less, the character image "Ending" is displayed on the main display device 210. It shows that the ending period of the AT state has started. In FIG. 288 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 288 (a), the rare role is determined as the internal winning role, so that the lower cherry wins a prize and the character image "Congratulations!" Is displayed on the main display device 210. It is displayed in the above and shows that it is suggested that it is confirmed that the setting value is relatively high (setting 5) or more through the character image. FIG. 288 (c) shows how the character image “The end” is displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends after the state shown in FIG. 288 (b). Then, in FIG. 288 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 288 (c), the screen is switched, all the characters are gathered and displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the highest set value (setting 6) is used. It shows that it is suggested that there is a certainty. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 288, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the ending period of the AT state, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 289 (a) shows a state in which the character image “Rush start” is displayed on the main display device 210 and the AT state is started. In FIG. 289 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 289 (a), the image showing that the gauge is rising due to the fact that the rare role is determined as the internal winning role (the lower cherry wins) is the main image. It shows how it is displayed on the display device 210. FIG. 289 (c) shows how the character image “Rush end” is displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends after the state shown in FIG. 289 (b). In FIG. 289 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 289 (c), the screen is switched, all the characters are gathered and displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the highest setting value (setting 6) is obtained. It shows that it is suggested that is confirmed. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 289, the gauge rises (the meter accumulates) every time the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the AT state (may be limited to the ending period of the AT state). Is controlled by. And, the more meters are accumulated, the higher the probability that the setting suggestion effect will be performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 290 (a), the character image "Rush start first time" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT of the first set is caused by the first hit. By showing how the state has started and displaying a predetermined character image on the main display device 210, it is suggested that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 2) or more through the character image. It shows how it is doing. In FIG. 290 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 290 (a), the character image "Rush continuation 6th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state is extended (extended). It shows that the AT state of the sixth set is started, while the character image is not displayed on the main display device 210. In FIG. 290 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 290 (b), the character image "Rush continuation 8th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state is extended (extended). The state in which the AT state of the eighth set is started is shown, and the number of character images displayed on the main display device 210 is larger than that shown in FIG. 290 (a). , It is shown that it is suggested that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 3) or more through the character image. In FIG. 290 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 290 (c), the character image "Rush continuation 10th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state is extended (extended). In addition to showing that the AT state of the 10th set has started, all the characters are gathered and displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the highest set value (setting 6) can be obtained. It shows that it is suggested that it has been confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 290, the setting suggestion effect may be performed when the AT state is started, but the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is performed when the 10th set AT state is started is relatively high. It's getting higher.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 291 (a) shows a state in which the character image "Rush start" is displayed on the main display device 210 and the AT state is started. In FIG. 291 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 291 (a), a predetermined character image is displayed as the “V” symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L, respectively. It is displayed on the main display device 210, and shows how it is suggested through the character image that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 4) or more. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 291, a specific position of the reel 3 (for example, a place where symbols of the same type are continuously arranged) is aimed at by eye (not shown, but as a premise, it should be pressed). A specific effect that suggests the above is generated), and the setting suggestion effect is performed when the push is successful.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 292 (a), the character image "BONUS confirmed" (bonus confirmation screen: an image that can be displayed only when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination) is the main display device. By displaying on 210, it is notified that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, and by displaying a predetermined character image on the main display device 210, one set value (1 setting value) is displayed through the character image. Setting 4) It shows that it is suggested that the above is confirmed. In FIG. 292 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 292 (a), the character image (bonus end screen) of “BONUS end” is displayed on the main display device 210 to show how the bonus state has ended. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, which indicates that it is suggested that the highest set value (setting 6) is confirmed. On the other hand, in FIG. 292 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 292 (a), the character image (bonus end screen) of "BONUS end" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the bonus state ends. On the other hand, it shows that the predetermined character image is not displayed on the main display device 210. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 292, when the predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on both the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, it is the highest setting value (setting 6). On the other hand, if the predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 only on either one of the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 4) or more. It is designed to do.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 293 (a) shows that the AT state of the third set is completed by displaying the character image "Rush number of times 3 times" on the main display device 210. , The display of the predetermined character image on the main display device 210 indicates that it is suggested through the character image that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 4) or more. In FIG. 293 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 293 (a), the character image “Rush number 4 times” is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state of the fourth set is completed. In addition to showing, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 5) or more. In FIG. 293 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 293 (b), the character image “Rush number 5 times” is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state of the fifth set is completed. In addition to showing, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that the highest set value (setting 6) is confirmed. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 293, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen displayed when one AT state ends, one set value (setting) is displayed. 4) When the above is confirmed and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen displayed when the AT state of the next set of the AT state is completed (predetermined character). When the image is displayed twice in succession), it is determined that the setting value (setting 5) or more is more advantageous than the setting value of the one, and when the AT state of the next set of the set is completed. When the predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the displayed AT end screen (when the predetermined character image is continuously displayed three times), it may be the highest setting value (setting 6). Determine.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 294 (a) shows that the AT state of the third set is completed by displaying the character image "Rush number of times 3 times" on the main display device 210. , The display of the predetermined character image on the main display device 210 indicates that it is suggested through the character image that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 4) or more. FIG. 294 (b) shows a state in which after the state shown in FIG. 294 (a), the consecutive villas in the AT state are completed in three sets and shifted to the staging section (advantageous section / normal game). In FIG. 294 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 294 (b), the character image “Rush start” is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state is restarted. In FIG. 294 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 294 (c), the character image "Rush number 2 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state of the second set is completed. In addition to showing, the display of a predetermined character image on the main display device 210 indicates that it is suggested through the character image that it is confirmed that the value is one set value (setting 5) or more. .. FIG. 294 (e) shows a state in which after the state shown in FIG. 294 (d), the consecutive villas in the AT state are completed in two sets and shifted to the staging section (advantageous section / normal game). In FIG. 294 (f), after the state shown in FIG. 294 (e), the character image "Rush number 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the AT state of the fifth set is completed (premise). The state of transition to the AT state is shown again), and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, which suggests that the highest set value (setting 6) has been confirmed. It shows how it is doing. After the state shown in FIG. 294 (f), the continuous villa in the AT state ends with 5 sets and shifts to the staging section (advantageous section / normal game). As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 294, as in the example shown in FIG. 293, as the number of times that the predetermined character image is continuously displayed on the AT end screen increases, the value may be more than the more advantageous set value. Although it is confirmed, the AT end screen is displayed only when the AT state is not extended (continued) (when the AT state is changed to the normal game).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 295 (a) shows that the AT state of the 7th set is completed by displaying the character image "Rush number 7 times" on the main display device 210. , The state in which a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 is shown. In FIG. 295 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 295 (a), it is determined that the AT state is continued by displaying the character image (revival effect) of "still more!" On the main display device 210. It shows how it looks. On the other hand, FIG. 295 (c) shows how the AT state of the consecutive villas ended with 7 sets after the state shown in FIG. 295 (a) and shifted to the staging section (advantageous section / normal game). This shows that it is suggested that the highest set value (setting 6) is confirmed through the predetermined character image displayed in the state shown in FIG. 295 (a). As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 295, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen, the predetermined character image may indicate a set value. However, if the AT state continues thereafter, the predetermined character image does not play a role of suggesting the set value, and the predetermined character image becomes invalid (what is the setting suggestion effect). It was an irrelevant production (it was not confirmed after the fact that it was above the relatively high setting value). On the other hand, in the case of falling from the AT state to the normal game, the predetermined character image has played a role of suggesting the set value, and the predetermined character image is valid (the setting suggestion effect). (It was confirmed after the fact that it was higher than the relatively high set value).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 296 (a) shows a state in which the character image "Rush start" is displayed on the main display device 210 and the AT state is started. In FIG. 296 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 296 (a), the “Aim for BAR” effect image described in the ninth embodiment is mainly displayed as the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows how the “BAR” symbol alignment is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. In FIG. 296 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 296 (b), the "PUSH" button image (an image prompting the operation of the effect button) is the main display device as the "BAR" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed. It shows the state displayed in 210. In FIG. 296 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 296 (c), when the effect button is operated, all the characters are gathered and displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the highest set value ( It shows that it is suggested that the setting 6) has been confirmed. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 296, a specific symbol (for example, a "BAR" symbol) is aimed at by pressing, and when the pressing is successful, an operation instruction of the effect button appears and the effect button is operated. The setting suggestion effect is performed by.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 297 (a) shows a state in which the character image “Rush start” is displayed on the main display device 210 and the AT state is started. In FIG. 297 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 297 (a), the “Aim for BAR” effect image described in the ninth embodiment is mainly displayed as the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows how the “BAR” symbol alignment is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. In FIG. 297 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 297 (b), the "PUSH" button image (an image prompting the operation of the effect button) is the main display device as the "BAR" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed. It shows the state displayed in 210. In FIG. 297 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 297 (c), when the effect button is operated, the character image "+456 sheets" is displayed on the main display device 210, whereby the set value is set. It shows that it is suggested that it is confirmed to be any of 4 to 6. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is determined that the set value is any of 4 to 6 by displaying the image including the number corresponding to "456". Such images include an image corresponding to the number of additional games in the AT state (“+456”), an image notifying the number of medals acquired in the AT state (“OVER456”), and an enemy defeating effect (for example, resurrection). It is possible to adopt the image ("defeated 456 enemies") displayed in the production).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 298 (a) shows a state in which the character image "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the main display device 210 and the BB state (pseudo BB) is started. In FIG. 298 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 298 (a), a screen for selecting one of the "one-shot notification mode", the "final notification mode", and the "chance notification mode" is displayed. It shows how it is displayed on the main display device 210. The "one-shot notification mode", "final notification mode", and "chance notification mode" are each one of the production modes, and for example, a method of notifying whether or not the AT state continues (resurrection production). Contents) are different from each other. The player can select one effect mode by operating the effect button. Then, the rate at which each setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect IV) appears differs depending on the selected effect mode. For example, when the "chance notification mode" is selected, the set value may be relatively low or higher than when the "one-shot notification mode" to the "final notification mode" is selected. A setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect I) that is confirmed is likely to occur, but a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect IV or a setting suggestion effect V) that is determined to be a relatively high setting value or higher occurs. It may be configured to be difficult to do. Further, when the "one-shot notification mode" is selected, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect III or the setting suggestion effect IV) that determines that the setting value is relatively high or higher is determined as the setting suggestion effect. And setting suggestion effect V) only (setting suggestion effect I and setting suggestion effect II do not occur), but in the first place, compared to the case where "final notification mode" or "chance notification mode" is selected, It may be configured so that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is low.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, although not shown, a setting suggestion effect to be performed when the advantageous section is started may be provided. The content of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the type of mode in the effect section (normal game). For example, when the mode at which the advantageous section is started is a specific mode, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect III or the setting suggestion effect IV) that determines that the setting value is relatively high or higher is determined. The setting suggestion effect V) may be performed. Alternatively, starting a specific mode is synonymous with determining that the setting value is relatively high (for example, setting 4) or higher (a screen dedicated to the specific mode is displayed). It may be (corresponding to a setting suggestion effect). When a specific mode is started, it is determined that the set value is relatively high (for example, setting 4) or higher, and it is determined that the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won within a predetermined number of games (predetermined). You may win the pseudo-bonus transition lottery within the number of games). In addition, a setting suggestion effect dedicated to the non-advantageous section may be provided.

Further, when a setting suggestion effect that can occur in a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) is provided, a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of an effect button or a touch panel) is performed for the setting suggestion effect. While it may be generated on the condition that the above is not performed, it may not be generated when a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of an effect button or a touch panel) is not performed. Further, as a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player, a first advantageous state (for example, a pseudo BB (big bonus)) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second advantageous state) in which the degree of advantage is smaller than that of the first advantageous state. When the pseudo RB (regular bonus)) is provided, the setting suggestion effect is performed during the second advantageous state (the setting suggestion effect is not performed during the first advantageous state, or the first advantageous state is performed). During the state, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is lower than that during the second advantageous state).

Further, when the number of occurrences of a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) after the power is turned on (or after the set value is changed) is a specific number of times (for example, the first time or). In the tenth specific situation), the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than in the case where the number of occurrences is other than the specific number of occurrences. For example, if the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high in the first specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends), it is possible to attract customers early after the opening of the store in the morning. Will be.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect that can make a suggestion including past setting values may be provided. For example, setting 6 may be set for at least one day in the last few days (one of today's setting, the previous day's setting, and the day before the previous day's setting is setting 6). It is also possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that is confirmed. Further, a setting suggestion effect may be provided so that it is confirmed that a setting value (for example, setting 5 or setting 6) higher today is set than that of the previous day. As a result, the player who has confirmed the information on the past setting values on the data display, the data site, or the like can enjoy the setting estimation through the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, for example, a specific combination (for example, a watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific combination is a stop operation mode (stop operation timing) of the player. The number of medals to be awarded may vary depending on the push order, the push order, or a combination thereof (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer)). 8 payouts, 1 payout or no payout if inappropriate (wrong answer)). Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, whether or not to shift to the AT state in this game (extending the game period in the AT state in the AT state). Whether or not it may be included. The same shall apply hereinafter. Whether or not to change the degree of advantage to an advantageous one (whether or not to directly shift to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the relevant AT state). It may also include a decision. It is possible to configure it so that the advantageous decision is made in this game if eight cards are not paid out, while the decision is not made (hereinafter, described as "advantageous decision").

Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the main game is stopped, the sub flag at the time of winning the advantageous section as the secondary information (sub flag) according to the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. (See FIG. 7 (a)) is determined. Then, in the production section (advantageous section / normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7 (c)) is referred to, and the lottery based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is performed. Will be. The pseudo-bonus transition lottery is basically performed in each unit game, but the unit in which the player plays a game by a specific game method (for example, a game method in which eight medals are paid out as described above). In the game, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery as an advantageous decision may not be performed. Alternatively, in a unit game in which the player plays a game by a specific game method, the winning probability of a pseudo-bonus transition lottery as an advantageous decision is compared with a unit game in which the player does not play a game by a specific game method. May be relatively low. In such a case, a setting suggestion effect that may occur when the number of times the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is performed reaches a predetermined number of times may be provided. As a result, as a player, it is possible to enjoy the setting suggestion effect at an earlier timing if the player does not play the game by a specific game method.

As a specific game method, for example, in a unit game in which a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation for a predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L) belongs to a symbol within a predetermined range (for example, a symbol position ". The game method is performed at the timing when any of the symbols 10 ”to“ 18 ”is displayed in the middle region, and the order of the stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is a specific order. The game method can be mentioned. As described above, in a specific game, only when the specific stop order is unilaterally advantageous over the other stop order, the game is advantageous in the specific game when the game is played in the specific stop order. It can be configured so that no decision is made (or the probability of being determined to vary the degree of advantage to an advantageous one in an advantageous decision). As described in the first embodiment, it is desirable that such a limitation is limited to the unit game.

Also, instead of not making an advantageous decision (or reducing the probability that the advantage is determined to change the degree of advantage to an advantageous one), the measurement of the number of games up to the ceiling is stopped (or said). The number of games to the ceiling may be extended). For example, as described in the first embodiment, if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) in the production section (normal game), the number of ceiling games is updated. (It may be an addition method or a subtraction method), when the number of ceiling games reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), a pseudo bonus is transferred. It is decided to let. In this respect, in the unit game in which the player plays a game by a specific game method, the number of ceiling games may not be updated (or the number of ceiling games may be increased).

<Rock>
299 and 300 are diagrams showing an example of the first stop lock. FIGS. 301 and 302 are diagrams showing an example of a lock when stopped in the middle.

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect (lock) is an effect of stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period (invalidating the player's game operation for a predetermined period). In the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the first stop lock to be executed when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute the lock at the time of intermediate stop when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

As the predetermined combination, it is possible to adopt a combination in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the mode (timing of the stop operation) of the stop operation by the player (for example, the above-mentioned specific combination). That is, when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the medals will be missed, and the number of medals to be paid out will be smaller than when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (or no medals will be paid out).

Here, among the players playing the game on the pachi-slot machine 1, when performing the stop operation for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, the left stop button 8L → the middle stop button 8C → the right stop button 8R should be slid in this order. It is considered that there are people who play games in a straightforward manner (hereinafter referred to as "sliding method"). When a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if the game is played by such a sliding striking method, there is a high possibility that the predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) will be missed.

In this respect, when a predetermined combination (for example, a watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, the game is played by the sliding striking method by executing the first stop lock or the middle stop lock. However, it is possible to prevent such omissions from occurring. Hereinafter, the first stop lock will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300, and the middle stop lock will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 and 302.

FIG. 299 (a) shows that the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts in one unit game, and all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating. After that, the behavior of the reel 3 differs depending on whether or not a predetermined winning combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination. FIGS. 299 (b) and 300 (a) to (d) show a case where a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and in FIG. 299 (c), the predetermined combination is The case where a different role (replay) is determined as an internal winning role is shown.

Specifically, in FIG. 299 (b), when a predetermined winning combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation after the state shown in FIG. 299 (a). Along with the operation, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper region of the left reel 3L. At this time, the first stop operation is performed, so that the first stop lock is generated. The first stop lock is a lock that occurs after the first stop operation is performed and before the second stop operation is performed. When the first stop lock occurs, the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) after the first stop operation is performed is invalidated. The first stop lock continues until the middle stop button 8C is operated. That is, the first stop lock is released when the middle stop button 8C is operated. The arrow in the figure indicates to what position the player slides his / her finger in the sliding striking method.

FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which the finger is slid to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding striking method after the state shown in FIG. 299 (b). At this time, as the middle stop button 8C is operated, the first stop lock ends. The operation of the middle stop button 8C is effective as an operation for releasing the lock at the time of the first stop, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C.

FIG. 300 (b) shows a state in which the finger is slid to the right stop button 8R (the right stop button 8R is operated) in the sliding striking method after the state shown in FIG. 300 (a). Since the first stop lock has already ended, the operation of the right stop button 8R is effective as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R. As a result, in FIG. 300B, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the lower region of the right reel 3R, and the "watermelon" is displayed along the effective line (here, the cross-down line). Shows the state of the reach mode (a state in which "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R, and only the middle reel 3C is rotating). When a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the "watermelon" stops in the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 8L to the right stop button 8R. It is designed to be displayed.

FIG. 300 (c) shows how the “Aim for BAR” effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. 300 (b). Here, in the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (exists within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). .. As a result, when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is in the middle. When the stop button 8C is operated), the "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelons" are aligned (winning) along the cross-down line. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelon" is not displayed as a stop on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelons" are not aligned (dropped) along the cross-down line.

In FIG. 300 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 300 (c), "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C as the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing, and the cross-down line is displayed. It shows how "watermelons" are lined up along the line. As a result, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of medals are paid out. In the above description, the “aiming at BAR” effect image (an image suggesting the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, but such an image may not be displayed. Further, when all the "watermelons" are prepared, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the above example, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop lock occurs, whereas the predetermined combination (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, the lock at the time of the first stop does not occur. FIG. 299 (c) shows how the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 299 (a) when a combination (replay) different from the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, since the lock at the time of the first stop does not occur, the operations of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R by the sliding striking method are the first stop operation and the second stop, respectively. It is effective as an operation and a third stop operation.

As another aspect from the above, FIG. 301 (a) shows a state in which rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts in one unit game, and all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating. There is. After that, the behavior of the reel 3 differs depending on whether or not a predetermined winning combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination. FIGS. 301 (b) and 302 (a) to (b) show a case where a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and in FIG. 301 (c), the predetermined combination is The case where a different role (replay) is determined as an internal winning role is shown.

Specifically, in FIG. 301 (b), when a predetermined winning combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation after the state shown in FIG. 301 (a). Along with the operation, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper region of the left reel 3L. Here, FIG. 301 (b) shows a state in which the finger is slid to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding striking method, but the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped. Not. In this example, by operating the middle stop button 8C, the lock at the time of middle stop is generated. The middle stop lock is a lock that occurs after the middle stop button 8C is operated. When the middle stop lock occurs, the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) is invalidated until a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the middle stop button 8C.

The operation of the middle stop button 8C in the sliding striking method is effective as an operation for generating the lock at the time of middle stop, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C. Further, in the sliding striking method, the right stop button 8R is usually operated within a predetermined time (time during which the operation by the player is invalidated by the lock at the time of middle stop) after the middle stop button 8C is operated. The operation of the right stop button 8R in the sliding striking method is also invalid as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R.

FIG. 302A shows how the “Aim for BAR” effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. 301 (b). Here, similarly to the above, in the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (exists within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). I decided to. As a result, when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is in the middle. When the stop button 8C is operated), "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelon" is not displayed as a stop on the middle reel 3C. Similarly to the above, when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, in the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R, regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 8L to the right stop button 8R, "Watermelon" is displayed as a stop.

In FIG. 302 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 302 (a), the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing (the right stop button 8R is operated at an arbitrary timing). "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the reel 3C and the right reel 3R, indicating that the "watermelon" is aligned along the cross-down line. As a result, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of medals are paid out. In the above description, the “aiming at BAR” effect image (an image suggesting the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, but such an image may not be displayed. Further, when all the "watermelons" are prepared, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the above example, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, the lock at the time of middle stop occurs, whereas the predetermined combination (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning combination. Does not lock when stopped. FIG. 301 (c) shows how the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 301 (a) when a combination (replay) different from the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, since the lock does not occur at the time of middle stop, the operations of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R by the sliding striking method are the first stop operation and the second stop operation, respectively. , And, it becomes effective as the third stop operation.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting a set value at the end of a BB gaming state (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-245403).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the setting suggestion effect is generated according to the appearance rate or the like set by the manufacturer, as in the case of other effects. On the other hand, if the hall (store) side can suggest the set value (advantage for the player) in the intended manner, it is considered to be useful in formulating a sales strategy for acquiring customers.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suggesting advantages in accordance with the intention of the store.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) An advantage setting means that can be set by the administrator to any one of a plurality of types of advantages (set values) provided as an advantage for the player.
A suggestion control means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of FIGS. 275 to 278) capable of executing suggestion control that can suggest the advantage set by the advantage setting means, and
Suggestion information setting means capable of setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing the suggestion control by the administrator, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the administrator can set any of a plurality of types of advantages (set values) provided as advantages for the player, and the set advantages can be set. It is possible to execute suggestion control that can suggest with respect to (set value). Then, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing the suggestion control can be set by the administrator. This makes it possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion staging type) according to the intention of the store, taking into consideration the sales strategy, etc., and suggests the advantage (set value) according to the intention. It can be carried out.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that when the setting suggestion effects I to V occur, it is determined that the setting value is equal to or higher than the predetermined setting value. The setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value (it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value), or there is a high possibility that the effect is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value. It may be a production that suggests. For example, the setting suggestion effect V is an effect that suggests that the set value is set 6 with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) (when the effect appears, the probability that the set value is set 6 is It may be 80%). Further, the setting suggestion effect I is an effect that suggests that the set value is set 2 or more with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) (when the effect appears, the set value is set 2 or more). The probability is 80%). Further, as the setting suggestion effect, an effect in which the setting value is determined to be an odd number (1, 3, or 5) (or suggests that there is a high possibility) and an effect in which the setting value is an even number (2, 4, Alternatively, an effect that is determined to be 6) (or suggests that there is a high possibility) may be adopted.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine also has a plurality of setting values (6 stages of "1" to "6") in which various data related to the pachinko game are different from each other, and an operation for changing the set setting value (setting change). And, it is possible to configure it so that an operation (setting confirmation) for confirming the set setting value can be performed. For example, when the power is not turned on, the setting key may be turned on, and the backup clear switch may be pressed and the power switch may be turned on to change the setting. It is possible to change the set value by pressing the setting switch in the setting change state. Further, for example, it is preferable to turn on the setting key while the power is not turned on, and turn on the power switch without pressing the backup clear clear switch to enter the setting confirmation state. .. In the setting confirmation state, for example, information indicating the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor, and the set value can be confirmed. The setting change state and the setting confirmation state are terminated by operating the setting key to OFF.

Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set when the setting suggestion effect setting screen is displayed. The setting suggestion effect setting screen may be displayed when the setting confirmation operation is being performed, or may be displayed when the setting change operation is being performed. In order to perform a setting confirmation operation or a setting change operation, it is necessary to operate a power switch or a setting key type switch (backup clear clear switch), and these switches are provided inside the cabinet G. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set by opening the front door (upper door mechanism UD or lower door mechanism DD). Alternatively, in a pachinko gaming machine, a setting change switch may be provided on the back side (rear side) of the main body. Basically, no one can enter the island, so in order to operate the back side of the main body (setting change switch housed in the board case etc. arranged on the back side), rotate the frame using the key. There is a need. Therefore, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) may be set when the frame is rotated. In other words, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be configured so that it can be set after the rotation opening / closing portion is opened. The rotary opening / closing portion may be a front door in a pachislot gaming machine, or may be a main body frame (a portion rotatable with respect to an outer frame) in a pachinko gaming machine. In any case, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set when the operation unit that the player cannot operate is operated.

In the tenth embodiment, as the situation where the menu screen is displayed, the situation where the game is not performed may be adopted, or the situation where the game is performed may be adopted. The "situation in which the game is being performed" refers to a state in which the game processing is not performed on the main control circuit side (that is, one game is completed and a BET operation or a start lever operation is awaited). .. The game processing is, for example, a processing related to a game performed after the BET operation (start lever operation) is performed and before the medal is paid out. The "situation in which the game is being played" may refer to a situation in which the demo screen is not displayed on the display device. The demo screen is a screen that is transferred when it is determined that the game has not been performed (waiting for customers). As the conditions for shifting to the demo screen, conventionally known conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, in a pachi-slot gaming machine, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses without BET being performed after the medal is paid out, and a predetermined time is not operated after automatic insertion by re-game. Conditions such as the passage of time, the operation of the C / P button, all credited medals being paid out, and the power being turned on (until BET is performed) are the conditions for transition to the demo screen. Can be mentioned. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation of the steering wheel after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a predetermined time elapses without winning a prize at the starting port after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The condition that the state where there is no hold and the symbol does not change continues for a predetermined time can be mentioned as a condition for transition to the demo screen. It can be said that the setting suggestion effect setting screen is a screen displayed in the "situation where the game is not performed".

(E-2) The gaming machine of the above (E-1).
The suggestion information setting means can set the suggestion information for each of a plurality of periods (setting suggestion effect period).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of the plurality of periods (setting suggestion effect period). This makes it possible to make the mode of suggestion regarding the advantage (setting value) different for each period (setting suggestion effect period), and let's formulate a sales strategy etc. according to each period (setting suggestion effect period). It is possible to meet the needs of the store.

However, it is not essential to provide multiple periods (setting suggestion effect period), and suggestion information (one for all periods) can be set regardless of such period. It may be configured as.

(E-3) The gaming machine according to (E-1) or (E-2).
The suggestion information setting means has a predetermined period (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”, “period H”, The suggestion information can be set for "period I" or "period J").
When the suggestion control means satisfies a predetermined condition (end condition of AT state) in the predetermined period, the suggestion control means corresponds to the suggestion information set for the predetermined period by the suggestion information setting means. Is feasible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, a predetermined period (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G” , "Period H", "Period I", or "Period J"), suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set, and a predetermined period ("Period A", "Period B", "Period") Predetermined conditions (AT state termination conditions) in "C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", or "Period J") ) Satisfies the predetermined period (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”, “period H”. , "Period I" or "Period J"), it is configured to be able to execute suggestion control according to the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type). As a result, the predetermined period ("period A", "period B", "period C", "period D", "period E", "period F", "period G", "period H", "period I" Or, when the predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied in the "period J"), the predetermined period ("period A", "period B", "period C", "period D", ". It is possible to make suggestions regarding the advantage (set value) in a manner corresponding to "period E", "period F", "period G", "period H", "period I", or "period J"). Yes, the predetermined period ("Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I" Or, it is possible to meet the needs of stores that are trying to formulate a sales strategy or the like focusing on "Period J").

In the tenth embodiment, an example in which the end condition of the AT state is adopted as a predetermined condition has been described. The predetermined conditions are not limited to this example, and any conditions can be appropriately adopted. Such conditions include, for example, a condition that a predetermined gaming state ends, a condition that a predetermined gaming state starts, a condition that a privilege is given to a player, and a predetermined combination. The condition that the winning combination is determined, the condition that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the like can be mentioned. As the predetermined gaming state, for example, it is possible to adopt a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player, and a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state (AT state, etc.) in the pachislot gaming machine. (ART state), a big hit game state in a pachinko gaming machine, a probabilistic game state, a game state such as a time-saving game state, and the like can be mentioned. These conditions may be adopted alone or in combination of a plurality of conditions. When a plurality of conditions are used together, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) may be set for each condition.

Further, when a plurality of types of predetermined gaming states are provided, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the condition relating to the first predetermined gaming state is satisfied, while the setting is set when the condition relating to the second predetermined gaming state is satisfied. It may be configured so that the suggestion effect is not performed. If the frequency of setting suggestion effects is too high, the player can easily detect the set value. By adopting such a configuration, the frequency can be adjusted. The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other, and such a first predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state. As the predetermined gaming state of, the pseudo BB (big bonus) and the pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted, respectively. The first predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the second predetermined gaming state, and conversely, the second predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state. It may be advantageous.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (end condition of AT state) is satisfied in one period (setting suggestion effect period), a predetermined condition (AT state) is satisfied in the period (setting suggestion effect period). It was explained that the setting suggestion effect is performed only when the end condition) is satisfied for the first time. However, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in one period (setting suggestion effect period), a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in the period (setting suggestion effect period). Even when it is the second time or later, the setting suggestion effect may be performed. When a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied multiple times, the probability that each setting suggestion effect will occur differs depending on how many times the predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied. May be. In this case, the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied may be counted for each period (setting suggestion effect period), or may be counted regardless of the period (setting suggestion effect period). It may be done.

In addition, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, a lottery (lottery for generating the setting suggestion effect) for determining whether or not to generate the setting suggestion effect is performed, and the lottery for generating the setting suggestion effect is performed. If you win, you may perform a setting suggestion effect. In addition, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, a lottery (specific image appearance lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to display a specific character image (specific image), and the specific image is specified. If the appearance lottery is won, the character image may be displayed. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed when the predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied. On the other hand, if a specific character image is displayed when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, it is always set when the predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied next time. You may make a suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect may be performed based on the set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), or may be performed by performing a predetermined setting suggestion effect. As a result, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to give the player motivation to continue the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine. The display timing of the specific character image is not limited to the time when a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied, and the specific character image can be displayed at any timing. For example, the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 298 may be adopted as the specific character image, and the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may be adopted as the display timing of the specific character image. good. In any case, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to configure the setting suggestion effect to be performed the next time a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied.

The setting suggestion effect (display of character images I to V) is performed only for a very short time (for example, within 3 seconds), and when the setting suggestion effect is started in one unit game, the setting suggestion effect is performed. The effect can be configured to be completed by the end of the one unit game (the state in which the character images I to V are displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). .. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may be terminated when the start lever operation for starting the next unit game is performed.

(E-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-3).
As the suggestion information, a plurality of types of suggestion information (“type A”, “type B”, and “type C”) are provided.
The suggestion information setting means can set one of the suggestion information selected from the plurality of types of suggestion information.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion information (“type A”, “type B”, and “type C”) are provided as suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type). , One suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) selected from a plurality of types of suggestion information (“type A”, “type B”, and “type C”) can be set. .. As a result, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion information (“type A”, “type B”, and “type C”) provided in advance. (Setting suggestion effect type) can be set, and the operation for setting the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be simplified by the administrator.

(E-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-4).
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) capable of transmitting information
The suggestion control means includes a notification control means capable of controlling the notification of information by the notification means.
When the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first advantage (setting 2) or the advantage more advantageous to the player than the first advantage as the information that can be notified by the notification means. The first information (character image I) that can be notified only to is provided.
In the notification control means, when the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is the first suggestion information (“type A”), the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first suggestion information. When the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the advantage or the first advantage, the notification means controls the notification of the first information regardless of the advantage set by the advantage setting means. It is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210) is higher than the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2). First information (character image I) that can be notified only when an advantage (set value) advantageous to the player is set is provided. Then, when the first suggestion information (“type A”) is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) Also, when an advantage (set value) advantageous to the player is set, the notification of the first information (character image I) can be controlled regardless of the set advantage (set value). Has been done. Thereby, through the first information (character image I), the first advantage (setting 2) or the advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set. It is possible to suggest that the information is provided, and it is possible to meet the needs of the store that wants to make a suggestion regarding the advantage (set value) in such an manner.

(E-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-5).
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) capable of transmitting information
The suggestion control means includes a notification control means capable of controlling the notification of information by the notification means.
As a plurality of types of advantages, at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage are provided.
As information that can be notified by the notification means, first information that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (Character image I) and the second information (character) that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage. Multiple types of information including image II) are provided,
In the notification control means, when the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is the second suggestion information (“type B”), the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first. When the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, one piece of information selected from the plurality of types of information according to the advantage set by the advantage setting means. Can be controlled to be notified by the notification means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, as information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210), the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2). The first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when is set, and the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. If so, a plurality of types of information including a second information (character image II) that cannot be notified are provided. Then, when the second suggestion information (“type B”) is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) If an advantage (set value) that is advantageous to the player is set, one piece of information selected from a plurality of types of information according to the set advantage (set value) is the notification means (main display). It is configured to be controllable so as to be notified by the device 210). Thereby, for example, the first advantage (setting 2) or the advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set through the first information (character image I). A second advantage (setting 3) or an advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) through the second information (character image II). It is possible to suggest that the value) is set, and it is possible to meet the needs of the store that wants to make a suggestion regarding the advantage (set value) in such an manner.

(E-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-6).
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) capable of transmitting information
The suggestion control means includes a notification control means capable of controlling the notification of information by the notification means.
As a plurality of types of advantages, at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage are provided.
As information that can be notified by the notification means, first information that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (Character image I) and the second information (character) that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage. Image II) is provided,
In the notification control means, when the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is the third suggestion information (“type C”), the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first. When it is an advantage, it is possible to control the notification of the first information by the notification means, and when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the second advantage, the notification means. It is possible to control the notification of the second information by
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, as information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210), the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2). The first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when is set, and the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. Second information (character image II) that cannot be notified if the information is present is provided. Then, when the third suggestion information (“type C”) is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), and the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first information is set. The notification of (character image I) can be controlled, and when the second advantage (setting 3) is set, the notification of the second information (character image II) can be controlled. There is. As a result, for example, when the second advantage (setting 3) is set, the suggestion is not through the first information (character image I) but through the second information (character image II). (It is possible to make a suggestion that is more advantageous to the player than the suggestion through the first information (character image I)), and the store that wants to make a suggestion regarding the advantage (set value) in such an embodiment. We can meet your needs.

In the above, it has been described that the setting 2 corresponds to the first advantage, but the first advantage may be any of the settings 3 to 5. Further, in the above, although it has been described that the setting 3 corresponds to the second advantage, the second advantage may be any of the settings 4 to 6. As long as the second advantage is an advantage (set value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, the first advantage is any advantage (setting) among settings 2 to 5. (Value) can be adopted, and as the second advantage, any advantage (set value) from the settings 3 to 6 can be adopted.

In the tenth embodiment, even when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion is used as suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type). It has been described that any one of the information (“type A”), the second suggestion information (“type B”), and the third suggestion information (“type C”) can be set. However, when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (“type A”) and the second suggestion information are set in the first place. ("Type B") and the third suggestion information ("Type C") may be configured so as not to be set. For example, when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (“type A”) and the second suggestion information (““ type A ”) are set. The type B ") and the third suggestion information ("type C ") may be configured so that they cannot be selected by the selection button.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), the first suggestion information (“type A”), the second suggestion information (“type B”), and the third suggestion information (“type C”). ") Was explained as being provided. The suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is not limited to these examples, and for example, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating the setting suggestion effect with a high probability and the setting suggestion effect are generated with a low probability. Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) and the like may be provided. On top of that, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating the setting suggestion effect with high probability is set, and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating the setting suggestion effect with low probability. It is possible to configure the winning probability of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect generation lottery to be different depending on the case where is set. Further, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating the setting suggestion effect is set with a high probability, the setting suggestion effect is generated with a high probability, but the setting value is relatively low or higher. The setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect I) is likely to occur, but the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect IV or the setting suggestion effect V) is determined to be higher than the relatively high setting value. May be configured so that Further, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating the setting suggestion effect is set with a low probability, the setting suggestion effect is generated with a low probability, while the setting suggestion effect is relatively high. Only the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, and the setting suggestion effect V) that is determined to be equal to or higher than the set value occurs (the setting suggestion effect I and the setting suggestion effect II do not occur). It may be configured.

The notification by the notification means is not limited to the display of the image, and may be a sound output, an light output, or any combination thereof. That is, the notification means may be an image display means (display device), a sound output means (speaker), or a light emitting means.

(E-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-7).
The suggestion information setting means sets the suggestion information in a state where one advantage is set by the advantage setting means, and then the advantage setting means sets an advantage different from the one advantage. If so, it is possible to maintain the suggestive information,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, after setting the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) in a state where one advantage (set value) is set, the one advantage (set value). When an advantage (set value) different from that is set, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be maintained. As a result, even if the setting of the advantage (setting value) is changed, it is not necessary to set the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) again, which is convenient for the administrator.

(E-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-8).
The suggestion information setting means is
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation for selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 Suggestion information setting means and
A second operation in which the suggestion information can be set for each of the plurality of setting targets by performing a specific operation (operation of inputting a password for setting suggestion effect setting or operation of selecting from presets for setting suggestion effect setting). Equipped with suggestion information setting means,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, each setting is performed by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation for selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). While it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for the target (setting suggestion effect period), specific operations (operation to enter a password for setting suggestion effect setting and operation to select from presets for setting suggestion effect setting). ) Is performed, suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). This makes it possible to make the mode of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (setting value) different for each setting target (setting suggestion effect period), and to create a sales strategy, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion effect period). It can meet the needs of the store that is trying to plan. In addition, when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect setting period), a specific operation (setting suggestion effect setting password input operation or setting suggestion effect setting) is used. By performing the operation of selecting from the presets), it is possible to save the trouble of repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (the operation of selecting the setting suggestion effect type), and it is possible to improve the convenience for the administrator.

(E-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-9).
The suggestion information setting means is
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation for selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 Suggestion information setting means and
When the suggestion information is set for each setting target by the first suggestion information setting means, the suggestion information for each setting target showing the correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information set for the setting target. Suggestion information registration means for each setting target that can register (preset for setting suggestion effect setting),
By performing the operation of selecting the suggestion information for each setting target registered by the suggestion information registration means for each setting target, the suggestion information for each setting target is responded to each of the plurality of setting targets. A second suggestion information setting means capable of setting the suggestion information is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, each of the plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period) is repeatedly subjected to a predetermined operation (operation for selecting the setting suggestion effect type). Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for the setting target (setting suggestion effect period), and in this way, suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is set for each setting target (setting suggestion effect period). ) Is set, a setting target indicating the correspondence between each setting target (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting target (setting suggestion effect period). It is possible to register each suggestion information (setting suggestion effect setting preset). Then, by performing an operation to select the suggestion information for each setting target (preset for setting suggestion effect setting) registered in this way, the suggestion information for each setting target is applied to each of the plurality of setting targets. It is configured so that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set according to (setting suggestion effect setting preset). As a result, it is possible to make the mode of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (set value) different for each setting target, and it is possible to meet the needs of the store that intends to formulate a sales strategy or the like according to each setting target. Further, once the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is set for each setting target, the setting target showing the correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting target. It is possible to register each suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), and when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting target in the same correspondence relationship next time, the registered setting The operation of selecting the suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting) for each target may be performed, and the convenience for the administrator can be improved.

(E-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-10).
Enter the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which the suggestion information for each setting target indicating the correspondence between each of the plurality of setting targets (period for setting suggestion effect) and the suggestion information for each setting target is encrypted. Equipped with possible input means,
When the encryption information is input by the input means, the suggestion information setting means responds to each of the plurality of setting targets according to the suggestion information for each setting target specified from the encryption information. Suggestion information can be set,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the correspondence between each of the plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting target (setting suggestion effect period). It is possible to input the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which the suggestion information for each setting target is encrypted, and when the encryption information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) is input, a plurality of settings are set. For each target (setting suggestion effect period), suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set according to the suggestion information for each setting target specified from the encryption information (setting suggestion effect setting password). It is configured as follows. This makes it possible to make the mode of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (setting value) different for each setting target (setting suggestion effect period), and to create a sales strategy, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion effect period). It can meet the needs of the store that is trying to plan. In addition, it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period) simply by inputting encryption information (setting suggestion effect setting password). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the administrator.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the encryption information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) can be input by operating the selection button and the enter button. The method of inputting the encrypted information into the gaming machine is not limited to the method of inputting the password by using an operation means such as a button or a touch panel. For example, a camera may be provided in the gaming machine, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as the encrypted information may be read by the camera. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the encrypted information can be transmitted from the management server to the gaming machine, or the encrypted information can be transmitted from the mobile terminal to the gaming machine by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the suggestion information for each setting target (preset for setting suggestion effect setting) indicating the correspondence relationship between each setting target (period for setting suggestion effect) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is encrypted. It was explained that the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) can be output. The method of outputting the encrypted information is not limited to the method of displaying the password on the display device. For example, the two-dimensional code may be displayed on the display device as the encrypted information. In this case, as described above, it is desirable to provide the gaming machine with a camera and to enable the camera to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as encrypted information. As a result, when a two-dimensional code is displayed as encrypted information in one game machine, the two-dimensional code is imaged by a camera provided in the mobile terminal, and the two-dimensional code is transmitted to the mobile terminal. By displaying the two-dimensional code with a camera provided in another game machine, the same suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) and the same suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set in the one game machine can be read. The effect type) can also be set in the other gaming machine.

In the above, it has been described that the setting suggestion effect period corresponds to the above setting target, but the above setting target is not limited to this example, and is a variable that can change with the passage of time (as the game progresses). It is possible to appropriately adopt the range to which the above belongs. The variable may be the number of unit games (for example, the number of games after the power is turned on) or the number of times a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied (for example, the number of AT ends). , The number of unit games in which a predetermined condition is satisfied may be the number of times, or may be the time. As a result, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the range to which the variable belongs at that time. Is possible. As described above, the predetermined conditions include, for example, a condition that the predetermined gaming state ends, a condition that the predetermined gaming state starts, a condition that the player is granted a privilege, and a predetermined condition. It is possible to adopt the condition that the combination of is determined as the internal winning combination, the condition that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the like. As the predetermined gaming state, for example, it is possible to adopt a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player, and a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state (AT state, etc.) in the pachislot gaming machine. (ART state), a big hit game state in a pachinko gaming machine, a probabilistic game state, a game state such as a time-saving game state, and the like can be mentioned.

When the above setting targets are adopted, for example, the setting targets corresponding to the early hours after the opening of the store in the morning (for example, "period A" shown in FIG. 281, "AT end once" shown in FIG. 282, and FIG. 283. By setting "Type C" for the indicated "10 o'clock to 11 o'clock" etc.), it is possible to attract customers at that time. In the tenth embodiment, the number of unit games as the variable or the number of times that a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied is the number of unit games performed after the power is turned on or the power is turned on. It has been described that it is the number of predetermined conditions (AT state end conditions) that have been satisfied since then. However, as the above variable, the number of unit games performed after the advantage (set value) is changed or a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) that is satisfied after the advantage (set value) is changed. The number of times may be adopted.

<Appendix F>
Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a lottery for winning combination and a sub reel for directing is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214500).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination may be stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation by the player. The combination of the symbols may not be stopped and displayed.

In this regard, some players perform an appropriate stop operation without thinking about anything in particular. However, in a unit game in which the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, such an appropriate stop operation is performed. If you do, you may miss the role. Therefore, it is desirable not to miss such a role even when the player performs an appropriate stop operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and even when the player performs an appropriate stop operation, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations that may be missed is stopped and displayed. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can provide an opportunity to play.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, when the winning combination (watermelon) that may be missed is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop lock to the middle stop lock is executed. It is configured to be. This makes it possible to prevent the winning combination (watermelon) from being missed by an appropriate stop operation, and the player is asked to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (watermelon). It can provide an opportunity to see the watermelon.

<Additional notes (others)>
Conventionally, multiple reels with multiple symbols arranged on each surface, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and multiple reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of multiple reels are pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it draws a lot based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected is known.

Further, conventionally, the game ball is identified on the display area of the variable display device by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in the game area where the launched game ball can roll. A variable display control means for controlling the variable display of information and controlling the derivation and display of the identification information on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the player when the derived and displayed identification information is in a predetermined combination. There is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player.

However, since the conventional pachislot machine and the pachinko machine do not have the configuration and function as a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

Although the first to tenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is merely exemplified, and the present invention is not particularly limited, and the specific configuration of each means and the like is appropriately redesigned. It is possible. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Further, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is various. In addition, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the documents and the like already disclosed be fully taken into consideration in the interpretation.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed by the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. Further, in each process, electrical or magnetic signals are transmitted / received, recorded, and the like. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is executed by various devices in principle. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

1 Pachislot machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device G Cabinet UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism

Claims (1)

With the screen
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen,
A cover member arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
The cover member is formed with a first opening opened toward the external space of the cover member and a second opening opened toward the first space formed inside the cover member. Cover,
The first space and the second space communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The second space can store liquid by closing the lower part.
The cover member is further formed with a wiring opening for inserting a wiring for connecting a device arranged outside the cover member and the projector.
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening.
The wiring opening can be inserted with a mechanism for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images